Text

Request for Review and Approval of Changes to the Safety Analysis Report and to a Confirmatory Order Clarifying an Alternate Means of Compliance for Pressurizer Heaters Emergency Power Supply
	ML24184B775
Person / Time
Site:	Arkansas Nuclear
Issue date:	07/02/2024
From:	Couture P; Entergy Operations
To:	; Office of Nuclear Reactor Regulation, Document Control Desk
References
	1CAN072401
	Download: ML24184B775 (1)
	v • d • e

Phil Couture Senior Manager Fleet Regulatory Assurance - Licensing Tel 601-368-5102

1CAN072401 10 CFR 50.9 0

July 2, 2024

ATTN: Document Control Desk U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission Washington, DC 20555-0001

Subject:

Request for Review and Approval of Changes to the Safety Analysis Report and to a Confirmatory Order Clarifying an Alternate Means of Compliance for Pressurizer Heaters Emergency Power Supply

Arkansas Nuclear One, Unit 1 NRC Docket No. 50-313 Renewed Facility Operating License No. DPR-51

Pursuant to 10 CFR 50.90, Entergy Operations, Inc. (Entergy), requests an amendment to the Renewed Facility Operating License Number DPR-51 for Arkansas Nuclear One, Unit 1 (ANO-1). Entergy requests the Nuclear Regulatory Commissions (NRC's) review and approval of a change to the ANO-1 Safety Analysis Report (SAR) and to the Confirmatory Order to implement all Category A lessons learned requirements by January 31, 1980 (Reference 1) for ANO-1. The changes address manual actions outside the control room to restore emergency power to the pressurizer heaters. These actions are required due to the plant's design. This matter has been discussed with the NRC Project Manager for ANO-1.

In 2015, Entergy discovered and documented an issue with providing sufficient pressurizer heater capacity during a postulated loss of offsite power (LOOP) event. The event also includes the failure of the Green-train electrical power resulting in loss of power to the pressurizer low-low level interlock.

The pressurizer low-low level heater interlock prevents the heaters from being damaged due to being uncovered. The setpoint is when the pressurizer level is less than or equal to 55 inches.

This interlock is powered by the Green-train elec trical power distribution system only. If this interlock is de-energized, it would prevent the ability to utilize the required heaters, even if Red-train power and adequate pressurizer level exists.

Additional information and documents to support this application are provided in the enclosure and attachments. The enclosure provides the description of the proposed changes, justification of the changes, no significant hazards consideration determination, and evaluation for environmental impacts. Attachment 1 provides a copy of the marked-up SAR page for the proposed change. Attachments 2, 3 and 4 provides the ANO-1 procedures, cited in the

Entergy Operations, Inc., 1340 Echelon Parkway, Jackson, MS 39213 1CAN072401 Page 2 of 3

Enclosure. Attachment 5 provides a single-line depiction of the ANO-1 electrical power distribution system.

The proposed approach is informed by the correspondence in References 2 and 3.

The proposed amendment has been evaluated in accordance with 10 CFR 50.91(a)(1) using the criteria in 10 CFR 50.92(c) and it has been determined that the proposed amendment involves no significant hazards consideration.

Entergy has determined that the proposed amendm ent does not require any exemptions or relief from regulatory requirements. Also, Entergy has determined that this request does not affect conformance with any General Design Criteria (GDC) differently than described in the ANO-1 SAR. Additionally, Entergy has determined that the proposed amendment does not require any technical specification changes.

There are two new regulatory commitments made in this submittal. These commitments are summarized in Attachment 6.

Review and approval is requested by August 15, 2025.

After NRC staff approval of this amendment r equest, the SAR will be revised as depicted in and the procedure revised, within 90 days of issuance of the amendment.

If there are any questions or if additional information is needed, please contact Riley Keele, Manager, Regulatory Assurance, Arkansas Nuclear One, at 479-858-7826.

I declare under penalty of perjury that the foregoing is true and correct. Executed on July 2, 2024.

Respectfully,

Phil Couture

PC/rwc

Enclosure:

Description of Proposed Changes

Attachments to Enclosure

1. Proposed Final Safety Analysis Report Change (mark-up)

2. ANO-1 Emergency Operating Procedure, OP-1202.007, "Degraded Power,"

Revision 018 - For Information Only

3. ANO-1 Abnormal Operating Procedure, OP-1203.015, "Pressurizer System Failure,"

Revision 024 - For Information Only 1CAN072401 Page 3 of 3

4. ANO-1 Operating Procedure, OP-1107.003. Inverter and 120 Vital AC Distribution, Revision 035 - For Information Only

5. Single line description of the ANO-1 Electr ical Distribution System - For Information Only

6. List of Regulatory Commitments

References:

1. NRC letter to now Entergy Operations, Inc. (Entergy), "Confirmatory Order, Order Confirms Your Commitment as Stated in Your Letters to Implement All Category A Lessons Learned Requirements Prior to Plant Operations After 1/31/80," ADAMS Accession Number ML021220215, (1CNA018003), dated January 2, 1980.

2. NRC letter to Duke Energy Corporation, "Catawba Nuclear Station, Units 1 and 2, (Catawba) Revision Request to NUREG-0737, Item II.F.1, for Containment Hydrogen Monitors (TAC NOS. MC8442 AND MC8443)," ADAMS Accession Number ML060730363, dated March 28, 2006.

3. NRC letter to Consolidated Edison Company, "Indian Point Nuclear Generating Unit No. 2 - Three Mile Island (TMI) Action Plan Item III.D.3.4 Regarding Control Room Habitability (TAC NO. MB1475)," AD AMS Accession Number ML011780246, dated July 31, 2001.

cc: NRC Region IV Regional Administrator

NRC Senior Resident Inspector - Arkansas Nuclear One

NRC Project Manager - Arkansas Nuclear One

Designated Arkansas State Official

Enclosure

1CAN072401

Description of Proposed Changes 1CAN072401 Enclosure Page 1 of 16

Description of Proposed Changes

Introduction

On September 13, 1979 (Reference 1), the Nuclear Regulatory Commission (NRC) issued a letter to each power reactor licensee which defined a set of "short term" or Category A requirements resulting from the NRC's investigat ion of the Three Mile Island (TMI) accident.

Reference 2 provided additional clarific ation of the NRC staff's requirements.

NUREG-0578, "TMI-2 Lessons Learned Task Force Status Report and Short-Term Recommendations", (Reference 1) Item 2.1.1 requires the minimum-number of pressurizer heaters needed to maintain the Reactor Coolant System (RCS) in natural circulation conditions to be powered from redundant, emergency diesel generator-backed sources, which will ensure power availability during a Loss of Offsite Power (LOOP) event. After a plant trip initiated by a LOOP, this minimum number of pressurizer heaters is needed to maintain RCS pressure control in hot standby (Mode 3) while compensating for ambient losses and RCS leakage.

NUREG-0737, Clarification of TMI Action Plan Requirements," Item II.E.3.1 clarified the requirements of Reference 1 Item 2.1.1 to require that any changeover of the heaters from normal offsite power to emergency onsite power is to be accomplished manually in the control room (Reference 2).

=

Background===

There are several requirements listed in Item 2.1.1 of Reference 1. They were all Category A requirements. The following is the specific requirement being discussed.

Provide redundant emergency power for the minimum number of pressurizer heaters required to maintain natural circulation conditions in the event of loss of offsite power.

Also provide emergency power to the control and motive power systems for the power-operated relief valves and associated block valves and to the pressurizer level indication instrument channels.

The NRC issued a Confirmatory Order (Reference 3) to Arkansas Nuclear One, Unit 1 (ANO-1),

to implement all Category A requirements (exce pt the requirement of 2.1.7.a of NUREG-0578) by January 31, 1980.

This requirement related to Item 2.1.1 of Reference 1 was clarified in Reference 2. The clarifications for Item 2.1.1 of Reference 1 are:

In order not to compromise independence between the sources of emergency power and still provide redundant capability to provide emergency power to the pressurizer heaters, each redundant heater or group of heaters should have access to only one Class 1E division power supply.

The number of heaters required to have access to each emergency 1CAN072401 Enclosure Page 2 of 16

power source is that number required to maintain natural circulation in the hot standby condition.

Any change-over of the heaters from normal offsite power to emergency onsite power is to be accomplished manually in the control room (emphasis added).

The intent of the Item 2.1.1 requirement is to maintain the reactor coolant in a subcooled condition with natural circulation at hot, high-pressure conditions for an extended time after a LOOP.

The pressurizer heaters are used to maintain pressure in the RCS so reactor coolant in the loops is subcooled and thus in the preferred state for heat transport to the steam generators (SGs). This function must be maintained with a LOOP. Consequently, the emphasis of the ANO-1 Technical Specification (TS) 3.4.9 Limiting Condition of Operation (LCO) is to ensure that the Engineered Safeguards (ES) bus powered heaters are adequate to maintain pressure for RCS loop subcooling with an extended LOOP.

While a LOOP is an initial condition or coincident event assumed in many accident analyses, maintaining hot, high-pressure conditions over an extended time is not evaluated as part of SAR accident analyses.

Current ANO-1 Configuration

The design of the ANO-1 power supply for the pressurizer heaters, documented in SAR Section 4.2.4.4, provides the capability to supply, from either the offsite power source or the emergency power source (i.e., the units Emer gency Diesel Generators (EDGs), when offsite power is not available) and associated controls necessary to establish and maintain natural circulation at hot standby conditions. In addition, the Station Blackout (SBO) DG can be a source of emergency power for the pressurizer heaters from either the Red- or Green-train electrical power distribution system.

The heaters are arranged in 14 groups and are controlled by the pressure controller. Two groups utilize modulating control and will normally operate at partial capacity to replace heat lost, thus maintaining pressure at the setpoint. On-off control is used for the remaining 12 groups. A low-low level interlock prevents the heaters from being energized with the heaters uncovered (less than 55-inch minimum level requirement).

Two separate sets of heaters are supplied by the EDGs. The remaining heaters required to meet the TS required capacity, are powered from a swing bus which can be supplied by either EDG. This ensures emergency power redundancy to sufficient heater capacity to establish and maintain pressure control at hot standby during a LOOP.

Entergy previously committed to provide the capability to power the TS required pressurizer heater capacity from redundant emergency power sources within two (2) hours of a LOOP event (Reference 4). Any changeover of the heaters from normal offsite power to emergency onsite power is to be accomplished manually in the control room (Reference 2).

1CAN072401 Enclosure Page 3 of 16

In 2015 Entergy discovered and documented an issue with providing sufficient pressurizer heater capacity during a postulated LOOP event. The event also includes the failure of the Green-train electrical power resulting in loss of power to the pressurizer low-low level interlock.

The pressurizer low-low level heater interlock prevents the heaters from being damaged due to being uncovered. The setpoint is when the pressurizer level is less than or equal to 55 inches.

This interlock is powered by the Green-train electrical power distribution system only. If this interlock is de-energized, it would prevent the ability to utilize the required heaters, even if Red-train power and adequate pressurizer level exists. Attachment 5 provides a single line of the ANO-1 electrical power distribution system.

It should be noted that the failure of the Red-train electrical distribution system does not lead to this condition.

In the event of the LOOP with failure of Green-train emergency power, the design of ANO-1 requires manual operator actions outside the control room to restore power to the pressurizer low-low level heater interlock allowing for minimum TS required pressurizer heater capacity powered by Red-train emergency power. This is contrary to the NUREG-0737 requirement of "Any change-over of the heaters from normal offsite power to emergency onsite power is to be accomplished manually in the control room".

During the third quarter of 2022, the NRC resident inspectors at ANO identified two examples of a Green, non-cited violation (Reference 5) of the Confirmatory Order (Reference 3), for ANO-1s failure to implement requirements set forth in Reference 1, specifically Item 2.1.1, Emergency Power for the Pressurizer Heaters.

PROPOSED AMENDMENT AND JUSTIFICATION

Entergy proposes an amendment to the ANO-1 SAR and the Reference 1 Confirmatory Order to provide an allowance for manual actions outside the control room to restore emergency power to the pressurizer heaters. The proposed change to each document is described below. In addition, the justification for these changes is provided.

Proposed Change to ANO-1 SAR

Entergy is proposing an amendment to the ANO-1 SAR due to plant design. Specifically, Section 4.2.4.4, "Pressurizer Heaters". The change is to add the following to this section:

Upon failure of Green-train electrical power, changeover includes actions performed locally at 120 VAC instrument panels Y01 and Y02 to restore power to the Pressurizer Low-Low Level Interlock. This action is outside the control room.

provides the mark-up of the SAR.

1CAN072401 Enclosure Page 4 of 16

Proposed Changed to the 1980 Confirmatory Order

With the proposed SAR change, Entergy is proposing an amendment to the 1980 Confirmatory Order (Reference 3) with the following (proposed change underlined) to the NUREG-0737 Three Mile Island (TMI) action plan Item II.3.E.1:

Clarification (4)

Any changeover of the heaters from normal offsite power to emergency onsite power is to be accomplished manually in the control room. Upon failure of Green-train electrical power, changeover includes actions performed locally at 120 VAC instrument panels Y01 and Y02 to restore power to the Pressurizer Low-Low Level Interlock. This action is outside the control room.

Justification

To support the preparation of this amendment request, Entergy reviewed the operating experience related to pressurizer heaters. This review determined that the most relevant submittal was Waterford's "Request for Review of Change to Updated Final Safety Analysis Report Clarifying Pressurizer Heaters Function for Natural Circulation at the Onset of a Loss of Offsite Power," ADAMS Accension No. M L13316C052, dated November 11, 2013, and the subsequent responses to the NRC's Request for Additional Information.

Information Notice (IN) 97-78 (Reference 6), "Crediting Operator Actions in Place of Automatic Actions and Modifications of Operator Actions, Including Response Times" provides the guidance used in the justification of the proposed amendment. This IN discusses inappropriately crediting operator actions in place of automated system or component actuations.

It should be noted that ANO-1 is not replacing an automatic system or component actuation with operator actions. The actions required for the changeover of the onsite electrical power supply for the pressurizer low-low level interlock, are manual actions contained in the appropriate ANO-1 procedures. No new actions are being proposed.

As described in IN 97-78, the NRC's review of licensees' analyses typically includes, but is not limited to,

(1) the specific operator actions required;

(2) the potentially harsh or inhospitable environmental conditions expected;

(3) a general discussion of the ingress/egress paths taken by the operators to accomplish functions;

(4) the procedural guidance for required actions;

(5) the specific operator training necessary to carry out actions, including any operator qualifications required to carry out actions; 1CAN072401 Enclosure Page 5 of 16

(6) any additional support personnel and/or equipment required by the operator to carry out actions;

(7) a description of information required by the control room staff to determine whether such operator action is required, including qualified instrumentation used to diagnose the situation and to verify that the required action has successfully been taken;

(8) the ability to recover from credible errors in performance of manual actions, and the expected time required to make such a recovery; and

(9) consideration of the risk significance of the proposed operator actions.

Each of these items are listed again, below, with Entergy's response to each one, as it relates to the proposed alternative.

(1) The specific operator actions required.

Operators will be required to manually re-energize the 120 VAC instrument AC distribution panel Y02 (Green-train) from 120 VAC instrument AC distribution panel Y01 (Red-train) from outside the control room. Attachment 5 prov ides a single-line of the ANO-1 electrical distribution system.

(2) The potentially harsh or inhospitable environmental conditions expected.

The environmental conditions during this scenario will remain similar to what it is normally. No additional harsh or inhospitable environment conditions will be generated due to the LOOP concurrent with the reactor trip and the failure of the Green-train electrical distribution system are expected to be present. The Turbine Building will have a manageable increase in temperature due to the loss of Turbine Building ventilation (e.g., manageable increase in temperature, little to no increase in humidity).

(3) A general discussion of the ingress/egress paths taken by the operators to accomplish functions.

The operator will be dispatched to the two separate locations for the Y01 and the Y02 120 VAC instrument AC distribution panels.

The path to Red-train 120 VAC instrument AC distribution panel Y01 from the control room is once an operator leaves the control room, they will cross the turbine deck and go down one flight of stairs to the entrance to the Lower South Electrical Equipment Room (orange door).

Once there, they will then open the High Energy Line Break orange door, badge through the security door, close the orange door. The Y01 panel is beside the security door.

The path from the control room to Green-train 120 VAC instrument AC distribution panel Y02 is through Controlled Access (CA) (on the same elevation as the control room). The operator will 1CAN072401 Enclosure Page 6 of 16

sign onto the appropriate Radiation Work Permit (RWP) and enter the CA. The operator will be on the ANO-2 side of the elevation. The operator will have to crossover (one intervening fire door) to the ANO-1 side and enter the Upper North Electrical Penetration Room (UNEPR). Y02 is on the north wall just after entering the UNEPR.

Battery backed emergency lighting is available for the entirety of both paths and in the rooms.

Operators can also use handheld flashlights, if needed.

(4) The procedural guidance for required actions.

The ANO-1 operators will have entered the Emergency Operating Procedure (EOP) for Degraded Power (Reference 7) (Attachment 2) due to the LOOP. For this scenario, it is assumed that the #1 EDG (Red-train) starts and re-energizes the Red-train vital busses.

Reference 7 then would require the operators to try to start the #2 EDG (Green-train). If that is unsuccessful, the operator would attempt to start the Station Blackout (SBO) DG. If the SBO DG also fails to start, the crew will continue with the steps in Reference 7.

Once the unit is in a stable condition, the operators will investigate any equipment control problems, and this is where they will come back to the pressurizer heaters. If the heaters are not operating in Automatic and the pressurizer level is greater than 55 inches, the operators will then enter the Pressurizer Systems Failure Abnormal Operating Procedure (AOP) (Reference 8)

(Attachment 3). Step 6 of Reference 8 determines if Y02 is deenergized.

If it is, then the AOP directs operators to re-energize Y02 from Y01 by cross tying the panels in accordance with OP-1107.003. Inverter and 120 Vital AC Distribution procedure (Reference 9)

(Attachment 4).

(5) The specific operator training necessary to carry out actions, including any operator qualifications required to carry out actions.

Training on the use of the Degraded Power EOP is on a 2-year frequency. However, Degraded Power conditions are often used in other training scenarios. Therefore, training on Degraded Power is performed at least yearly if not more frequently. The case of a LOOP concurrent with the loss of an electrical train distribution is one way to enter the Degraded Power procedure.

The loss of the grid can manifest itself as a Degraded Power situation, where one or more diesel generators, including the SBO DG, are available. If there is a loss of grid without diesel generators available, the Blackout EOP would apply which is also trained on a 2-year frequency.

Loss of an electrical distribution train (without a loss of grid) is handled by the Loss of Load Center Abnormal Operating Procedure (AOP) which is also trained on a 2-year frequency.

The Pressurizer System Failure (AOP) is trained on a 2-year cycle.

The ANO Operations Training Department has a Job Performance Measure (JPM) that is used periodically, and it is for powering Y02 from Y01 Without Paralleling Sources per 1CAN072401 Enclosure Page 7 of 16

Reference 9. This is the task that would be performed if Y02 was de-energized during a LOOP and needed to be re-energized from Y01 to restore power to the pressurizer low-low heater interlock. This JPM is available for use during the ANO-1 Licensed Operator Annual Examinations and could be a task incorporated as part of Initial Licensed Operator Examinations. Since this task is the subject of an approved JPM, it indicates this is an activity the operators have sufficient knowledge of and can be expected to perform at any time.

The last time this JPM was administered was in 2022 during the ANO-1 Licensed Operator Annual Examination.

There are no expected environmental conditions or other required actions that could delay completion of the task. The only delays are entering and exiting controlled access and that is incorporated as part of the JPM performance.

(6) Any additional support personnel and/or equipment required by the operator to carry out actions.

One licensed Reactor Operator (RO) is requir ed to perform the manual actions outside the control room as directed by the procedures cited above. The ANO Emergency Plan requires two ROs to be part of the minimum staff for each shift. This operator is one member of the TS required minimum staffing. No additional personnel are required to perform the described manual actions.

Keys 47 and 48 are procedurally required to perform the described manual actions to power Y02 from Y01. These keys are available in the Shift Manager's office adjacent to the control room. If required to perform the described manual actions, the keys will be issued to the RO.

The RO would then be dispatched to perform the required manual actions. No additional equipment is required.

(7) A description of information required by the control room staff to determine whether such operator action is required, including qualified instrumentation used to diagnose the situation and to verify that the required action has successfully been taken.

Per the EOP, the operators are required to verify the pressurizer heaters are operating in Automatic with the pressurizer level above the low-low interlock. If the operators are not observing satisfactory responses, this is the first indication that there is an issue with the operation of the pressurizer heaters.

The operators should note this issue and continue to finish the remaining steps of the EOP to restore RCS makeup and Reactor Coolant Pump (RCP) seal injection and check for any heat transfer upsets.

Once the plant is in a stable configuration, the operators will investigate any equipment control problems, and this is where they will come back to the pressurizer heaters not operating correctly. This condition will take them to Reference 8. Step 6 of this AOP determines if panel 1CAN072401 Enclosure Page 8 of 16

Y02 is deenergized. If it is, the operators will be directed to re-energize it from Y01 by cross tying the panels in accordance with Reference 9.

Proper operation of the required pressurizer heaters and the proper response of the RCS are the verification that the manual actions were successful.

(8) The ability to recover from credible errors in performance of manual actions, and the expected time required to make such a recovery.

There are no credible errors in the performance of the manual actions listed above; therefore, there are no recoveries required.

Existing procedures allow for minimal disruptions because the operator is familiar with the actions they must take and there is confidence that the operators can complete these actions within the time available.

(9) Consideration of the risk significance of the proposed operator actions.

The risk associated with the proposed changes to the Confirmatory Order and SAR is minimal/negligible since no new operator actions are required.

Entergy has performed calculations using the Modular Accident Analysis Program for LWR Power Plants (MAAP) Code Revision 4.07 for LOOP scenarios with and without pressurizer heaters to determine sequence timing and succ ess criteria. These evaluations have been reviewed and it was determined that pressurizer heaters have no influence on the success criteria. The pressurizer heaters are not credited as a Mitigating System in the ANO-1 Probabilistic Risk Assessment (PRA).

In accordance with NUREG-1764 (Reference 16), the manual action to restore power to the pressurizer heaters are considered low risk importance because they are not credited in the Chapter 15 safety analyses and not credited in the PRA. The requirement for emergency power supplies is only based on NUREG-0737 to maintain a subcooled condition for an undefined, but extended, time period after a loss of offsite power. This action should receive a Level III review by the NRC and no detailed Human Factors Engineering (HFE) review is necessary.

Additional Information

Time Critical Actions

Entergy has reviewed the manual actions that are required outside the control room to determine if they are Time Critical Actions (TCAs) in accordance with the Entergy's fleet procedure EN-OP-123, "Time Critical Action Pr ogram Standard." A TCA is an action where credit is taken in a plant licensing basis document (i.e., Confirmatory Orders) to perform a manual action within a specified time (Reference 10).

1CAN072401 Enclosure Page 9 of 16

ANO-1 previously committed to having the TS required heater capacity restored within 2 hours2.314815e-5 days 5.555556e-4 hours 3.306878e-6 weeks 7.61e-7 months following a LOOP to assure proper control for natural circulation in the hot standby condition (Mode 3). Therefore, the manual actions described above are TCAs.

A review of the data associated with the 2022 performances of the JPM described previously provides an average completion time for these activities of 12.6 minutes from the time the cue was provided until the evolution was completed. Success criteria is Y02 powered from Y01.

The estimated time to perform all the actions in the Reference 7 EOP condition and then getting to the step to re-energize Y02, is approximately 30 - 45 minutes. Add in the average time the JPM was completed recently and the time to success is approximately 1 hour1.157407e-5 days 2.777778e-4 hours 1.653439e-6 weeks 3.805e-7 months (or half the time ANO-1 committed to (Reference 4)).

Upon approval of this LAR, Entergy will revise ANO-1 AOP, OP-1203.015, "Pressurizer System Failure," (Reference 8) to include the TCA in accordance with ANO-1 Procedure OP-1015.029, "Unit 1 Emergency and Abnormal Operating Procedure Writer's Guide".

The fleet procedure governing plant modifications, EN-DC-115, "Engineering Change Process," states "This procedure, along with its progenies, constitute the single process governing an Engineering Change, including changes to plant related structures, systems, and components (SSCs)." In addition, EN-OP-123, provides a means to ensure changes to the plant or procedures or protocols do not invalidate assumed action times. The guidance in these procedures ensures that potential changes to EOPs are identified and addressed during the modification process.

Independence of Emergency Power Sources

This electrical crosstie does not compromise the requirement of Reference 2 concerning the independence between the sources of emergency power. The ANO-1 design, and procedures allow for this crosstie with the reactor shutdown. In addition, when the panels are crosstied, the source of emergency power remains the Red-train until the Green-train emergency power is restored, the crosstie between Y01 and Y02 have been disconnected, and the normal power source for panels Y01 and Y02 has been restored.

This amendment is seeking approval to perform manual actions outside the control room to utilize the one available source of emergency power until the redundant power source is available.

REGULATORY ANALYSIS

Applicable Regulatory Requirements / Criteria

10 CFR 50.90, "Application for amendment of license, construction permit, or early site permit," requires that when a licensee desires to amend the license or permit, application for an amendment must be filed with the NRC by fully describing the desired changes and following the form in the original license application.

1CAN072401 Enclosure Page 10 of 16

10 CFR 55.4, "Definitions," defines the "Systems approach to training".

10 CFR 50.120, "Training and qualification of nuclear power plant personnel," required that the licensee maintain an adequate training program for plant personnel position categories.

While ANO is not licensed to NUREG-0800, "Standard Review Plan [SRP] for the Review of Safety Analysis Reports for Nuclear Power Plants: LWR [Light-Water Reactor] Edition" (SRP), it does provide guidance to the NRC in performing safety reviews of operating license applications under 10 CFR 50. ANO did review the following sections:

SRP Chapter 13, Section 13.2.1, "Reactor Operator Requalification Program; Reactor Operator Training," Revision 4, dated August 2016 (Reference 11), ensures that the proposed licensed operator training program description contains an adequate format, attributes, and level of detail that the training program shall be able to provide qualified personnel to operate and to maintain the facility in a safe and efficient manner, as well as to keep the facility in compliance with its license, technical specifications, and applicable regulations.

SRP Chapter 13, Section 13.5.2.1, "Operating and Emergency Operating Procedures,"

Revision 2, dated March 2007 (Reference 12), details the NRC's review of the applicant's plan for development and implementation of oper ating procedures as described in the applicant's safety analysis report.

SRP Chapter 18.0, "Human Factors Engineering," Revision 3, dated December 2016 ing (Reference 13), provides the regulatory guidance used by the NRC staff while review HFE considerations of operating license applications, design certifications, plant modifications, and important human actions.

ANO training is controlled by the Entergy' s Quality Assurance Program Manual (QAPM).

Appendix A to 10 CFR Part 50 - General Design Criteria for Nuclear Power Plants," establishes the principal design criteria for a 10 CFR 50 licensed facility. General Design Criterion (GDC) 17 and 19 are applicable to this request.

GDC 17 "Electric power systems," states in part:

An onsite electric power system and an offsite electric power system shall be provided to permit functioning of structures, system s, and components important to safety. The safety function for each system (assuming the other system is not functioning) shall be to provide sufficient capacity and capability to assure that (1) specified acceptable fuel design limits and design conditions of the reactor coolant pressure boundary are not exceeded as a result of anticipated operational occurrences and (2) the core is cooled and containment integrity and other vital functions are maintained in the event of postulated accidents.

Each of these circuits shall be designed to be available in sufficient time following a loss of all onsite alternating current power supplies and the other offsite electric power circuit, 1CAN072401 Enclosure Page 11 of 16

to assure that specified acceptable fuel design limits and design conditions of the reactor coolant pressure boundary are not exceeded.

GDC 19, "Control room," states, in part:

A control room shall be provided from which actions can be taken to operate the nuclear power unit safely under normal conditions and to maintain it in a safe condition under accident conditions, including loss-of-coolant accidents.

NRC IN 97-78 (Reference 6), discusses inappropriately credited operator actions in place of automated system or component actuations. ANO-1 is not replacing the automatic system or component actuation with a manual operator action.

NUREG-0700 (Reference 14) discusses the review guidelines for the physical and functional characteristics of human-system interfaces.

NUREG-0711 (Reference 15) provides guidance to veri fy that the HFE aspects of the plant are developed, designed, and evaluated via a structured analysis founded on HFE principles that are acceptable to the NRC staff.

NUREG-1764 (Reference 16) provides guidance for reviewing changes in human actions.

NUREG-0737 provides clarification to the requirement 2.1.1 of Reference 1. The regulatory requirements pertaining to Emergency Power Supply for Pressurizer Heaters for Pressurized Water Reactors, described in NUREG-0737,Section II.E.3.1, are as follows:

Clarification

(1) Redundant heater capacity must be provided, and each redundant heater or group of heaters should have access to only one Class 1E division power supply.

(2) The number of heaters required to have access to each emergency power source is that number required to maintain natural circulation in the hot standby condition.

(3) The power sources need not necessarily have the capacity to provide power to the heaters concurrently with the loads required for loss-of-coolant accident.

(4) Any changeover of the heaters from normal offsite power to emergency onsite power is to be accomplished manually in the control room.

(5) In establishing procedure to manually load the pressurizer heaters onto the emergency power sources, careful consideration must be given to:

(a) which ESF loads may be appropriately shed for a given situation.

(b) reset of the safety injection actuation signal to permit the operation of the heaters; and 1CAN072401 Enclosure Page 12 of 16

(c) instrumentation and criteria for operator use to prevent overloading a diesel generator.

(6) The Class 1E interfaces for main power and control power are to be protected by safety-grade circuit breakers (see also Regulatory Guide 1.75).

(7) Being non-Class 1E loads, the pressurizer heaters must be automatically shed from the emergency power sources upon the occurrence of a safety injection actuation signal (see item 5.b. above).

The proposed changes to the 1980 Confirmatory Order and the ANO-1 SAR have been evaluated in accordance with the regulatory requirements and guidance listed above to determine whether applicable regulations and requirements continue to be met.

There are no specific GDCs associated with pressurizer heaters or the use of operator aids within the TSs. Pressurizer heaters are discussed in various documents, such as NUREG-0737. However, the proposed amendment does not eliminate the requirement of maintaining pressurizer heaters, but only acts to provide an allowance for manual actions outside of the control room to maintain the emergency power supply to the pressurizer heaters.

The proposed changes do not change any Safety Limits, TS limits or operating requirements.

The manual actions outside the control room described above are in current procedures and the operators are trained on the use of those procedures.

Conclusion

Entergy proposes an amendment to the 1980 Confirmatory Order to allow manual actions outside of the control room to restore power to the pressurizer heaters and describe these actions in SAR Section 4.2.4.4 as contained in Attachment 1.

Entergy has concluded that ANO-1 has provided adequate technical bases for revising the 1980 Confirmatory Order and SAR 4.2.4.4.

Entergy has determined that the proposed amendm ent does not require any exemptions or relief from regulatory requirements. Also, Entergy has determined that this request does not affect conformance with any General Design Criteria (GDC) differently than described in the ANO-1 SAR. Additionally, Entergy has determined that the proposed amendment does not require any technical specification changes.

NO SIGNIFICANT HAZARDS CONSIDERATION

Using the criteria in 10 CFR 50.92, "Issuance of amendment," Entergy Operations, Inc.

(Entergy), has evaluated the proposed amendment to the ANO-1 1980 Confirmatory Order and the ANO-1 SAR, requiring that any changeover of the pressurizer heaters from normal offsite power to emergency onsite power is to be accomplished manually in the control room.

1CAN072401 Enclosure Page 13 of 16

Entergy has evaluated the proposed amendment to determine if a significant hazards consideration is involved by focusing on the three standards set forth in 10 CFR 50.92, "Issuance of amendment," as discussed below:

1. Do the proposed alternatives for compliance involve a significant increase in the probability or consequences of an accident previously evaluated?

Response: No.

The proposed changes to the SAR and the Reference 1 Confirmatory Order would provide an allowance for operators to perform manual actions outside of the control room to maintain emergency power to the pressurizer heaters.

The pressurizer heaters are not themselves a credible initiator of any accident, and the proposed changes make no changes to the pressurizer heaters themselves, so the probability of an accident will not be increased. The pr oposed changes would not change the source term used to determine offsite and onsite doses nor adversely impact any mitigating systems, so the consequences of an accident will not be increased.

Therefore, the probability or consequences of any accident previously evaluated will not be increased by the proposed changes.

2. Does the proposed change create the possibility of a new or different kind of accident from any accident previously evaluated?

Response: No.

The proposed changes to the SAR and the Reference 1 Confirmatory Order would provide an allowance for operators to perform manual actions outside of the control room to maintain emergency power to the pressurizer heaters.

The proposed changes do not involve a change in the design, configuration, or method of operation of Arkansas Nuclear One, Unit 1 (ANO-1) that could create the possibility of a new or different accident. Equipment will be operated in a manner for which it is currently designed.

The proposed changes do not impact any plant systems that are accident initiators or adversely impact any accident mitigating systems. The pressurizer heaters are not themselves a credible initiator of any accident.

Therefore, the proposed changes do not create the possibility of a new or different kind of accident from any previously evaluated.

1CAN072401 Enclosure Page 14 of 16

3. Does the proposed change involve a significant reduction in a margin of safety?

Response: No.

The proposed changes to the SAR and the Reference 1 Confirmatory Order would provide an allowance for operators to perform manual actions outside of the control room to maintain emergency power to the pressurizer heaters.

The proposed amendment does not change the way safety limits or limiting safety settings are determined. Because the pressurizer heaters will continue to be monitored and controlled, the proposed changes to the SAR and the 1980 ANO-1 Confirmatory Order will not present an adverse impact to plant operation or result in a significant reduction in a margin of safety. In addition, the pressurizer heaters are not a structure, system, or component which operating experience or probabilistic risk assessment has shown to be significant to public health and safety.

Therefore, the proposed changes will not involve a significant reduction in a margin of safety.

Based on the above, Entergy concludes that the proposed amendment presents no significant hazards consideration under the standards set forth in 10 CFR 50.92(c), and accordingly, a finding of "no significant hazards consideration" is justified.

Conclusion

Based on the considerations discussed above, (1) there is reasonable assurance that the health and safety of the public will not be endangered by operation in the proposed alternative, (2) such activities will continue to be conducted in accordance with the site licensing basis, and (3) the approval of the proposed alternative will not be inimical to the common defense and security or to the health and safety of the public.

ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATION

The proposed changes to the ANO-1 SAR and the 1980 Confirmatory Order do not involve (i) a significant hazards consideration, (ii) a significant change in the types or significant increase in the amounts of any effluent that may be released offsite, or (iii) a significant increase in individual or cumulative occupational radiation exposure. Accordingly, the proposed amendment meets the eligibility criterion for categorical exclusion set forth in 10 CFR 51.22(c)(9). Therefore, pursuant to 10 CFR 51.22(b), no environmental impact statement or environmental assessment need be prepared in connection with the proposed amendment.

PRECEDENTS

1. NRC Letter to Duane Arnold, Duane Arnold Energy Center - Issuance of Amendment 306 to Revised Technical Specification 3.5.1, ECCS - Operating (EPIDL-2017-LLA-0288),

ADAMS Accession Number ML18179A184, dated August 16, 2018.

1CAN072401 Enclosure Page 15 of 16

This amendment reduced the automatic depressurization supply nitrogen requirement to less than originally specified in NUREG-0737.

2. NRC letter to Entergy, Waterford Steam Electric Station, Unit 3 - Issuance of Amendment RE: Change to Updated Final Safety Analysis Report Clarifying Pressurizer Heaters Function for Natural Circulation at the Onset of a Loss of Offsite Power (TAC NO. MF3058),

ADAMS Accession Number ML15139A483, dated August 31, 2015.

This amendment added manual operator action outside the control room

REFERENCES

1. NUREG-0578, TMI-2 Lessons Learned Task Force Status Report and Short-Term Recommendations, ADAMS Accession Number ML090060030.

2. NUREG-0737, Clarification of TMI Action Plan Requirements, ADAMS Accession Number ML051400209, Published November 1980.

3. NRC letter to now Entergy Operations, Inc. (Entergy), "Confirmatory Order, Order Confirms Your Commitment as Stated in Your Letters to Implement All Category a Lessons Learned Requirements Prior to Plant Operations After 1/31/80," ADAMS Accession Number ML021220215, (1CNA018003), dated January 2, 1980.

4. Entergy letter to the NRC, "Lessons Learned Task Force Recommendations, ML19275A856, (0CAN107902), dated October 17, 1979.

5. NRC letter to Entergy, Arkansas Nuclear One - Entergy - Integrated Inspection Report 05000313/2022003 and 05000368/2022003 and Exercise of Enforcement Discretion, ADAMS Accession Number ML22312A527, (0CNA112202), dated November 9, 2022.

6. NRC Information Notice 97-78, "Crediting Operator Actions in Place of Automatic Actions and Modifications of Operator Actions, Including Response Times," ADAMS Accession Number ML031050065, dated October 23, 1997.

7. ANO-1 Emergency Operating Procedure, OP-1202.007, "Degraded Power," Revision 018 (Attachment 2).

8. ANO-1 Abnormal Operating Procedure, OP-1203.015, "Pressurizer System Failure,"

Revision 024 (Attachment 3).

9. ANO-1 Operating Procedure, OP-1107.003. Inverter and 120 Vital AC Distribution, Revision 035 (Attachment 4).

10. WCAP-16755-NP, "Operator Time Critical Action Program Standard," Revision 0, ML18250A150.

1CAN072401 Enclosure Page 16 of 16

11. SRP Chapter 13, Section 13.2.1, "Reactor Operator Requalification Program; Reactor Operator Training," Revision 4, dated August 2016.

12. SRP Chapter 13, Section 13.5.2.1, "Operating and Emergency Operating Procedures,"

ADAMS Accession Number ML070100635, Revision 2, dated March 2007

13. SRP Chapter 18.0, "Human Factors Engineering," Revision 3, dated December 2016.

14. NUREG-0700, "Human-System Interface Design Review Guidelines," Revision 3, ADAMS Accession Number ML20162A214, dated July 2020.

15. NUREG-0711, "Human Factors Engineering Program Review Model," Revision 3, ADAMS Accession Number ML12324A131, dated November 2012.

16. NUREG-1764, "Guidance for the Review of Changes to Human Actions," Revision 1, ADAMS Accession Number ML072640413, dated September 2007.

Enclosure, Attachment 1

1CAN072401

Proposed Final Safety Analysis Report Change (mark-up)

(1 page)

ARKANSAS NUCLEAR ONE UNIT 1

4.2.4.3 Pressurizer Spray

The pressurizer spray line originates at the discharge of a Reactor Coolant Pump in the same heat transport loop that contains the pressurizer. Pressurizer spray flow is controlled by an electric motor operated valve using on-off control in response to the opening and closing pressure setpoints. An electric motor operated valve in series with the spray valve provides a backup means of securing flow in the event the spray valve should stick open. In addition, the Non-Nuclear Instrumentation (NNI) System cabinet control circuitry was modified to prevent the loss of either the + 24 volt or - 24 volt buses from causing the spray valve to open and latch open until it is closed manually. Upon loss of +/- 24-volt power, the modified circuitry minimizes issuance of an "open" command and issues a "close" command.

4.2.4.4 Pressurizer Heaters

The pressurizer heaters replace heat lost during normal steady state operation, raise the pressure to normal operating pressure during RCS heatup from a cooled down condition, and restore system pressure following transients. The heaters are arranged in 14 groups and are controlled by the pressure controller. Two groups utilize modulating control and will normally operate at partial capacity to replace heat lost, thus maintaining pressure at the setpoint. On-off control is used for the remaining 12 groups. A low level interlock prevents the heaters from being energized with the heaters uncovered.

The pressurizer proportional heater feeders, RUB14 and RUB15, are furnished with current transducers providing an analog value of the circuit current to the SPDS. The magnitude of the current indicates operational status and integrity of the heater. Each diesel generator emergency bus supplies emergency power to 168 kW of pressurizer heaters. Two separate sets of heaters totaling 84 kW each are supplied by the diesel generators. The remaining 84 kW is powered from a swing bus which can be supplied by either diesel generator. This insures emergency power redundancy to sufficient heater capacity to establish and maintain pressure control at hot standby during a loss of offsite power.

The total heater design capacity of the pressurizer is 1,638 kW per Table 4-5. This 1638 kW of pressurizer heater capacity consists of three (3) separate heater bundles (upper, middle, and lower) each containing thirty-nine (39) individual non-replaceable heater elements rated nominal 14 kW per element.

If heater failure occurs, then spare heaters are used in accordance with Corrective Action Program (CAP) in order to maintain Technical Specification requirements.

Upon failure of Green-train electrical power, changeover includes actions performed locally at 120 VAC instrument panels Y01 and Y02 to restore power to the Pressurizer Low-Low Level Interlock. This action is outside the control room.

Amendment No. 4.2-17 Enclosure, Attachment 2

1CAN072401

ANO-1 Emergency Operating Procedure, OP-1202.007, "Degraded Power," Revision 018

For Information Only

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 1 of 86

ENTRY CONDITIONS

Only EDG power is available to 4160V buses following reactor trip

DG becomes available during a blackout

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 2 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

1. PERFORM the following:

RECORD time of Degraded Power:

DIRECT Control Board Operators to monitor Floating Steps.

2. ENSURE proper operation of BOTH EDGs 2. IF only ONE EDG OR only the AAC Gen (2K9)

(RT-21). is in service, THEN:

A. IF an EDG is operating, THEN ENSURE proper operation of EDG (RT-21).

B. ENSURE 480V MCC B55 and 56 power supply is selected to operating DG.

C. ALIGN SW as follows:

CLOSE ACW Isolation (CV-3643).

CLOSE SW Crosstie associated with operating EDG to isolate the idle SW Loop:

DG1 DG2 CV-3640 CV-3644

CLOSE Service Water to ICW Coolers Supply associated with operating EDG:

DG1 DG2 CV-3820 CV-3811

D. ATTEMPT to restore non-running EDG using 1203.012A, Annunciator K01 Corrective Action and 1104.036, Emergency Diesel Generator Operation, while continuing with this procedure.

(2. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE)

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 3 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

2. (Continued)

E. IF AAC Gen is available, THEN:

1) ENERGIZE vital bus using 1107.002, ES Electrical System Operation, Placing Alternate AC Generator on bus A3 (A4) section, while continuing with this procedure.

2) GO TO step 3.

F. IF AAC Gen is NOT available, THEN:

1) ENSURE P36B Bus Select MOD Control selected to bus with operating EDG.

2) IF P36B MOD was transferred, THEN DISPATCH an operator to perform Attachment 3, Makeup Pump P36B Alignment to Operating EDG, while continuing with this procedure.

3) ENSURE P4B Bus Select MOD Control selected to bus with operating EDG.

4) IF SG press associated with de-energized ATM Dump ISOL is greater than 1040 psig, THEN as time permits, DISPATCH an operator with a radio to hand jack associated ATM Dump CNTRL to maintain SG press 1000 to 1040 psig, using 1203.002, Alternate Shutdown, Exhibit A, Local Operation of ADVs).

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 4 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

3. ENSURE SERV WTR to DG1 and DG2 CLRs open to operating EDGs:

CV-3806

CV-3807

4. ENSURE a Service Water pump running on 4. IF BOTH EDGs are operating each operating DG, after 15-second time AND delay (P4A, P4B, P4C). only ONE Service Water pump can be started, THEN:

A. ENSURE ACW Isolation (CV-3643) closed.

B. ENSURE BOTH Service Water to ICW Coolers Supply valves closed:

CV-3811

CV-3820

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 5 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

5. ACTUATE MSLI for BOTH SGs 5. IF ALL EFW is lost, AND THEN GO TO step 55.

PERFORM proper MSLI and EFW actuation and control verification (RT-6):

NOTE If IA is lost and subsequently restored, overcooling can occur if ATM Dump CNTRL valves are too far open.

A. CHECK Instrument Air Header Press A. OPERATE ATM Dump CNTRL valves in greater than 60 psig. HAND to minimize cycling and conserve Instrument Air.

B. CHECK Instrument Air to ATM Dump B. IF Instrument Air to ATM Dump CNTRL CNTRL valves remains available. valves is lost, THEN:

1) IF ATM Dump ISOL valve is de-energized, THEN DISPATCH an operator with a radio to hand jack associated ATM Dump CNTRL valve to establish SG press to maintain 1000 to 1040 psig, using 1203.002, Alternate Shutdown, Exhibit A, Local Operation of ADVs.

SG A SG B CV-2676 ATM Dump CV-2619 ISOL CV-2668 ATM Dump CV-2618 CNTRL

2) IF ATM Dump ISOL valve is energized, THEN:

a) ESTABLISH SG press control using ATM Dump ISOL valve in MANUAL.

b) DISPATCH an operator with a radio to place ATM Dump CNTRL valve on hand jack and fully open using 1203.002, Alternate Shutdown, Exhibit A, Local Operation of ADVs.

c) MAINTAIN SG press 1000 to 1040 psig using ATM Dump ISOL valve.

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 6 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

6. CHECK RCS press remains greater than or 6. INITIATE HPI (RT-2).

equal to 1700 psig AND PZR level remains greater than or equal to 30 inches.

7. ISOLATE Letdown by closing EITHER:

Letdown Coolers Outlet (RCS) (CV-1221)

OR

Letdown Coolers Outlets (RCS):

CV-1214

CV-1216

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 7 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

8. CHECK OP and STBY HPI pumps off. 8. IF normal Makeup and Seal Injection is in service, THEN:

A. ENSURE the following handswitches in PULL-to-LOCK:

A1 and A2 feeder breakers:

Bus A1 Bus A2

A-111

A-211

A-112

A-212

A-113

A-213

H1 and H2 feeder breakers:

Bus H1 Bus H2

H-13

H-23

H-14

H-24

H-15

H-25

Condensate Pumps:

P2A

P2B

P2C

Condenser Vacuum Pumps:

C5A

C5B

ICW Pumps:

P33A

P33B

P33C

(8. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE)

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 8 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

8. (Continued).

B. PLACE RCP Seal INJ Block (CV-1206) in OVRD.

NOTE When Instrument Air press is lost, RC Pump Seals Total INJ Flow valve (CV-1207) fails open and Pressurizer Level Control valve (CV-1235) fails as is.

C. IF Instrument Air Header Press drops below 60 psig, THEN:

1) DISPATCH an operator to LNPR to bypass seal injection as follows, while continuing with this procedure.

2) DIRECT dispatched operator to slowly open Seal INJ CV-1207 Bypass (MU-1207-3)

AND slowly close Seal INJ CV-1207 Inlet (MU-1207-1) while maintaining RCP Seals Total INJ flow 30 to 40 gpm.

D. CONTROL makeup to RCS as follows:

1) ENSURE Pressurizer Level Control setpoint adjusted to 100 inches.

2) ENSURE BWST T3 Outlet to OP HPI pump (CV-1407 or CV-1408) open.

3) CLOSE RCS Makeup Block (CV-1233 or CV-1234).

4) OPERATE HPI Block associated with OP HPI pump (CV-1220 or CV-1285) to maintain PZR level greater than or equal to 55 inches.

5) IF PZR level drops below 55 inches, THEN ENSURE Pressurizer Heaters off.

6) IF PZR level drops below 30 inches, THEN INITIATE HPI (RT-2).

E. GO TO step 15.

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 9 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

9. PLACE RCP Seals Bleedoff (Alternate Path to Quench Tank) controls in CLOSE:

SV-1270

SV-1271

SV-1272

SV-1273

10. PERFORM EITHER of the following to isolate RCP Seal Bleedoff (Normal):

CLOSE RCP Seal Bleedoff (Normal)

Return (CV-1274)

OR

CLOSE RCP Seal Bleedoff (Normal) from P32A/B/C/D:

CV-1270

CV-1271

CV-1272

CV-1273

11. IF PZR level is greater than or equal to 55 inches, THEN ENSURE Proportional Control Pressurizer Heaters operating in AUTO.

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 10 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

12. ENSURE the following handswitches in PULL-TO-LOCK:

A1 and A2 feeder breakers:

Bus A1 Bus A2

A-111

A-211

A-112

A-212

A-113

A-213

H1 and H2 feeder breakers:

Bus H1 Bus H2

H-13

H-23

H-14

H-24

H-15

H-25

Condensate Pumps:

P2A

P2B

P2C

Condenser Vacuum Pumps:

C5A

C5B

ICW Pumps:

P33A

P33B

P33C

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 11 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

NOTE If Instrument Air press is lost, RC Pump Seals Total INJ Flow valve (CV-1207) fails open and Pressurizer Level Control valve (CV-1235) fails as is.

13. PLACE OP OR STBY HPI pump in service as 13. IF OP AND STBY HPI pumps are NOT follows: available, THEN MAINTAIN PZR level greater than or equal to 55 inches using HPI (RT-2)

AND GO TO step 15.

A. ENSURE RCP Seal INJ Block (CV-1206) closed.

B. CLOSE RCS Makeup Block (CV-1233 or CV-1234).

C. ENSURE BWST T3 Outlet to OP HPI pump C. MAINTAIN PZR level greater than or equal (CV-1407 or CV-1408) open. to 55 inches using HPI (RT-2)

AND GO TO step 15.

D. START AUX Lube Oil pump for OP or STBY HPI pump.

E. START OP or STBY HPI pump.

F. STOP AUX Lube Oil pump.

G. OPERATE HPI Block valve associated with G. PERFORM the following:

OP HPI pump (CV-1220 or CV-1285) as necessary to maintain PZR level greater 1) MAINTAIN PZR level greater than or than or equal to 55 inches. equal to 55 inches using HPI (RT-2).

2) IF PZR level drops below 55 inches, THEN ENSURE Pressurizer Heaters off.

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 12 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

14. RESTORE Seal Injection as follows:

A. CHECK Instrument Air Header Press A. PERFORM the following:

greater than 60 psig.

1) DISPATCH an operator to LNPR to close Seal INJ CV-1207 Inlet (MU-1207-1).

2) WHEN CV-1207 is isolated, THEN PLACE RCP Seal INJ Block (CV-1206) in OVRD AND OPEN.

3) DIRECT dispatched operator to slowly (over a period of two minutes) throttle open Seal INJ CV-1207 Bypass (MU-1207-3) until RCP Seals Total INJ flow is 8 to 12 gpm.

4) RECORD current time for reference in step 85:

5) GO TO step 15.

B. PLACE RC Pump Seals Total INJ Flow (CV-1207) in HAND AND CLOSE.

C. PLACE RCP Seal INJ Block (CV-1206) in OVRD AND OPEN.

D. Slowly (over a period of two minutes) OPEN CV-1207 until RCP Seals Total INJ flow is 8 to 12 gpm.

E. RECORD current time for reference in step 85:

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 13 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

15. CHECK ESAS ACTUATION alarms clear on 15. ENSURE proper ESAS actuation (RT-10).

K11.

16. CHECK Spent Fuel Pool cooling in service. 16. PERFORM 1203.050 Unit 1 Spent Fuel Pool Emergencies in conjunction with this procedure. [INPO IER L1 11-2]

17. MAXIMIZE RB cooling (RT -9).

18. CHECK adequate SCM. 18. PERFORM the following:

IF SCM is less than adequate AND NOT caused by overheating, THEN GO TO step 24.

IF SCM is less than adequate, AND caused by overheating, THEN GO TO step 55.

19. CHECK RCS T-cold greater than or equal to 19. IF RCS T-cold is less than 540F and 540F. dropping, THEN GO TO step 40.

20. CHECK SG press greater than or equal to 20. GO TO step 40.

900 psig.

21. CHECK CET temps less than 610F. 21. GO TO step 55.

22. CHECK SG tube integrity (RT-18). 22. IF SCM is adequate OR NO other LOCA is indicated (RB and Aux Bldg Sump levels are stable),

THEN GO TO 1202.006, Tube Rupture while attempting to restore buses per step 74 of this procedure.

23. GO TO step 74.

END

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 14 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

NOTE

This section is for correcting loss of adequate SCM.

If overheating is the cause of loss of adequate SCM, then step 55 and the subsequent steps provide the needed guidance.

24. INITIATE full HPI (RT-3). 24. IF HPI flow is less than full flow from one HPI pump, AND RV Head void is indicated, THEN BEGIN rapid cooldown per step 39, while continuing with this section.

A. IF Makeup Tank level drops below 18 inches, THEN CLOSE Makeup Tank Outlet (CV-1275).

25. PERFORM proper EFW actuation and 25. IF EFW is lost control verification (RT-5). AND SCM is adequate, THEN GO TO step 55.

26. CHECK ESAS ACTUATION alarm clear on 26. ENSURE proper ESAS actuation (RT-10),

K11. unless already completed.

27. IF CET temps are less than 540F AND RB and AUX BLDG Sump levels are stable AND SCM is adequate, THEN GO TO step 40.

28. CLOSE Pressurizer Spray Isolation (CV-1009).

29. IF the following conditions exist:

HPI cooling is NOT in progress

ERV was NOT opened by procedure to intentionally depressurize the RCS

THEN ENSURE Electromatic Relief ERV Isolation (CV-1000) closed.

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 15 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

30. ISOLATE possible RCS to ICW leak by 30. IF CV-2215 fails to close, closing: THEN CLOSE Nuclear ICW Outlet (CV-2214).

Nuclear ICW Inlet (CV-2233)

AND

Nuclear ICW Outlet (CV-2215)

31. CHECK SG tube integrity (RT-18). 31. IF SCM is adequate OR NO other LOCA indications exist (RB and Aux Bldg sump levels are stable),

THEN GO TO 1202.006, Tube Rupture while attempting to restore buses per step 74 of this procedure.

32. CHECK adequate SCM. 32. IF RCS press is less than 150 psig, THEN GO TO 1202.010, ESAS.

33. IF SCM is restored, THEN CONTROL RCS press low within limits of Figure 3 (RT-14).

34. CHECK SG levels at or approaching 34. RE-PERFORM proper EFW actuation and 370 to 410 inches. control verification (RT-5).

A. IF EFW is lost AND SCM is adequate, THEN GO TO step 55.

B. IF SCM is adequate, THEN ENSURE Natural Circulation setpoint selected for EFW.

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 16 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

35. CHECK primary to secondary heat transfer 35. PERFORM the following:

in progress indicated by ALL of the following: A. IF RCS press reaches 2400 psig OR

T-cold tracking associated SG T-sat approaches NDTT limit of Figure 3 at any (Fig. 2) time while attempting to restore primary to secondary heat transfer,

T-hot tracking CET temps THEN PERFORM the following, while continuing with this procedure:

T-hot/T-cold T stable or dropping

1) ENSURE Electromatic Relief ERV Isolation (CV-1000) open.

2) IF SCM is less than adequate, THEN:

a) OPEN ERV until RCS press less than or equal to 1650 psig.

b) WHEN RCS press less than or equal to 1650 psig, THEN PLACE ERV in AUTO.

c) REPEAT this step as necessary to maintain RCS press:

less than 2400 psig OR

less than NDTT Limit on Figure 3.

3) IF SCM is adequate, THEN:

a) OPEN the ERV.

b) WHEN SCM approaches minimum adequate, THEN CLOSE the ERV.

c) REPEAT this step as necessary to maintain RCS press:

less than 2400 psig OR

less than NDTT Limit on Figure 3.

(35. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 17 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

35. (Continued)

B. RAISE primary to secondary T to 40 to 60F as follows:

1) ADJUST ATM Dump Control System to establish SG press within limits of Figure 5, SG Pressure to Establish 40 to 60F Primary to Secondary T.

SG A SG B CV-2676 ATM Dump CV-2619 ISOL ATM Dump CV-2668 CNTRL CV-2618

a) IF ATM Dump ISOL valve is de-energized, THEN DISPATCH an operator with a radio to hand jack associated ATM Dump CNTRL valve to establish SG press within limits of Figure 5 (Refer to 1203.002, Alternate Shutdown, Exhibit A, Local Operation of ADVs).

C. IF primary to secondary heat transfer is established, THEN ADJUST ATM Dump Control System as necessary to stabilize CET temp.

(35. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE)

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 18 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

35. (Continued)

D. IF primary to secondary heat transfer is NOT established, THEN:

1) IF SCM is adequate, THEN:

a) OPEN Loop A and Loop B High Point Vents:

A Loop B Loop SV-1081 SV-1091 SV-1082 SV-1092 SV-1083 SV-1093 SV-1084 SV-1094

b) MONITOR hot leg level on ICC Display.

c) VENT Hot Legs until EITHER primary to secondary heat transfer is established OR adequate SCM is lost, while continuing with this procedure.

d) IF primary to secondary heat transfer is established, THEN ADJUST ATM Dump Control System as necessary to stabilize CET temp.

(35. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE)

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 19 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

35. (Continued)

2) IF SCM is less than adequate, THEN RAISE primary to secondary T to 90 to 110F as follows:

a) ADJUST ATM Dump Control System to establish SG press within limits of Figure 6, SG Pressure to Establish 90 to 110F Primary to Secondary T.

b) IF primary to secondary heat transfer is established, THEN ADJUST ATM Dump Control System as necessary to stabilize CET temp.

36. CHECK CET temps less than 610F. 36. GO TO step 55.

37. IF CET temps are superheated AND moving away from the saturation line, THEN GO TO 1202.005, Inadequate Core Cooling.

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 20 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

38. IF cause of loss of adequate SCM is 38. PERFORM the following:

corrected AND A. IF an uncontrolled RCS cooldown is SCM is adequate occurring due to HPI/break flow, AND regardless of SG status, primary to secondary heat transfer is in THEN GO TO 1203.041, Small Break progress, LOCA Cooldown, while attempting to THEN ENSURE steps 2 through 22 have restore buses per step 74 of this been completed AND GO TO step 74. procedure.

B. IF primary to secondary heat transfer is NOT established, THEN RETURN TO step 32.

C. IF PZR level is rising without a corresponding rise in CET temp or RCS press, THEN GO TO 1203.013, Natural Circulation Cooldown, Section 1, Degraded Power, while attempting to restore buses per step 74 of this procedure.

D. IF RCS leak is un-isolable AND RCS press remains greater than or equal to 150 psig, THEN GO TO 1203.013, Natural Circulation Cooldown, Section 1, Degraded Power, while attempting to restore buses per step 74 of this procedure.

END

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 21 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

NOTE

This section is used for rapid RCS cooldown if all of the following conditions are met:

- adequate SCM is lost

- HPI flow is less than full flow from one HPI pump

- RV Head void is indicated

Cooldown rate limits do not apply.

During this cooldown, primary to secondary heat transfer will be temporarily lost as the primary level drops from the bottom of the hot leg bend to below the secondary level or below the EFW nozzles if EFW flow exists.

39. IF conditions requiring rapid cooldown are met, THEN:

A. BEGIN rapid cooldown at maximum attainable rate by fully opening ATM Dump valves.

B. ENSURE EFW Pump P7B is operating and B. IF EFW Pump P7A is the only available maintaining proper SG levels. feed source, THEN:

1) MAINTAIN sufficient SG press for P7A operation while P7A is the only source of feed.

2) INITIATE action to restore P7B to operation prior to depressurizing SGs.

C. IF Source Range counts are rising, THEN STOP rapid cooldown AND CONSULT with Senior Manager, Operations.

D. PLACE ALL EFW CNTRL valves in VECTOR OVERRIDE:

SG A SG B CV-2645 CV-2647 CV-2646 CV-2648

(39. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE)

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 22 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

39. (Continued).

E. PLACE ALL EFW ISOL valves in MANUAL AND ENSURE open (modulating valves):

SG A SG B CV-2627 CV-2620 CV-2670 CV-2626

F. CONTINUE to maintain SG level 370 to 410 inches, regardless of heat transfer status.

G. CHECK RCS press remains less G. Manually CYCLE ERV as follows, while than 2450 psig. continuing with this procedure:

1) ENSURE Electromatic Relief ERV Isolation (CV-1000) open.

2) OPEN ERV until RCS press less than or equal to 1650 psig.

3) WHEN RCS press less than or equal to 1650 psig, THEN return ERV to AUTO.

4) REPEAT this step as necessary to maintain RCS press remains less than 2450 psig.

5) IF ERV fails open, THEN CLOSE Electromatic Relief ERV Isolation (CV-1000).

H. IF at least ONE SG AND ONE LPI train are available, THEN:

1) OPEN Electromatic Relief ERV Isolation (CV-1000).

2) OPEN ERV.

(39. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE)

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 23 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

39. (Continued).

I. CHECK CFT Outlet valves open: I. DISPATCH an operator to align CFTs as follows:

CV-2415

CV-2419 1) UNLOCK AND CLOSE Core Flood Tank T-2A/B Outlet supply breakers:

B5661

B5545

2) OPEN Core Flood Tank Outlet valves:

CV-2415

CV-2419

3) OPEN AND LOCK Core Flood Tank T-2A/B Outlet supply breakers:

B5661

B5545

J. IF HPI greater than or equal to full flow from one HPI pump becomes available, THEN:

1) INITIATE full HPI (RT-3).

2) IF the ERV was opened in step 39.H, THEN CLOSE ONE of the following:

ERV OR

Electromatic Relief ERV Isolation (CV-1000)

(39. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE)

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 24 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

39. (Continued).

K. IF adequate SCM is restored, THEN:

1) ADJUST ATM Dump Control System as necessary to maintain RCS cooldown rate within limits:

C/D Rate C/D Rate CET Temp without with RV Head RV Head bubble bubble

> 300F 100F/hr 50F/hr 300 to 170F 50F/hr 50F/hr

2) ENSURE steps 24 through 32 complete AND GO TO step 33.

L. WHEN RCS press is less than 150 psig, THEN GO TO 1202.010, ESAS.

END

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 25 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

NOTE

This section is for correcting overcooling.

EFW induced overcooling is possible at low decay heat loads. RT-6 includes steps for manual control of EFW flow to correct excessive feed flow.

40. CHECK adequate SCM. 40. RETURN TO step 24.

41. CONTROL RCS press within limits of Figure 3 (RT-14).

42. CHECK ESAS ACTUATION alarms clear on 42. PERFORM the following:

K11.

A. PERFORM the following to throttle HPI:

1) IF OP or STBY HPI pump is in service, THEN OVERRIDE AND OPEN HPI RECIRC Blocks:

CV-1300

CV-1301

2) IF ES HPI pump is ONLY HPI pump in service OR HPI pump recirc flow path to Makeup Tank is unavailable, THEN MAINTAIN HPI pump flow greater than or equal to 90 gpm.

3) OVERRIDE AND THROTTLE HPI Block valves to maintain RCS press within limits of Figure 3 (RT-14):

CV-1219

CV-1227

CV-1220

CV-1228

CV-1278

CV-1284

CV-1279

CV-1285

B. ENSURE proper ESAS actuation (RT-10).

C. IF RB Spray has actuated, THEN as time permits, SECURE RB Spray using 1104.005 Reactor Building Spray System Operation, Securing Reactor Building Spray System after ESAS Actuation section.

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 26 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

NOTE

If Y02 is de-energized the MSSV OPEN (K07-C5) annunciator is disabled.

Loss of valve position indications for T-36A/B Purif Demineralizer Inlets and F-3A/B Makeup Filter Inlets on C04 will provide further indication that Y02 is de-energized.

43. PERFORM the following: 43. PERFORM the following:

CHECK MSSV OPEN (K07-C5) alarm A. IF associated ATM Dump Control System clear. is available, THEN:

IF Y02 is de-energized, THEN DISPATCH an operator to Turbine 1) Quickly REDUCE leaking SG press Building Roof to perform visual check of all using ATM Dump Control System until:

MSSVs closed. (Roof access through Unit 2

MSSV OPEN (K07-C5) alarm fan room does not require fall protection for clears ladder use).

OR

700 psig SG press is reached SG A SG B CV-2676 ATM Dump CV-2619 ISOL CV-2668 ATM Dump CV-2618 CNTRL

2) ADJUST ATM Dump Control System to stabilize CET temp.

B. IF associated ATM Dump ISOL is de-energized, THEN:

1) DISPATCH an operator with a radio to place ATM Dump CNTRL valve on hand jack using 1203.002, Alternate Shutdown, Exhibit A, Local Operation of ADVs.

2) DIRECT dispatched operator to quickly reduce leaking SG press until 700 psig SG press is reached AND immediately ADJUST to maintain SG press 1000 to 1040 psig.

(43. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE)

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 27 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

43. (Continued).

C. IF MSSV reseats AND overcooling is terminated, THEN GO TO step 48.

D. IF MSSV fails to reseat and SG press is stable greater than or equal to 700 psig, THEN INITIATE actions to gag MSSV, while continuing with this procedure.

E. IF MSSV fails to reseat AND overcooling is still in progress, THEN:

1) ISOLATE bad SG and allow to boil dry by placing bad SG EFW ISOL valves in MANUAL AND closing (modulating valves):

SG A SG B CV-2627 CV-2620 CV-2670 CV-2626

2) IF EFW ISOL valve associated with bad SG is de-energized, THEN PLACE associated EFW CNTRL valve in HAND AND CLOSE:

SG A SG B CV-2645 CV-2647 CV-2646 CV-2648

NOTE Overcooling could continue until SG boils dry.

3) IF overcooling is terminated, THEN GO TO step 48.

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 28 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

44. IF SG press less than 1000 psig, 44. IF ATM Dump ISOL valve is de-energized, THEN PLACE associated ATM Dump ISOL THEN DISPATCH an operator with a radio to valve in manual AND CLOSE: hand jack associated ATM Dump CNTRL valve(s) closed using 1203.002, Alternate SG A SG B Shutdown, Exhibit A, Local Operation of CV-2676 CV-2619 ADVs:

SG A SG B CV-2676 ATM Dump CV-2619 ISOL ATM Dump CV-2668 CNTRL CV-2618

A. IF overcooling is terminated, THEN GO TO step 48.

45. CHECK RB press less than 17 psia and 45. PERFORM the following for the bad SG:

stable.

A. PLACE bad SGs EFW ISOL valves in MANUAL AND CLOSE (modulating valves):

SG A SG B CV-2627 CV-2620 CV-2670 CV-2626

B. IF EFW ISOL valve associated with bad SG is de-energized, THEN PLACE associated EFW CNTRL valve in HAND AND CLOSE:

SG A SG B CV-2645 CV-2647 CV-2646 CV-2648

C. MAXIMIZE RB cooling (RT-9).

NOTE Overcooling could continue until SG boils dry.

D. IF overcooling is terminated, THEN GO TO step 48.

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 29 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

46. PLACE EFW Pump Turbine K3 Steam Supply Valve from SG with lowest press in MANUAL AND CLOSE:

SG A SG B CV-2667 CV-2617

A. CHECK both SGs begin to repressurize. A. PERFORM the following:

1) IF SG with closed EFW Pump Turbine K3 Steam Supply valve begins to repressurize, THEN:

a) PLACE other EFW Pump Turbine K3 Steam Supply valve (CV-2667 or CV-2617) in MANUAL AND CLOSE.

b) IF EFW Pump Turbine K3 Steam Supply is de-energized, THEN PLACE both EFW Pump Turbine K3 Steam Admission valves in MANUAL AND CLOSE:

CV-2613

CV-2663

c) IF BOTH SGs begin to repressurize, THEN:

(1) IF ALL EFW is lost, THEN GO TO step 55.

(2) IF EFW is in service, THEN GO TO step 48.

(46. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE)

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 30 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

46. (Continued) d) IF only ONE SG begins to repressurize, THEN:

(1) IF ALL EFW is lost, THEN GO TO step 55.

(2) IF EFW is in service, THEN GO TO step 47.

2) GO TO step 47.

B. GO TO step 48.

47. PLACE EFW ISOL valves for SG with lowest 47. PLACE associated EFW CNTRL valve in press in MANUAL AND CLOSE (modulating HAND AND CLOSE:

valves):

SG A SG B SG A SG B CV-2645 CV-2647 CV-2627 CV-2620 CV-2646 CV-2648 CV-2670 CV-2626

NOTE Overcooling could continue until SG boils dry.

A. CHECK bad SG depressurizes A. IF other SG fails to repressurize, AND THEN:

other SG begins to repressurize.

1) PLACE other SG EFW ISOL valves in MANUAL AND CLOSE (modulating valves):

SG A SG B CV-2627 CV-2620 CV-2670 CV-2626

2) GO TO 1202.011, HPI Cooldown, while attempting to restore buses per step 74 of this procedure.

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 31 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

48. WHEN overcooling has been terminated, 48. IF ATM Dump ISOL valve is de-energized, THEN OPERATE ATM Dump Control System THEN DISPATCH an operator to hand jack as necessary to prevent RCS heatup: associated ATM Dump CNTRL valve as necessary to prevent RCS heatup.

SG A SG B (Refer to 1203.002, Alternate Shutdown, Exhibit A, Local Operation of ADVs).

CV-2676 ATM Dump CV-2619 ISOL ATM Dump CV-2668 CNTRL CV-2618

A. CHECK EFW aligned to BOTH SGs. CAUTION Drying out an SG can cause the 60F (tubes hotter) Tube-To-Shell T limit to be exceeded due to ambient temperature losses.

A. PERFORM the following, while continuing with this procedure:

1) IF steam leak has been isolated locally, THEN REFILL intact SG (RT-16).

(48. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE)

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 32 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

48. (Continued)

2) IF leak has NOT been isolated locally, THEN PERFORM the following as necessary to maintain SG Tube-To-Shell T less than or equal to 60F (tubes hotter), while continuing with this procedure:

WARNING Feeding SG(s) with an unisolable steam leak is hazardous to personnel and equipment in the area.

CAUTION Feeding SG(s) with an unisolable steam leak inside containment will add unborated water to RB sump.

a) IF leak is known to be outside containment AND leak is known to be an area clear of personnel and key equipment, THEN FEED SG with unisolable steam leak (RT-17).

49. CHECK adequate SCM. 49. RETURN TO step 24.

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 33 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

50. WHEN PZR level is greater than or equal to 55 inches and rising, THEN:

A. IF HPI is NO longer needed to maintain RCS inventory, THEN PERFORM the following to throttle HPI:

1) IF OP OR STBY HPI pump is in service, THEN OVERRIDE AND OPEN HPI RECIRC Blocks:

CV-1300

CV-1301

2) IF ES HPI pump is only HPI pump in service OR HPI pump recirc flow path to Makeup Tank is unavailable, THEN MAINTAIN HPI pump flow greater than or equal to 90 gpm.

3) THROTTLE HPI Block valves to maintain RCS press within limits of Figure 3 (RT-14):

CV-1219

CV-1227

CV-1220

CV-1228

CV-1278

CV-1284

CV-1279

CV-1285

51. STABILIZE CET temps AND ADJUST RCS press to within limits of Figure 3 (RT-14).

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 34 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

52. CONSULT with Senior Manager, Operations to determine if cooldown is required.

A. IF cooldown is required, THEN:

1) ENSURE steps 2 through 22 of this procedure complete.

2) PERFORM cooldown using 1203.013 Natural Circulation Cooldown, Section 1, Degraded Power, while attempting to restore buses per step 74 of this procedure.

53. IF cooldown is NOT required, THEN return to Mode 3, greater than 525F as follows:

A. OPERATE Pressurizer Heaters to maintain PZR heatup rate less than or equal to 100F/hr.

B. ADJUST ATM Dump Control System to B. IF ATM Dump ISOL valve is de-energized, establish the following, while continuing with THEN COMMUNICATE with local operator this procedure: with radio to:

RCS heatup rate less than 1) OPERATE associated ATM Dump or equal to 50F/hr CNTRL valve using 1203.002, Alternate Shutdown, Exhibit A, Local

RCS temp 535 to 545F Operation of ADVs.

2) MAINTAIN RCS heatup rate less than SG A SG B or equal to 50F/hr.

ATM Dump CV-2676 ISOL CV-2619 3) ESTABLISH CET temps 535 to 545F while continuing with this procedure.

CV-2668 ATM Dump CV-2618 CNTRL

54. ENSURE steps 2 through 22 have been completed AND GO TO step 74.

END

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 35 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

NOTE

This section is for correcting overheating.

SCM can become inadequate due to overheating and does not require transition to section to correct inadequate SCM.

55. IF ANY of the following criteria is met before overheating is corrected:

ERV opens in AUTO

RCS press greater than or equal to 2450 psig

RCS press approaches NDTT Limit (Figure 3)

Overheating causes SCM to become inadequate

THEN GO TO step 58.

56. RE-PERFORM proper EFW actuation and control verification (RT-5).

57. IF EFW can NOT be placed in service, THEN:

A. PLACE EFW CNTRL valves in HAND AND CLOSE:

SG A SG B

CV-2645 CV-2647 CV-2646 CV-2648

B. ENSURE EFW Pump Turbine K3 Steam B. PLACE EFW Pump Turbine K3 Steam Admission Valves in MANUAL AND closed: Supply Valves in MANUAL AND CLOSE:

CV-2613

CV-2667

CV-2663

CV-2617

C. PLACE EFW Pump P7B in PULL-TO-LOCK.

(57. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE)

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 36 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

57. (Continued)

D. IF A3 is de-energized AND P7A is unavailable, THEN RESTORE power to P7B as follows:

1) ENERGIZE A3 using 1107.002, ES Electrical System Operation, Bus A3 to A4 Crosstie to Energize Dead Bus section.

2) IF another DG OR off-site power becomes available, THEN RESTORE buses to normal using 1107.002, ES Electrical System Operation, Returning Paralleled Buses A3 and A4 to Normal section.

3) START P7B AND GO TO step 65.

E. RESTORE EFW using 1203.012K, Annunciator K12 Corrective Action, while continuing with this procedure.

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 37 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

58. IF overheating has been corrected, 58. IF any of the following criteria is met, THEN ENSURE steps 2 through 22 have been completed

ERV opens AND GO TO step 74.

RCS press greater than or equal to 2450 psig

RCS press approaches NDTT Limit (Figure 3)

EFW NOT expected to become available

Overheating causes SCM to become inadequate

THEN PERFORM the following, while continuing with steps to restore EFW:

A. INITIATE HPI cooling (RT-4).

B. RECORD time full HPI flow initiated for reference in step 62:

C. IF NO HPI pump is available, THEN CYCLE ERV as follows, while continuing with this procedure:

1) ENSURE Electromatic Relief ERV Isolation (CV-1000) open.

2) IF SCM is less than adequate, THEN:

a) OPEN ERV until RCS press less than or equal to 1650 psig.

b) WHEN RCS press less than or equal to 1650 psig, THEN PLACE ERV in AUTO.

c) REPEAT this step as necessary to maintain RCS press:

less than 2400 psig OR

less than NDTT Limit on Figure 3

(58. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE)

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 38 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

58. (Continued)

3) IF SCM is adequate, THEN:

a) OPEN the ERV.

b) WHEN SCM approaches minimum adequate, THEN CLOSE the ERV.

c) REPEAT this step as necessary to maintain RCS press:

less than 2400 psig

OR

less than NDTT Limit on Figure 3

4) IF ERV fails open, THEN CLOSE Electromatic Relief ERV Isolation (CV-1000).

5) CONTINUE efforts to restore EFW per step 57 AND GO TO step 68.

(58. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE)

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 39 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

58. (Continued)

D. IF ERV can NOT be opened, THEN:

1) IF necessary to prevent violating NDTT curve of Figure 3, THEN THROTTLE HPI as below, OTHERWISE allow PZR Code Safeties to lift.

a) IF OP or STBY HPI pump is in service, THEN OPEN HPI RECIRC Blocks:

CV-1300

CV-1301

b) IF ES HPI pump is the only HPI pump running OR HPI pump recirc flow path to Makeup Tank is unavailable, THEN MAINTAIN HPI pump flow greater than or equal to 90 gpm.

c) THROTTLE HPI Blocks as necessary:

CV-1219

CV-1227

CV-1220

CV-1228

CV-1278

CV-1284

CV-1279

CV-1285

E. CONTINUE efforts to restore EFW per step 57, while continuing with this procedure.

59. CHECK ESAS ACTUATION alarms clear on 59. ENSURE proper ESAS actuation (RT-10).

K11.

60. IF Makeup Tank level drops below 18 inches, THEN CLOSE Makeup Tank Outlet (CV-1275).

61. CONTROL RCS press within limits of Figure 3 (RT-14).

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 40 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

62. CHECK CET temps stable or dropping. 62. PERFORM ONE of the following:

A. IF HPI flow is less than full flow from ONE HPI pump, THEN GO TO step 68.

B. HOLD at this point until ONE of the following conditions is met, while attempting to restore buses per step 74:

IF EFW becomes available, THEN GO TO step 65.

IF CET temps begin to drop, THEN GO TO step 63.

IF greater than or equal to 120 minutes on HPI cooling elapse AND CET temps are still rising, THEN GO TO step 68.

IF CET temps are superheated AND moving away from the saturation line, THEN GO TO 1202.005, Inadequate Core Cooling while attempting to restore buses per step 74 of this procedure.

63. WHEN CET temps begin to drop, THEN:

A. IF SCM is adequate, THEN MAINTAIN RCS cooldown rate less than or equal to 100F/hr by throttling HPI.

64. IF EFW restoration is imminent, 64. GO TO 1202.011, HPI Cooldown while THEN CONTINUE with this procedure. attempting to restore buses per step 74 of this procedure.

65. WHEN EFW becomes available, 65. RETURN TO step 64.

THEN REFILL available SG(s) using RT-16.

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 41 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

CAUTION

With RCS solid, 1F temp change can cause 100 psig press change.

A large reduction in out-flow without a corresponding reduction in in-flow will result in RCS press rise.

NOTE The following steps contain the strategy for transition to SG cooling:

1. Ensure adequate heat transfer is developing via SGs (Tcs dropping, change in RCS pressure behavior indicates primary to secondary heat transfer is beginning).

2. Ensure adequate SCM.

3. Maintain RCS pressure appropriately (PTS limits may be applicable).

4. Re-establish normal RCS pressure control methods.

66. IF HPI Cooling is in service, THEN SECURE HPI Cooling as follows:

A. CHECK primary to secondary heat transfer A. GO TO 1202.011, HPI Cooldown developing (e.g., Tcs dropping, change in procedure.

RCS pressure).

B. CHECK adequate SCM. B. IF overheating caused inadequate SCM, THEN:

1) PLACE ERV in AUTO.

2) IF ERV fails open, THEN CLOSE Electromatic Relief ERV Isolation (CV-1000).

3) WHEN SCM is adequate, THEN CONTINUE.

C. OPEN HPI Pump RECIRC Blocks: C. IF HPI pump recirc flow path to Makeup Tank is unavailable,

CV-1300 THEN MAINTAIN HPI pump flow greater than or equal to 90 gpm.

CV-1301

D. START AUX Lube Oil pump for ES HPI pump.

(66. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE)

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 42 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

66. (Continued)

E. STOP ES HPI pump.

F. ENSURE ERV in AUTO. F. IF necessary to limit RCS press, THEN RE-OPEN ERV.

G. THROTTLE HPI Block valves associated with OP HPI pump to maintain RCS press within limits of Figure 3:

P36A/B P36C/B

CV-1219

CV-1227

CV-1220

CV-1228

CV-1278

CV-1284

CV-1279

CV-1285

H. CLOSE HPI Block valves associated with ES HPI pump:

P36A P36C

CV-1219

CV-1227

CV-1220

CV-1228

CV-1278

CV-1284

CV-1279

CV-1285

I. STOP AUX Lube Oil pump for ES HPI pump.

67. ENSURE steps 2 through 22 have been completed AND GO TO step 74.

END

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 43 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

68. IF CET temps are superheated AND moving away from the saturation line, THEN GO TO 1202.005, Inadequate Core Cooling while attempting to restore buses per step 74 of this procedure.

69. IF EFW is expected to become available before CET temps indicate superheated, THEN RETURN TO step 65.

NOTE

Service Water feed alone may only slow the rate of heatup.

SG level will not be established if feed is from service water.

70. IF Service Water is available, THEN:

A. ENSURE EFW Pump P7B in PULL-TO-LOCK.

B. ENSURE EFW Pump Turbine K3 Steam B. PLACE EFW Pump Turbine K3 Steam Admission Valves in MANUAL AND closed: Supply Valves in MANUAL AND CLOSE:

CV-2613

CV-2667

CV-2663

CV-2617

C. DISPATCH an operator to unlock AND close Minimum RECIRC to CST for P7A and P7B:

FW-11A

FW-11B

(70. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE)

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 44 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

70. (Continued).

D. OPERATE ATM Dump Control System to D. IF ATM Dump ISOL valve is de-energized, fully depressurize SGs, while continuing OR with this procedure. Instrument Air to ATM Dump CNTRL valves is lost, SG A SG B THEN DISPATCH an operator to hand jack associated ATM Dump CNTRL Valve fully CV-2676 ATM Dump CV-2619 open using 1203.002, Alternate Shutdown, ISOL Exhibit A, Local Operation of ADVs.

ATM Dump CV-2668 CNTRL CV-2618

E. IF third Service Water pump is available, THEN:

1) ENSURE ONE pair of Service Water Crossties open:

CV-3644 and CV-3646

OR

CV-3640 and CV-3642

2) IF desired to lower SW Pressure prior to starting third SW Pump, THEN LOWER SW Loop pressure by opening the following as needed:

ICW Coolers Loop I SW Bypass (SW-4026A)

ICW Coolers Loop II SW Bypass (SW-4026B)

IF additional SW Loads are required, THEN LIST additional loads:

3) START third Service Water pump (P4A, P4B, or P4C).

(70. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE)

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 45 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

70. (Continued).

F. OPEN available EFW SERV WTR Loop I and II Isolation(s):

CV-3850

CV-3851

G. PLACE P7A and P7B SUCT Select switches in SW position:

P7A SUCT Select

P7B SUCT Select

H. ENSURE available P7A/B Suction from CST closes:

CV-2800

CV-2802

I. ENSURE available P7A/B Suction from SW opens:

CV-2803

CV-2806

J. DISPATCH an operator to unlock AND close Service Water Loop I and II Supply to P-7B/P-7A Telltale Vents, while continuing:

SW-1085A

SW-1085B

K. PLACE available EFW CNTRL valves in VECTOR OVERRIDE:

SG A SG B CV-2645 CV-2647 CV-2646 CV-2648

(70. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE)

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 46 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

70. (Continued).

L. PLACE available EFW ISOL valves in MANUAL AND OPEN(modulating valves):

SG A SG B

CV-2627 CV-2620 CV-2670 CV-2626

M. THROTTLE available EFW CNTRL valves in HAND while maintaining EFW flow to each SG less than or equal to 200 gpm.

71. CHECK CET temps begin to drop. 71. HOLD at this point until one of the following conditions is met, while attempting to restore buses per step 74:

IF EFW becomes available, THEN GO TO step 73.

IF CET temps begin to drop, THEN GO TO 1202.011, HPI Cooldown while attempting to restore buses per step 74 of this procedure.

IF CET temps are superheated AND moving away from the saturation line, THEN GO TO 1202.005, Inadequate Core Cooling while attempting to restore buses per step 74 of this procedure.

72. GO TO 1202.011, HPI Cooldown while attempting to restore buses per step 74 of this procedure.

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 47 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

73. IF EFW becomes available, THEN:

A. DISPATCH an operator to open AND lock Minimum RECIRC to CST for P7A and P7B:

FW-11A

FW-11B

B. IF three Service Water Pumps are running, THEN PERFORM the following to stop the third Service Water pump:

1) STOP desired Service Water pump (P4A, P4B, or P4C).

2) IF any of the following were opened to lower SW pressure, THEN RESTORE to normal lineup as needed:

Loop I SW Bypass (SW-4026A)

Loop II SW Bypass (SW-4026B)

IF additional SW Loads were required in step 70.E, THEN ENSURE additional loads removed from service:

C. CLOSE ATM Dump CNTRL OR ISOL C. IF ATM Dump ISOL valve is de-energized, valves: OR Instrument Air to ATM Dump CNTRL SG A SG B valves is lost, ATM Dump THEN DISPATCH an operator to hand CV-2676 ISOL CV-2619 jack associated ATM Dump CNTRL valve closed using 1203.002, Alternate CV-2668 ATM Dump CV-2618 Shutdown, Exhibit A, Local Operation of CNTRL ADVs.

(73. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE)

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 48 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

73. (Continued).

D. CLOSE ALL EFW CNTRL valves:

SG A SG B

CV-2645 CV-2647 CV-2646 CV-2648

E. PLACE P7A AND P7B SUCT Select switches in CST position:

P7A SUCT Select

P7B SUCT Select

F. ENSURE P7A/B Suction from SW closes:

CV-2803

CV-2806

G. ENSURE P7A/B Suction from CST opens:

CV-2800

CV-2802

H. DISPATCH an operator to open and lock Service Water Loop I and II Supply to P-7B/P-7A Telltale Vents, while continuing:

SW-1085A

SW-1085B

I. CLOSE EFW SERV WTR Loop I and II Isolations:

CV-3850

CV-3851

J. RETURN TO step 65.

END

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 49 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

74. PERFORM the following to energize busses from off-site power:

A. CHECK Attachment 1, Degraded Power A. ENSURE Attachment 2, Recovery From Breaker Alignment and UV Relay Defeat Degraded Power Breaker Alignment was NOT performed. and UV Relay Defeat is complete.

B. CHECK off-site power available AND SU1 B. IF SU1 or SU2 L.O. RELAY TRIP is voltage greater than or equal to 22KV alarming on K02, (SPDS: E22ATU1) . THEN before energizing XFMR, CORRECT cause using 1203.012B, Annunciator K02 Corrective Action, while continuing with this procedure.

C. IF power is available in the switchyard AND SU1 is de-energized, AND switchyard breaker 0125 is open, THEN:

1) REQUEST Transmission Control Center-North (TCC-N) close 0125.

2) IF SU1 is available with voltage greater than or equal to 22KV (SPDS: E22ATU1),

THEN GO TO step 75.

(74. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE)

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 50 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

74. (Continued).

D. IF SU1 is NOT available OR has voltage less than 22KV (SPDS: E22ATU1),

THEN:

NOTE SU XFMR #2 is considered available and not degraded for manually transferring of vital and non-vital busses if all the following conditions are met:

SU XFMR #2 Voltage Regulator:

out-of-service with input voltage greater than or equal to 162.5KV (C10 indication or SPDS1: E161ST21)

OR in service with the following conditions, In Automatic 3% reduction disabled Input voltage greater than or equal to 155.4KV (C10 indication or SPDS1: E161ST21)

ANY Unit 2 SU XFMR #2 loads are BOTH:

Vital loads ONLY Less than or equal to 4.4MVA

ONE or BOTH 161KV transmission lines in service (Russellville East or Pleasant Hill)

1) IF SU2 is available, THEN GO TO step 75.

(74. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE)

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 51 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

74. (Continued).

NOTE Off-site power is considered degraded if BOTH conditions are true:

SU1 voltage is less than 22KV (SPDS: E22ATU1)

AND

ANY of the following conditions exist:

SU XFMR #2 Voltage Regulator:

out-of-service with input voltage less than 162.5KV (C10 indication or SPDS1: E161ST21)

OR in service with the following conditions, NOT in Automatic 3% reduction enabled Input voltage less than 155.4KV (C10 indication or SPDS1: E161ST21)

Unit 2 SU XFMR #2 loads are:

Non-Vital loads Greater than 4.4MVA

Neither 161KV transmission line in service (Russellville East or Pleasant Hill)

E. IF off-site power is unavailable or degraded, THEN:

1) NOTIFY Transmission Control Center-North (TCC-N) to restore power.

2) GO TO step 96.

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 52 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

75. RE-ENERGIZE A1, A2, H1, and H2 by performing the following for each bus:

A. CHECK associated bus L.O. RELAY TRIP A. CORRECT cause of L.O. RELAY TRIP alarm clear on K02. before energizing bus, while continuing with this procedure (refer to 1107.001 Bus A1 Bus A2 Bus H1 Bus H2 Electrical System Operation, Reclosing K02-A6 K02-A7 K02-A4 K02-A5 Tripped Bus or MCC Feeder Breakers section).

B. CHECK A2 Feed to A4 (A-409) open. B. IF A2 is being supplied by A4, THEN GO TO step 116.

C. CHECK Startup XFMR SU1 voltage is C. GO TO step 75.E.

greater than or equal to 22KV (SPDS: E22ATU1).

D. REMOVE desired bus feeder breake r handswitch from PULL-TO-LOCK:

Bus A1 Bus A2 Bus H1 Bus H2

A-113 A-213 H-15 H-25

1) CHECK associated bus energized. 1) TURN SYNCHRONIZE switch for associated bus feeder breaker ON:

Bus Bus Bus Bus A1 A2 H1 H2

A-113 A-213 H-15 H-25

2) CLOSE associated breaker from handswitch.

3) IF breaker fails to close, THEN RESET breaker anti-pump feature by taking associated handswitch to PULL-TO-LOCK AND releasing.

4) PLACE SYNCHRONIZE switch to OFF.

(75. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE)

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 53 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

75. (Continued).

E. CHECK desired buses are energized from NOTE Startup XFMR SU1 SU XFMR #2 is considered available and not degraded for manually transferring of vital and non-vital busses if ALL the following conditions are met:

SU XFMR #2 Voltage Regulator:

out-of-service with input voltage greater than or equal to 162.5KV (C10 indication or SPDS1: E161ST21)

OR in service with the following conditions, In Automatic 3% reduction disabled Input voltage greater than or equal to 155.4KV (C10 indication or SPDS1: E161ST21)

ANY Unit 2 SU XFMR #2 loads are BOTH:

Vital loads ONLY Less than or equal to 4.4MVA

ONE or BOTH 161KV transmission lines in service (Russellville East or Pleasant Hill)

E. PERFORM the following:

1) IF 4160V bus A1 or A2 is de-energized, AND SU XFMR #2 is available, THEN ENERGIZE 4160V bus A1 and A2 from SU XFMR #2 by performing 1107.001, Electrical System Operations, Attachment E, SU2 Transformer Loading Restrictions, while continuing with this procedure.

2) IF neither A1 or A2 is energized, AND SU XFMR #2 is unavailable or degraded, THEN GO TO step 97.

(75. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE)

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 54 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

75. (Continued).

F. CHECK A3 AND A4 energized. F. PERFORM the following:

1) IF off-site power is from SU2, THEN PERFORM 1107.001, Electrical System Operations, Attachment E, SU2 Transformer Loading Restrictions, to energize 4160V bus A3 and A4 from SU XFMR #2, while continuing with this procedure.

2) IF A3 is de-energized, AND off-site power is from SU1 THEN RESTORE power to bus A3 from A1 by performing the following:

a) CHECK A3 L.O. RELAY TRIP (K02-B6) alarm clear on K02.

b) IF A3 L.O. RELAY TRIP is alarming, THEN CORRECT cause of L.O.

RELAY TRIP before energizing bus, while continuing with this procedure (Refer to 1107.001, Electrical System Operations, Reclosing Tripped Bus or MCC Feeder Breakers section).

c) NOTIFY personnel attempting to restore EDG that A3 is about to be energized from off-site power.

d) TURN SYNCHRONIZE switch for A1 Feed to A3 (A-309) ON.

e) To defeat undervoltage trip, HOLD A-309 handswitch in closed position until bus is energized.

f) PLACE SYNCHRONIZE switch for A-309 to OFF.

(75. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE)

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 55 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

75. (Continued).

3) IF A4 is de-energized, AND off-site power is from SU1 THEN RESTORE power to bus A4 from A2 by performing the following:

a) CHECK A4 L.O. RELAY TRIP (K02-B7) alarm clear on K02.

b) IF A4 L.O. RELAY TRIP is alarming, THEN CORRECT cause of L.O.

RELAY TRIP before energizing bus, while continuing with this procedure (Refer to 1107.001, Electrical System Operations, Reclosing Tripped Bus or MCC Feeder Breakers section).

c) NOTIFY personnel attempting to restore EDG that A4 is about to be energized from off-site power.

d) TURN SYNCHRONIZE switch for A2 Feed to A4 (A-409) ON

e) To defeat undervoltage trip, HOLD A-409 handswitch in closed position until bus is energized.

f) PLACE SYNCHRONIZE switch for A-409 to OFF.

G. As time permits, SECURE EDGs using 1104.036, Emergency Diesel Generator Operation, DG1/DG2 Shutdown section(s).

76. RESTORE ICW cooling (RT-22).

77. IF conditions permit:

fuel damage does NOT exist

RCS to ICW leak is NOT suspected

THEN RESTORE Letdown (RT-13).

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 56 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

78. ENSURE Spent Fuel CLG pump (P40A or 78. PERFORM 1203.050, Unit 1 Spent Fuel Pool P40B) running. Emergencies in conjunction with this procedure.

79. IF NOT previously restored, THEN RESTORE normal Makeup and Seal Injection as follows:

A. IF Seal INJ CV-1207 Bypass (MU-1207-3) is open, THEN:

1) PLACE RC Pump Seals Total INJ Flow (CV-1207) in HAND AND CLOSE.

2) DISPATCH an operator to perform the following:

a) OPEN Seal INJ CV-1207 Inlet (MU-1207-1)

AND STAND BY to close Seal INJ CV-1207 Bypass (MU-1207-3).

3) DIRECT dispatched operator to slowly throttle closed MU-1207-3.

4) THROTTLE OPEN CV-1207 in HAND to maintain RCP Seals Total INJ flow 8 to 12 gpm until MU-1207-3 is closed.

B. RESTORE normal Makeup as follows:

1) ENSURE Pressurizer Level Control Setpoint at 100 inches.

2) ENSURE CV-1235 in AUTO.

3) OPEN RCS Makeup Blocks:

CV-1233

CV-1234

4) CLOSE HPI Block valve (CV-1220 or CV-1285).

5) CHECK CV-1235 operates to control 5) OPERATE CV-1235 in HAND to PZR level 90 to 110 inches. control PZR level 90 to 110 inches.

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 57 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

80. IF HPI Cooling is in service, 80. GO TO step 84.

THEN GO TO step 81.

81. CHECK primary to secondary heat transfer 81. GO TO 1202.004, Overheating.

in progress indicated by ALL of the following:

T-cold tracking associated SG T-sat (Fig. 2)

T-hot tracking CET temps

T-hot/T-cold T stable or dropping

A. CHECK adequate SCM. A. IF overheating caused inadequate SCM, THEN:

1) PLACE ERV in AUTO.

2) IF ERV fails open, THEN CLOSE Electromatic Relief ERV Isolation (CV-1000).

3) WHEN SCM is adequate, THEN CONTINUE.

B. CONTROL RCS press within limits of Figure 3 (RT-14).

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 58 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

CAUTION

With RCS solid, 1F temp change can cause 100 psig press change.

A large reduction of out-flow without a corresponding reduction of in-flow will result in RCS press rise.

82. SECURE HPI Cooling as follows:

A. OPEN HPI Pump RECIRC Blocks: A. IF HPI pump recirc flow path to Makeup Tank is unavailable,

CV-1300 THEN MAINTAIN HPI pump flow greater

CV-1301 than or equal to 90 gpm.

B. START AUX Lube Oil pump for ES HPI pump.

C. STOP ES HPI pump

D. ENSURE ERV in AUTO D. IF necessary to limit RCS press, THEN RE-OPEN ERV.

E. THROTTLE HPI Block valves associated with OP HPI pump to maintain RCS press within limits of Figure 3:

P36A/B P36C/B CV-1219 CV-1227 CV-1220 CV-1228 CV-1278 CV-1284 CV-1279 CV-1285

F. CLOSE HPI Block valves associated with ES HPI pump.

P36A P36C CV-1219 CV-1227 CV-1220 CV-1228 CV-1278 CV-1284 CV-1279 CV-1285

G. STOP Aux Lube Oil pump for ES HPI pump.

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 59 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

83. ESTABLISH PZR steam bubble as follows:

A. CHECK Letdown in service. A. PERFORM the following:

1) IF conditions permit:

fuel damage does NOT exist

RCS to ICW leak is NOT suspected

THEN RESTORE Letdown (RT-13).

2) IF Letdown flow can NOT be established, THEN do NOT attempt to draw PZR steam bubble until ONE of the following conditions is met:

Letdown flow restored

Adequate RCS leakage exists to reduce PZR level

RCS shrinkage due to cooldown reduces PZR level

B. OPERATE Pressurizer Heaters to maintain less than or equal to 100F/hr PZR heatup rate.

(83. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE)

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 60 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

83. (Continued).

C. WHEN PZR temp is adequate, THEN:

Adequate PZR RCS Press Temp

> 1000 psig CET Temp + 40F

350 to 1000 psig CET Temp + 60F

350 psig CET Temp + 80F

1) DETERMINE saturation press for PZR temp using Figure 1.

2) BEGIN steam bubble formation by reducing Makeup flow AND raising Letdown flow.

3) ALLOW RCS press to drop to saturation press for PZR temp.

4) CHECK SCM remains above minimum 4) IF SCM drops within 5F of minimum adequate by greater than or equal to adequate, 5F. THEN:

a) RAISE Makeup flow to stabilize PZR level.

b) WHEN SCM is above minimum adequate by greater than or equal to 5F, THEN REDUCE Makeup flow to resume lowering PZR level at slower rate.

(83. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE)

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 61 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

83. (Continued).

D. CONTINUE reducing PZR level to 90 to D. IF SCM drops within 5F of minimum 110 inches while maintaining SCM above adequate, minimum adequate by greater than or equal THEN:

to 5F.

1) RAISE Makeup flow to stabilize PZR level.

2) WHEN SCM is above minimum adequate by greater than or equal to 5F, THEN REDUCE Makeup flow to resume lowering PZR level at slower rate.

E. WHEN PZR level is 90 to 110 inches, THEN:

1) ENSURE Pressurizer Level Control setpoint at 100 inches

2) PLACE CV-1235 in AUTO

F. OPERATE Pressurizer Heaters to maintain RCS press within limits of Figure 3.

G. MAINTAIN Makeup Tank level 55 inches to 86 inches by:

batching in existing boron concentration OR

placing 3-Way valve (CV-1248) in BLEED.

H. WHEN Makeup Tank level is in normal operating band, THEN:

1) ENSURE ES HPI pump off.

2) ENSURE Makeup Tank Outlet (CV-1275) open.

3) CLOSE BOTH BWST T3 Outlets:

CV-1407

CV-1408

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 62 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

84. RESTORE SG press control as follows:

A. CHECK ATM Dump CNTRL valves off hand A. DISPATCH an operator to remove ATM jack: Dump CNTRL valves from hand jack using 1203.002, Alternate Shutdown, Exhibit A,

CV-2618 Local Operation of ADVs:

CV-2668

CV-2618

CV-2668

B. ENSURE ATM Dump Control System operates to stabilize RCS temp:

SG A SG B ATM Dump CV-2676 ISOL CV-2619

CV-2668 ATM Dump CV-2618 CNTRL

85. RESTORE RCPs as follows:

A. While continuing with this procedure, PERFORM 1203.031, Reactor Coolant Pump and Motor Emergencies, Simultaneous Loss of Seal Injection and Seal Cooling Flow section to:

RESTORE RCP Seal Service s

DETERMINE if RCPs should be restarted.

B. IF RCP restart is allowed AND RCP restart is desired, THEN PERFORM Restart RCPs (RT-11).

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 63 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

86. ENSURE the following Bearing Lube Oil Pumps running:

P19

P21

P76

87. ENSURE Generator Seal Oil Pumps running:

P23

P24

88. CHECK Main Turbine on turning gear. 88. PLACE Main Turbine on turning gear using 1106.020, Main Turbine Generator Turning Gear Operation, Setup for Automatic and Post-Trip Operation of Turning Gear section.

89. CHECK MFWP Turbines on turning gear. 89. PLACE MFWP Turbines on turning gear using 1106.016, Condensate, Feedwater, and Steam System Operation, MFWP Turning Gear Operation Post Reactor Trip section.

90. CHECK Condenser Vacuum Breakers 90. ENSURE personnel are clear of Vacuum closed: Breakers.

CV-2854 A. CLOSE Vacuum Breakers:

CV-2855

CV-2854

CV-2855

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 64 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

91. CHECK SU Boiler supplying Gland Steam. 91. DISPATCH an operator to place SU Boiler in service using 1106.022, Startup Boiler Operations, Boiler Startup on Atomizing Air section or Boiler Startup on Atomizing Steam section and 1106.013, Gland Steam System, System Startup section.

92. ENSURE Condenser Vacuum pump (C5A or C5B) running.

93. RESTART desired Circ Water pumps using 1104.008, Circulating Water and Water Box Vacuum System Operation, System Startup section.

94. CHECK Condenser Vacuum greater than 23 inches Hg.

A. DEPRESS Low Vacuum Reset PBs on C02.

B. RESTORE secondary using 1105.005, Emergency Feedwater Initiation and Control, Returning EFIC System and MSLI Components to Normal Automatic Condition After Automatic MSLI Actuation section.

C. CHECK TURB BYP valves operate to C. OPERATE TURB BYP valves in HAND to maintain stable CET temp. maintain stable CET temp.

95. GO TO 1202.001, Reactor Trip.

END

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 65 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

NOTE Off-site power is considered restored to normal if EITHER of the following conditions exists:

SU1 is available with voltage greater than or equal to 22KV (SPDS: E22ATU1)

OR

ALL of the following conditions met for SU2:

- SU XFMR #2 Voltage Regulator:

out-of-service with input voltage greater than or equal to 162.5KV (C10 indication or SPDS1: E161ST21)

OR in service with the following conditions, In Automatic 3% reduction disabled Input voltage greater than or equal to 155.4KV (C10 indication or SPDS1: E161ST21)

- ANY Unit 2 SU XFMR #2 loads are BOTH:

Vital loads ONLY Less than or equal to 4.4MVA

- ONE or BOTH 161KV transmission lines in service (Russellville East or Pleasant Hill)

96. IF off-site power is restored to normal, THEN RETURN TO step 74.

97. Prepare to energize A2 as follows:

A. CHECK A2 L.O. RELAY TRIP (K02-A7) A. CORRECT cause of L.O. RELAY TRIP alarm clear. before energizing bus, while continuing with this procedure (Refer to 1107.001 Electrical System Operations, Reclosing Tripped Bus or MCC Feeder Breakers section).

B. PERFORM the following to crosstie bus B1 and B2 to provide power for "A" ICW pump (P33A):

1) OPEN A1 Feed to B1 (B-112).

2) PLACE B1-B2 Crosstie (B-142)

Synchronize switch to ON.

3) CLOSE B1-B2 Crosstie (B-142).

4) PLACE B1-B2 Crosstie (B-142)

Synchronize switch to OFF.

(97. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE)

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 66 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

97. (Continued)

C. DISPATCH an operator to perform Attachment 1, Degraded Power Breaker Alignment and UV Relay Defeat.

D. PLACE Bank 4 Pressurizer Heaters in OFF.

E. PLACE RCP HP Oil Lift pump P-63B in PULL-TO-LOCK.

98. IF off-site power is available but degraded, 98. GO TO step 100.

THEN:

A. ENSURE Attachment 1 complete.

B. CHECK ONE of the following available to B. GO TO step 100.

power A2 from off-site power:

Startup Xfmr #1 Feed to A2 (A-213)

Startup Xfmr #2 Feed to A2 (A-211)

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 67 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

99. Energize bus A2 from off-site power as follows:

A. CHECK A2 Feed to A4 (A-409) open. A. IF A-409 can NOT be opened, THEN GO TO step 100.

B. IF A2 is to be energized from SU1, THEN:

1) REMOVE A2 feeder breaker A-213 handswitch from PULL-TO-LOCK.

2) CHECK A2 bus energized. 2) PERFORM the following:

a) TURN SYNCHRONIZE switch for A-213 ON.

b) CLOSE A-213 from handswitch.

c) IF A-213 fails to close, THEN RESET breaker anti-pump feature by taking handswitch to PULL-TO-LOCK AND releasing.

d) PLACE SYNCHRONIZE switch to OFF.

e) IF SU2 is available, THEN GO TO step 99.C.

f) IF A2 can NOT be energized from off-site power, THEN GO TO step 100.

3) GO TO step 102.

(99. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE)

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 68 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

99. (Continued)

C. IF A2 is to be energized from SU2, THEN:

1) IF ANY Unit 2 buses are powered from SU2, THEN COORDINATE with Unit 2 prior to starting loads.

2) REMOVE A2 feeder breaker A-211 handswitch from PULL-TO-LOCK.

3) CHECK A2 bus energized. 3) PERFORM the following:

a) TURN SYNCHRONIZE switch for A-211 ON.

b) CLOSE A-211 from handswitch.

c) IF A-211 fails to close, THEN RESET breaker anti-pump feature by taking handswitch to PULL-TO-LOCK AND releasing.

d) PLACE SYNCHRONIZE switch to OFF.

e) IF SU1 is available, THEN GO TO step 99.B.

f) IF A2 can NOT be energized from off-site power, THEN GO TO step 100.

4) GO TO step 102.

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 69 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

CAUTION Exceeding 2750KW continuous load may cause EDG damage.

100. IF A2 can NOT be energized from off-site 100. IF only ONE DG is operating, power THEN GO TO step 108.

AND TWO DGs are operating properly, THEN:

A. ENSURE Attachment 1 complete.

B. ENERGIZE bus A2 from A4 as follows:

1) TURN SYNCHRONIZE switch for A-409 ON.

2) IF A4 is energized from AAC Gen, THEN NOTIFY Unit 2 prior to closing A-409.

3) CLOSE A-409.

C. IF A4 is powered by DG2, C. IF continuous load on DG2 greater THEN CHECK loading on DG2 less than than 2750KW, or equal to 2750KW. THEN:

1) TRIP A-409.

2) INVESTIGATE cause of excess load.

3) CORRECT problem.

4) REPEAT this step until A-409 can remain closed with less than or equal to 2750KW continuous load on DG2.

5) IF A-409 can NOT remain closed, THEN GO TO step 108.

(100. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE)

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 70 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

100. (Continued).

D. IF A4 is powered by the AAC Gen, D. IF continuous load on AAC Gen exceeds THEN COORDINATE with Unit 2 to ensure allowable limits, loading on AAC Gen remains within limits. THEN:

1) TRIP A-409.

2) INVESTIGATE cause of excess load.

3) CORRECT problem.

4) REPEAT this step until A-409 can remain closed with AAC Gen load within limits.

5) IF A-409 can NOT remain closed, THEN GO TO step 108.

E. TURN SYNCHRONIZE switch OFF.

101. MONITOR DG loading as follows:

A. IF DG2 is supplying A2, A. IF greater than 2750KW on DG2, THEN MONITOR DG2 loading to ensure THEN:

less than or equal to 2750KW maintained.

1) SECURE last load started.

2) REDUCE load on DG2 by starting vital loads on A3 and securing redundant vital loads on A4.

B. IF AAC Gen is supplying A2, B. IF AAC Gen load limits are exceeded, THEN COORDINATE with Unit 2 to ensure THEN:

loading is maintained within limits.

1) SECURE last load started.

2) REDUCE AAC Gen load by starting vital loads on A3 and securing redundant vital loads on A4.

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 71 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

CAUTION

If A2 is being supplied from degraded off-site power the following problems can occur:

- Motors can trip on overload, overheat due to high running currents, or stall

- MCC starter might not pick up to energize loads

- AC auxiliary relays might not pick up to provide interlock or load energization features

Motors are started one at a time and allowed to reach run speed to minimize further voltage degradation.

If BOTH Units are aligned to SU2, coordination between Units is essential when starting loads.

If AAC Gen is supplying A2, coordination between Units is essential when starting loads.

NOTE Additional components and estimated electrical loads which may be added when restoring ICW, depending on DG load, when A4 is supplying A2 are as follows:

Instrument Air Compressor (C28B) 138KW

Breathing Air Compressor (C30) 138KW

Two ICW Pumps (P33A, P33B, P33C)

(Instrument Air is needed to open 100KW each P33B crosstie valves)

Condensate Transfer Pump (P9B) 20KW

CRD Cooling Pump (P79B) 15KW

102. RESTORE ICW cooling (RT-22).

103. IF conditions permit:

fuel damage does NOT exist

RCS to ICW leak is NOT suspected

THEN RESTORE Letdown (RT-13).

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 72 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

104. RESTORE normal Makeup and Seal Injection as follows:

A. OPEN RCS Makeup Blocks:

CV-1233

CV-1234

B. IF Seal INJ CV-1207 Bypass (MU-1207-3) is open, THEN:

1) PLACE RC Pump Seals Total INJ Flow (CV-1207) in HAND AND CLOSE.

2) DISPATCH an operator to open Seal INJ CV-1207 Inlet (MU-1207-1).

3) DIRECT dispatched operator to slowly close Seal INJ CV-1207 Bypass (MU-1207-3).

4) THROTTLE OPEN CV-1207 in HAND to maintain RCP Seals Total INJ flow 8 to 12 gpm until MU-1207-3 is closed.

C. RESTORE normal Makeup as follows:

1) ENSURE Pressurizer Level Control Setpoint at 100 inches.

2) ENSURE Pressurizer Level Control valve (CV-1235) in AUTO.

3) CLOSE HPI Block valve (CV-1220 or CV-1285).

4) CHECK CV-1235 maintains PZR level 4) OPERATE CV-1235 in HAND to 90 to 110 inches. maintain PZR level 90 to 110 inches.

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 73 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

105. RESTORE SG press control as follows:

A. CHECK ATM Dump CNTRL valves off hand A. DISPATCH an operator to remove ATM jack: Dump CNTRL valves from hand jack using 1203.002, Alternate Shutdown, Exhibit A,

CV-2618 Local Operation of ADVs:

CV-2668

CV-2618

CV-2668

B. ENSURE ATM Dump Control System operates to stabilize RCS temp:

SG A SG B ATM Dump CV-2676 ISOL CV-2619

CV-2668 ATM Dump CV-2618 CNTRL

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 74 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

NOTE Estimated DG electrical load for Pressurizer Heater Bank 4 is 355KW.

106. IF additional Pressurizer Heaters are required, THEN ENERGIZE Pressurizer Heater Bank 4.

107. IF A2 is being supplied by SU2 AND SU2 voltage is within allowed limits:

Voltage regulator Voltage regulator in service out of service 155.4KV 162.5KV (C10 indication or (C10 indication or SPDS1: E161ST21) SPDS1: E161ST21)

THEN START additional loads within SU2 limits using 1107.001 Electrical System Operations, Attachment E, SU2 Transformer Loading Restrictions.

108. As time permits, DISPATCH an operator to perform the following:

A. BEGIN Main Generator purge using 1106.002 Generator Hydrogen System, Exhibit F, Purging Hydrogen with CO2 During Emergency Conditions.

WARNING Manually opening Condenser Vacuum Breakers creates a high noise area.

B. Manually OPEN Condenser Vacuum Breakers:

CV-2854

CV-2855

109. WHEN RCPs stop rotating, THEN PLACE RCP Emergency HP Oil Lift pumps in PULL-TO-LOCK:

P80A

P80B

P80C

P80D

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 75 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

110. WHEN MFW pumps stop rotating, THEN PLACE MFW Pump Emergency Lube Oil pumps in PULL-TO-LOCK:

P28A

P28B

111. CHECK Electrical EQUIP Room Temperature 111. DISPATCH an operator to restore applicable HI (K16-C5) alarm clear. AUX BLDG ELECT Rooms Emergency Chillers (VCH4A and B) using 1104.027, Battery and Switchgear Emergency Cooling System, Operation of North/South Emerg Switchgear Room Chiller VCH-4A/B sections.

112. When 15 bottles of CO2 have been added to Main Generator, THEN PLACE Backup Air Side Generator Seal Oil pump (P25) in PULL-TO-LOCK.

113. CHECK EFW CST (T-41B) level remains 113. SHIFT EFW pump suction using 1106.006, greater than or equal to 5.1'. Emergency Feedwater Pump Operation, EFW Pump (P-7A or P-7B) Suction Transfer section.

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 76 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

NOTE Off-site power is considered restored to normal if EITHER of the following conditions exists:

SU1 is available with voltage greater than or equal to 22KV (SPDS: E22ATU1)

OR

ALL of the following conditions met for SU2:

- SU XFMR #2 Voltage Regulator:

out-of-service with input voltage greater than or equal to 162.5KV (C10 indication or SPDS1: E161ST21)

OR in service with the following conditions, In Automatic 3% reduction disabled Input voltage greater than or equal to 155.4KV (C10 indication or SPDS1: E161ST21)

- ANY Unit 2 SU XFMR #2 loads are BOTH:

Vital loads ONLY Less than or equal to 4.4MVA

- ONE or BOTH 161KV transmission lines in service (Russellville East or Pleasant Hill)

114. Until off-site power is restored to normal:

MAINTAIN Mode 3, greater than 525F OR

PROCEED as directed by Senior Manager, Operations.

115. MAINTAIN continued DG operation as follows:

A. NOTIFY Shift Manager to ensure adequate DG fuel oil is maintained for extended DG operation.

(Refer to 1104.023, Diesel Oil Transfer Procedure, Maintaining Bulk FO Storage Tank (T-25) Level section).

B. PERFORM 1104.036, Emergency Diesel Generator Operation, Extended EDG (greater than 24 hour2.777778e-4 days 0.00667 hours 3.968254e-5 weeks 9.132e-6 months ) Operations section.

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 77 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

116. WHEN off-site power is restored to normal, THEN:

A. IF B1 is cross-connected to B2, THEN:

1) OPEN B1-B2 Crosstie (B-142).

2) CLOSE A1 Feed to B1 (B-112).

B. IF A2 is de-energized, THEN:

1) CHECK Attachment 1, Degraded Power 1) DISPATCH an operator to perform Breaker Alignment and UV Relay Defeat Attachment 2, Recovery From was NOT performed. Degraded Power Breaker Alignment and UV Relay Defeat.

2) RETURN TO step 74.

C. IF A2 is energized from off-site power, THEN:

1) DISPATCH an operator to perform Attachment 2, Recovery From Degraded Power Breaker Alignment and UV Relay Defeat.

2) RETURN TO step 74.

(116. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE)

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 78 of 86

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS

116. (Continued).

D. IF A2 is energized from A4, THEN:

1) CHECK Letdown isolated. 1) ISOLATE Letdown by closing either:

Letdown Coolers Outlet (RCS)

(CV-1221)

OR

Letdown Coolers Outlets (RCS):

CV-1214

CV-1216

2) DE-ENERGIZE A2 by opening A2 feed to A4 (A-409).

3) DISPATCH an operator to perform Attachment 2, Recovery From Degraded Power Breaker Alignment and UV Relay Defeat.

4) RETURN TO step 74.

END

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 79 of 86

ATTACHMENT 1 Page 1 of 3 DEGRADED POWER BREAKER ALIGNMENT AND UV RELAY DEFEAT

1. ALIGN bus A2 as follows:

A. PLACE the following A2 breakers in LOCAL AND OPEN:

Breaker in LOCAL () Breaker OPEN ()

Bus A2 Auxiliary Feed Pump P-75 A-204 Condensate Pump P-2B A-205 Heater Drain Pump P-8B A-207 Main Chiller VCH-1B A-208 Circ Water Pump P-3D A-209 Circ Water Pump P-3B A-210

B. IF A2 is to be energized from SU1 or SU2, THEN DEFEAT A2 feeder breaker UV Close Permissive interlocks and UV trips as follows:

1) IF A2 is to be energized from SU1, THEN PULL fuse block FU-9/UA located inside breaker cubicle A-113.

2) IF A2 is to be energized from SU2, THEN PULL fuse block FU-19/UA located inside breaker cubicle A-111.

2. ALIGN Load Center B4 as follows:

A. TURN spring charging motor power OFF to the following breakers, AND RECORD as found breaker status:

Charging Breaker Position () Closing Load Center B4 Breaker Motor As found As Left Springs power Discharged OFF () OPEN CLOSED OPEN ()

MCC B-44 Supply 413 Isophase Bus Cooler Fan C-8B 414 MCC B-41 Supply 421 MCC B-43 Supply 423 Condenser Vacuum Pump C5B 424 B3-B4 Crosstie 432 Turbine Building Crane L-1 433

B. OPEN any of the above breakers which are closed.

C. For any of the above breakers which were already open, DISCHARGE the closing springs by closing the breaker AND re-opening (bus is de-energized).

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 80 of 86

ATTACHMENT 1 Page 2 of 3

3. ALIGN Load Center B2 as follows:

A. TURN spring charging motor power OFF to the following breakers, AND RECORD as found breaker status:

Charging Breaker Position () Closing Load Center B2 Breaker Motor As found As Left Springs power Discharged OFF () OPEN CLOSED OPEN ()

MCC B-21 Supply 221 MCC B-25 Supply 222 MCC B-23 Supply 232 Aux Bldg Radwaste Exhaust 233 Fan (VEF-8B)

NaBr/NaOCl Pump P-90 234

B. OPEN any of the above breakers which are closed.

C. For any of the above breakers which were already open, DISCHARGE the closing springs by closing the breaker AND re-opening (bus is de-energized).

4. ALIGN Load Center B1 as follows:

A. TURN spring charging motor power OFF to the following breakers, AND RECORD as found breaker status:

Charging Breaker Position () Closing Load Center B1 Breaker Motor As found As Left Springs power Discharged OFF () OPEN CLOSED OPEN ()

X-1 Feed to B-1 112 Welding Receptacle Power 113 Panel - 1PD MCC B-11 Supply 121 MCC B-15 Supply 122 MCC B-13 Supply 132 Aux Bldg Radwaste Exhaust 133 Fan (VEF-8A)

B. OPEN any of the above breakers which are closed.

C. For any of the above breakers which are already open, DISCHARGE the closing springs by closing the breaker AND re-opening (bus is de-energized).

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 81 of 86

ATTACHMENT 1 Page 3 of 3

5. ALIGN MCC B12 by opening all except the following breaker:

ICW Pump P-33A (B-1264)

6. ALIGN MCC B22 by opening all except the following breakers:

CRD Cooling Water Pump P-79B (B-2213)

ICW Pump (P-33B) (B-2214)

Condensate Transfer Pump P-9B (B-2236)

ICW Pump (P-33C) (B-2264)

7. ALIGN MCC B42 by opening all except the following breakers:

Instrument Air Compressor C-28B (B-4213B)

Breathing Air Compressor C-30 (B-4253)

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 82 of 86

ATTACHMENT 2 Page 1 of 2

RECOVERY FROM DEGRADED POWER BREAKER ALIGNMENT AND UV RELAY DEFEAT

1. ALIGN bus A2 as follows:

A. IF A2 was energized from SU1 or SU2, THEN:

1) IF A2 was energized from SU1, THEN INSERT fuse block FU-9/UA located inside breaker cubicle A-113.

2) IF A2 was energized from SU2, THEN INSERT fuse block FU-19/UA located inside breaker cubicle A-111.

B. PLACE ALL A2 breakers in REMOTE.

2. ALIGN Load Center B4 as follows:

A. TURN spring charging motor power ON for ALL breakers.

B. CLOSE the following breakers:

MCC B-44 Supply (413)

MCC B-41 Supply (421)

MCC B-43 Supply (423)

3. ALIGN Load Center B2 as follows:

A. TURN spring charging motor power ON for ALL breakers.

B. CLOSE the following breakers:

MCC B-21 Supply (221)

MCC B-25 Supply (222)

MCC B-23 Supply (232)

4. ALIGN Load Center B1 as follows:

A. TURN spring charging motor power ON for ALL breakers.

B. CLOSE the following breakers:

Welding Receptacle Panel - 1PD (113)

MCC B-11 Supply (121)

MCC B-15 Supply (122)

MCC B-13 Supply (132)

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 83 of 86

ATTACHMENT 2 Page 2 of 2

5. ALIGN MCC B12 by closing all except the following breakers:

Regen Waste Transfer Pump 2P134A (B-1212)

Condensate Reject From HW to CST CV-2877 (B-1255)

Spares

6. ALIGN MCC B22 by closing all except the following breakers:

Regen Waste Transfer Pump 2P134B (B-2225)

S-42 Temporary Power (B-2231A)

Spares

7. ALIGN MCC B42 by closing all breakers except spares.

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 84 of 86

ATTACHMENT 3 Page 1 of 1 MAKEUP PUMP P36B ALIGNMENT TO OPERATING EDG

1. NOTE which DG is operating: _________

2. PERFORM the following:

ENSURE de-energized BWST Outlet open:

DG1 DG2 Operating Operating CV-1408 CV-1407

UNLOCK AND OPEN isolation valve for P-36B Makeup Pump Disch Cross-Over:

DG1 DG2 Operating Operating P-36 A&B P-36 B&C MU-25 OPEN MU-23

PERFORM the following to align SW to P36B:

A. UNLOCK AND CLOSE isolation valves for P36B to unavailable service water loop using SW Loop I or II to "B" MU Pump Isols:

DG1 DG2 Operating Operating SW Loop II SW Loop I SW-16 CLOSE SW-14 SW-17 SW-15

B. UNLOCK AND OPEN isolation valves for P36B to available service water loop DG1 DG2 Operating Operating SW Loop I SW Loop II SW-14 OPEN SW-16 SW-15 SW-17

IF DG2 is operating, THEN CHECK P-64B Power Supply Transfer Switch (B801) aligned to B65 by locally verifying green power supply selected as indicated by the three-spoked manual operating lever on the left side of P-64B disconnect (B-801).

A. IF B801 aligned to B57, THEN PERFORM 1107.002, ES Electrical System Operation, Manual Transfer of HPI Aux Lube Oil Pump P-64B Transfer Switch B801 to B6515.

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 85 of 86

Major Recovery Strategies

Ensure proper DG operation and swing component alignment

Ensure SGs available as heat sinks

Control RCS pressure and inventory (including RCP seals)

Establish conditions for power restoration

Address existing heat transfer upsets if present (loss of SCM, overheating, overcooling)

Restore off-site power if available or establish conditions for long-term DG operation

Floating Steps

RCS Inventory/Press

CONTROL RCS press within limits of Figure 3 (RT-14).

IF SCM is less than adequate AND NOT caused by overheating, THEN GO TO step 24.

IF SCM is less than adequate, AND caused by overheating, THEN GO TO step 55.

IF PZR level drops below 30 inches OR RCS press drops below 1700 psig, THEN INITIATE HPI (RT-2).

IF RCS press less than 150 psig, THEN GO TO 1202.010, ESAS.

IF MU Tank level drops below 18 inches, THEN CLOSE Makeup Tank Outlet (CV-1275).

RCS Temp

IF CET temps are greater than 610F AND EFW is NOT available, THEN GO TO step 55.

IF RCS T-cold is less than 540F AND dropping AND SCM is adequate, THEN GO TO step 40.

IF CET temps are superheated AND moving away from the saturation line, THEN GO TO 1202.005, Inadequate Core Cooling.

CHANGE 1202.007 DEGRADED POWER 018 PAGE 86 of 86

Floating Steps

Electrical

IF off-site power becomes available AND no abnormal conditions exist, THEN ENSURE steps 2 through 22 have been completed AND GO TO step 74.

IF TWO DGs are operating AND ONE DG is lost while performing this procedure, THEN RETURN TO step 2.

IF ALL DGs are lost, THEN GO TO 1202.008, Blackout.

IF A3 and A4 are cross-connected, AND another DG or off-site power becomes available, THEN RESTORE buses to normal using 1107.002, Electrical System Operation, Returning Paralleled Buses A3 and A4 to Normal section.

IF A3 and A4 are NOT cross-connected AND another DG becomes available, THEN RETURN TO step 2.

ESAS

IF ESAS actuates, THEN ENSURE proper ESAS actuation (RT-10).

Instrument Air

IF Instrument Air to ATM Dump CNTRL valves is lost, THEN PERFORM step 5.B.

Secondary

IF EFW is lost AND SCM is adequate, THEN GO TO step 55.

IF SG press less than or equal to 900 psig, except when SG is being allowed to boil dry AND SCM is adequate, THEN GO TO step 40.

IF SG tube leakage is greater than 1 GPM, THEN PERFORM 1202.006, Tube Rupture in conjunction with this procedure.

SF Pool Cooling

IF Spent Fuel Pool cooling is NOT in service, THEN PERFORM 1203.050, Unit 1 Spent Fuel Pool Emergencies in conjunction with this procedure.

Enclosure, Attachment 3

1CAN072401

ANO-1 Abnormal Operating Procedure, OP-1203.015, "Pressurizer System Failure," Revision 024

For Information Only

PAGE: 1 of 27 1203.015 PRESSURIZER SYSTEMS FAILURE CHANGE: 024

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION PAGE

1. Electromatic Relief Valve (PSV-1000) Failure or Leak ................................ .......... 2

2. Leaking Pressurizer Code Safety Valve (PSV-1001, PSV-1002) .......................... 5

3. Inoperative Pressurizer Heater(s) ......................................................................... 7

4. Pressurizer Level Indication Malfunction .............................................................. 10

5. Insufficient Pressurizer Bypass Spray Flow .......................................................... 14

6. Pressurizer Spray Valve (CV-1008) Failure .......................................................... 16

7. Loss of All Pressurizer Level Indication ................................................................ 23

ATTACHMENTS

Attachment A -- RCS Makeup Volume During Cooldown ....................................................... 26

Attachment B -- Example Calculations for Adding Water to Makeup Tank ............................. 27

PAGE: 2 of 27 1203.015 PRESSURIZER SYSTEMS FAILURE CHANGE: 024

SECTION 1-- Electromatic Relief Valve (PSV-1000) Failure or Leak ENTRY CONDITIONS

One or more of the following:

ERV PSV 1000 Outlet Temp (SPDS T1025) reads 200°F

Quench Tank (T-42) temperature, level or pressure rising

Rise on acoustic Relief Valve Monitor (VYI-1000A)

RELIEF VALVE OPEN (K09-A1) alarm

ERV indicates open on C04

Pressurizer ERV Isolation Valve (CV-1000) inoperable

ERV (PSV-1000) inoperable

PAGE: 3 of 27 1203.015 PRESSURIZER SYSTEMS FAILURE CHANGE: 024

SECTION 1-- ELECTROMATIC RELIEF VALVE (PSV-1000) FAILURE OR LEAK INSTRUCTIONS

1. CLOSE Pressurizer ERV Isolation Valve (CV-1000).

2. IF CRS/SM desires, THEN HOLD CV-1000 in the closed position to override CV-1000 torque switch.

3. IF ERV leakage with CV-1000 closed exceeds the capability to maintain RCS pressure, THEN:

A. TRIP the reactor.

B. PERFORM 1202.001, Reactor Trip in conjunction with this procedure.

4. IF closing CV-1000 stops leak, THEN:

A. CONTINUE power operations with ERV isolated.

B. NOTIFY Senior Manager, Operations.

C. LOG CV-1000 closure in station log and on plant status board.

5. IF closing CV-1000 does NOT stop leak, THEN:

NOTE

Quench Tank volume (L1051) can help determine fill rate.

Steam space leakage of 0.1 gpm require about 11 amps more to maintain similar conditions.

A. PERFORM 1103.013, RCS Leak Detection, RCS Leakage Monitoring section.

B. IF total RCS leakage exceeds the limit allowed by Tech Specs, THEN:

1) PERFORM 1203.045, Rapid Plant Shutdown.

2) ADVISE SM to implement 1903.010, Emergency Action Level Classification.

5. Continued on next page

PAGE: 4 of 27 1203.015 PRESSURIZER SYSTEMS FAILURE CHANGE: 024

SECTION 1-- ELECTROMATIC RELIEF VALVE (PSV-1000) FAILURE OR LEAK

5. (CONTINUED)

C. IF total PZR steam space leakage is greater than 1 gpm, THEN:

1) INITIATE a Condition Report to determine operability within 24 hours2.777778e-4 days 0.00667 hours 3.968254e-5 weeks 9.132e-6 months .

2) IF leakage is evaluated as unsafe, THEN COMMENCE plant shutdown per 1102.016, Power Reduction and Plant Shutdown and 1102.010, Plant Shutdown and Cooldown.

D. MONITOR Quench Tank (T-42) pressure, level, and temperature.

E. MAINTAIN Quench Tank level and pressure within limits in 1103.005, Pressurizer Operation.

6. IF ERV (PSV-1000) is inoperable, OR ERV Isolation Valve (CV-1000) is inoperable, THEN:

A. CLOSE ERV Isolation.

B. MAINTAIN ERV vent path closed.

C. REFER TO TRM 3.4.2.

D. INSTALL caution tag on CV-1000 handswitch stating, "Use as required by EOP and only as a last resort" per EN-OP-102, Protective and Caution Tagging.

E. INITIATE a Condition Report.

7. IF CV-1000 is closed, THEN PERFORM a risk assessment.

8. REFER TO RCS Pressure, Temperature and Flow DNB Surveillance Limits of the ANO1 COLR (TS 3.4.1).

END

PAGE: 5 of 27 1203.015 PRESSURIZER SYSTEMS FAILURE CHANGE: 024

SECTION 2 -- LEAKING PRESSURIZER CODE SAFETY VALVE (PSV -1001, PSV-1002)

ENTRY CONDITIONS

One or more of the following:

PZR PSV 1001 Outlet Temp (SPDS T1026) reads 200°F

PZR PSV 1002 Outlet Temp (SPDS T1027) reads 200°F

Quench Tank (T-42) temperature, level or pressure rising

Rise on acoustic indicators:

Relief Valve Monitor (VYI-1001A)

Relief Valve Monitor (VYI-1002A)

RELIEF VALVE OPEN (K09-A1) alarm

PAGE: 6 of 27 1203.015 PRESSURIZER SYSTEMS FAILURE CHANGE: 024

SECTION 2 -- LEAKING PRESSURIZER CODE SAFETY VALVE (PSV -1001, PSV-1002)

INSTRUCTIONS

1. IF code safety valve leakage exceeds the capability to maintain RCS pressure, THEN:

A. TRIP the reactor.

B. PERFORM 1202.001, Reactor Trip in conjunction with this procedure.

2. REFER TO Pressurizer Safety Valves (TS 3.4.10).

NOTE

Quench Tank volume (L1051) can help determine fill rate.

Steam space leakage of 0.1 gpm require about 11 amps more to maintain similar conditions.

3. PERFORM 1103.013, RCS Leak Detection, RCS Leakage Monitoring section.

4. IF total RCS leakage is in excess of that allowed by RCS Operational Leakage (TS 3.4.13),

THEN:

A. PERFORM 1203.045, Rapid Plant Shutdown.

B. ADVISE SM to implement 1903.010, Emergency Action Level Classification.

5. IF total PZR steam space leakage is greater than 1 gpm, THEN:

A. INITIATE a Condition Report and perform an operability determination within 24 hours2.777778e-4 days 0.00667 hours 3.968254e-5 weeks 9.132e-6 months .

B. IF leakage is evaluated as unsafe, THEN COMMENCE plant shutdown per 1102.016, Power Reduction and Plant Shutdown and 1102.010, Plant Shutdown and Cooldown.

6. CONTACT Senior Manager, Operations.

7. MONITOR Quench Tank (T-42) pressure, level, and temperature.

8. MAINTAIN Quench Tank level and pressure within limits in 1103.005, Pressurizer Operation.

9. REFER TO RCS Pressure, Temperature and Flow DNB Surveillance Limits of the ANO1 COLR (TS 3.4.1).

END

PAGE: 7 of 27 1203.015 PRESSURIZER SYSTEMS FAILURE CHANGE: 024

SECTION 3 -- INOPERATIVE PRESSURIZER HEATER(S)

ENTRY CONDITIONS

One or more of the following:

Pressurizer heaters do not energize in AUTO at proper setpoint:

Banks 1 and 2 full on: 2135 psig

Bank 3 on: 2135 psig

Bank 4 on: 2120 psig

Bank 5 on: 2105 psig

RCS pressure response abnormally slow with Pressurizer heaters energized

PZR HEATER GROUND FAULT (K09-E3) alarm

PAGE: 8 of 27 1203.015 PRESSURIZER SYSTEMS FAILURE CHANGE: 024

SECTION 3 -- INOPERATIVE PRESSURIZER HEATER(S)

INSTRUCTIONS

1. IF Pressurizer level less than 55 in. (low level heater interlock),

THEN RAISE Pressurizer level to greater than 55 in.

2. IF Pressurizer heaters will NOT energize at the proper setpoint in AUTO, THEN manually CONTROL heaters as follows:

A. For proportional heaters:

1) PLACE Pressurizer Heaters Proportional Control H/A station to HAND.

2) ADJUST Proportional Control H/A station demand to maintain RCS pressure in band prescribed by CRS.

B. CYCLE heater banks 3, 4, and 5 to maintain RCS pressure in band prescribed by CRS.

C. MONITOR 480V bus loading when energizing heaters.

D. MONITOR RCS pressure.

NOTE Breaker numbers for Pressurizer heater groups are listed in 1203.012H, Annunciator K09 Corrective Action, PZR HEATER GROUND FAULT (K09 -E3) instructions.

3. IF ANY Pressurizer heater bank will NOT energize in AUTO or MAN (HAND for proportional bank),

THEN:

A. CHECK for tripped Pressurizer heater breaker(s).

B. For any tripped breaker, REFER TO 1107.001, Electrical System Operations, Reclosing Tripped Individual Load Supply Breakers section.

4. IF Pressurizer heaters are energized AND heater response is slow, THEN:

A. CHECK for indications of a Pressurizer steam space leak.

B. ENSURE Pressurizer Spray Valve (CV-1008) is fully closed (REFER TO Pressurizer Spray Valve (CV-1008) Failure section of this procedure).

C. CHECK for indications of heater degradation as follows:

CHECK SCR cabinets and breakers for Proportional Heater banks 1 and 2.

CHECK breakers for remaining heater banks and groups.

DIRECT Electrical Maintenance to perform 1307.009, Unit 1 Emergency Powered Pressurizer Heater Checkout to check KW output of Tech Spec-required heaters.

PAGE: 9 of 27 1203.015 PRESSURIZER SYSTEMS FAILURE CHANGE: 024

SECTION 3 -- INOPERATIVE PRESSURIZER HEATER(S)

NOTE

TS 3.4.9 requires Bank 1 Proportional heaters, Bank 2 Proportional heaters and Group 5 vital powered heaters to be operable. This ensures that at least 126 KW (nominal) is available in the event of a loss of offsite power concurrent with a single failure of one EDG.

If B55/56 cannot be manually transferred, one train of Pressurizer Heaters is considered inoperable.

If Group 5 vital powered heaters are declared inoperable, both trains of Pressurizer Heaters are considered inoperable. Per Licensing, TS 3.0.3 is not applicable. Entry into TS 3.4.9 Condition C applies for inoperability of both trains of Pressurizer Heaters.

1307.009, Unit 1 Emergency Powered Pressurizer Heater Checkout is used to determine operability of vital-powered Pressurizer Heaters.

5. IF any Pressurizer heater is declared inoperable, THEN:

INITIATE action to repair heater.

INITIATE a Condition Report.

REFER TO Pressurizer (TS 3.4.9) and Pressurizer Heaters (TRM 3.4.9).

REFER TO RCS Pressure, Temperature and Flow DNB Surveillance Limits of the ANO1 COLR (TS 3.4.1).

NOTIFY Senior Manager, Operations.

6. IF Degraded Power conditions exist AND 480V Vital Bus B6 is de-energized, THEN ENERGIZE Y02 from Y01 using 1107.003, Inverter and 120V Vital AC Distribution, Instrument AC Y01 and Y02 Transfer Operations section.

END

PAGE: 10 of 27 1203.015 PRESSURIZER SYSTEMS FAILURE CHANGE: 024

SECTION 4 -- PRESSURIZER LEVEL INDICATION MALFUNCTION ENTRY CONDITIONS

One or more of the following:

A compensated level indication differs greater than 16 in. from other available compensated level indicators.

Pressurizer Level Transmitter (LT-1001) indicators include:

LRS-1001 on C04 LI-1001 on R08 outside MU Tank room PMS point T-CORR RC PZR LVL (L1001B)

SPDS point PZR Level Red Channel (LPZR1R)

If HS-1002 on C04 is selected to LT-1001, LI-1000 on the Dasey Panel.

Pressurizer Level Transmitter (LT-1002) indicators include:

LIS-1002 on C04 LI-1002 on R33 by FW Heater (E-1A)

PMS point T-CORR RC PZR LVL (L1002B)

SPDS point PZR Level GRN Channel (LPZR1G)

If HS-1002 on C04 is selected to LT-1002, LI-1000 on the Dasey Panel.

Level control functions not responding properly.

Pressurizer heaters level interlock malfunction Pressurizer Level Control (CV-1235) full open or full closed during steady state operations.

Any of the following alarms in conjunction with instrument problem:

PZR LEVEL LO LO (K09-A3)

PZR LEVEL HI HI (K09-B3)

PZR LEVEL LO (K09-C3)

PZR LEVEL HI (K09-D3)

RCS inventory change with no associated Pressurizer level change.

PAGE: 11 of 27 1203.015 PRESSURIZER SYSTEMS FAILURE CHANGE: 024

SECTION 4 -- PRESSURIZER LEVEL INDICATION MALFUNCTION INSTRUCTIONS

1. IF ALL Pressurizer level indication is lost, THEN GO TO Loss of All Pressurizer Level Indication section of this procedure.

2. IF one level indicator differs from the rest (indicator is assumed invalid),

THEN:

A. OBSERVE PZR temperatures for abnormal reading.

B. GO TO step 5.

3. IF more than one level indicator is affected, THEN ATTEMPT to determine which indicators are valid as follows:

A. MONITOR for any abrupt unexplained changes in Pressurizer level indication from one transmitter (LT-1001 or LT-1002) while the other transmitter indication remains stable.

B. SELECT stable Pressurizer Level Transmitter on C04 (HS-1002).

NOTE Pressurizer Level Transmitter handswitch (HS-1002) allows selection of a temperature-compensated signal from either LT-1001 or LT-1002 to feed the following:

Pressurizer Level Control CV-1235 H/A station (LIC-1000)

Pressurizer heater interlocks

HI-HI and LO-LO alarms

PZR LVL-Selected Compensated Dasey Panel (LI-1000)

C. IF Pressurizer level indications on C04 (LRS-1001 and LIS-1002) are noticeably diverging, THEN:

1) MONITOR Makeup Tank Level recorder (LR-1248) for any recent slope changes.

2) IF slope is constant, THEN ENSURE Pressurizer Level Transmitter handswitch (HS-1002) is selected to the valid transmitter.

3) IF Makeup Tank level is changing opposite to the non-selected Pressurizer level transmitter (and at a similar rate),

THEN PLACE HS-1002 to the other transmitter.

NOTE A sensing line RCS leak of the non-selected PZR level transmitter could cause indication to trend up or down coincident with a slower drop in Makeup Tank level.

4) CHECK Makeup Tank slope returns to normal.

PAGE: 12 of 27 1203.015 PRESSURIZER SYSTEMS FAILURE CHANGE: 024

SECTION 4 -- PRESSURIZER LEVEL INDICATION MALFUNCTION

4. IF validity of indications is NOT obvious, THEN:

A. Using SPDS, ESTABLISH a trend of the following points for the previous 24 hours2.777778e-4 days 0.00667 hours 3.968254e-5 weeks 9.132e-6 months searching for any changes in one indication not accompanied by corresponding changes in other indications.

Pressurizer Level (L1001) (uncompensated)

Pressurizer Level (L1002) (uncompensated)

Pressurizer LVL (LPZR1) (average compensated)

PRI MU Tank Level (L1248)

B. MONITOR temperature compensation of Pressurizer Level Transmitters and check for proper correlation to saturation temperature.

Level Temperature SPDS Panel Indication PMS Computer Transmitter Element point (C04) Point LT-1001 TE-1001A T1001 TI-1000 T1001/2A LT-1002 TE-1002A T1002 selected HS-1001 non-selected HS-1001

NOTE SPDS calculates temperature-compensated level for the following points:

PZR Level Red Channel (LPZR1R)

PZR Level GRN Channel (LPZR1G)

Normally, these points contain values calculated by LPZR1R-T and LPZR1G-T. If either PZR temperature element (T1001 or T1002) fails, the corresponding temperature-compensated level is calculated by RCS pressure to Tsat correlation (SPDS points LPZR1R-P and LPZR1G-P).

5. WHEN validity of transmitters and indicators is determined, THEN SELECT valid transmitters (level and temperature) as follows:

A. SELECT valid Pressurizer Level instrument using HS-1002.

B. IF a Pressurizer Temperature reading from TE-1001A or TE-1002A is failed, THEN PERFORM 1105.006, Reactor Coolant System NNI, Selecting a Different Pressurizer Temperature Transmitter.

PAGE: 13 of 27 1203.015 PRESSURIZER SYSTEMS FAILURE CHANGE: 024

SECTION 4 -- PRESSURIZER LEVEL INDICATION MALFUNCTION

6. IF invalid instrument indication is greater than 16 in. from other level indications, THEN:

A. DECLARE invalid instrument inoperable.

B. REFER TO Post Accident Monitoring (PAM) Instrumentation ( TS 3.3.15).

7. ENSURE Pressurizer Heater Proportional Control (PIC-1004) in AUTO.

8. REFER TO RCS Pressure, Temperature and Flow DNB Surveillance Limits of the ANO1 COLR (TS 3.4.1).

NOTE

Failed Pressurizer Level readings impact SPDS displays. If the signal is not detected as failed by SPDS, displays that use the average of red and green channels can be erroneous.

Potential displays impacted are as follows:

Alternate Shutdown (displays LPZR1G associated with Green Train LT-1002)

Safe Shutdown (displays LPZR1R associated with Red Train LT-1001)

RCSI (displays average of LPZR1G and LPZR1R if neither is detected as failed)

ICC2 (displays average of LPZR1G and LPZR1R if neither is detected as failed)

9. ASSESS the impact on SPDS displays and IDENTIFY alternate indications for impacted displays.

END

PAGE: 14 of 27 1203.015 PRESSURIZER SYSTEMS FAILURE CHANGE: 024

SECTION 5 -- INSUFFICIENT PRESSURIZER BYPASS SPRAY FLOW ENTRY CONDITIONS

EITHER of the following:

NOTE T1028 is driven from a strap-on instrument that is sometimes unreliable due to being outside the flow stream.

Abnormal difference (greater than 50 ppm) between RCS boron concentration and Pressurizer boron concentration

Low spray line temperature: RC Pressurizer Spray Line Temp (PMS T1028) reads below 450°F

PAGE: 15 of 27 1203.015 PRESSURIZER SYSTEMS FAILURE CHANGE: 024

SECTION 5 -- INSUFFICIENT PRESSURIZER BYPASS SPRAY FLOW INSTRUCTIONS

CAUTION TRM 3.4.3 states (in part) that the temperature difference between pressurizer and spray fluid shall be less than or equal to 430°F.

1. OPERATE Pressurizer heaters and Pressurizer Spray Valve (CV-1008) per 1103.005, Pressurizer Operation, Normal Operation section, to maintain BOTH of the following:

RC Pressurizer Spray Line Temp (PMS T1028) above 450°F

Boron concentration within 50 ppm of RCS boron concentration.

2. At earliest available opportunity, CONTACT Systems and Component Engineering to evaluate the low bypass flow rate.

END

PAGE: 16 of 27 1203.015 PRESSURIZER SYSTEMS FAILURE CHANGE: 024

SECTION 6 -- PRESSURIZER SPRAY VALVE (CV-1008) FAILURE ENTRY CONDITIONS

One or more of the following:

CV-1008 closed when valve should be open.

Normal operation: Opens - 2205 psig Closes - 2155 psig

Power above 80% and MFP trip: Opens - 2080 psig Closes - 2030 psig

CV-1008 open when valve should be closed.

Abnormal change in RC pressure.

RCS pressure transmitter failure which is selected for RCS pressure control.

PAGE: 17 of 27 1203.015 PRESSURIZER SYSTEMS FAILURE CHANGE: 024

SECTION 6 -- PRESSURIZER SPRAY VALVE (CV-1008) FAILURE INSTRUCTIONS

1. IF Pressurizer Spray Valve (CV-1008) is failed open, THEN:

A. PLACE Pressurizer Spray Control Mode switch (HS-1003) in MAN.

B. ATTEMPT to close CV-1008 (modulating valve).

C. IF CV-1008 will NOT close, THEN:

1) CLOSE Pressurizer Spray Isolation Valve (CV-1009).

2) IF CRS/SM desires, THEN HOLD the handswitch in the desired position to override CV-1009 torque switch.

3) IF CV-1009 will NOT close AND time permits, THEN:

a. DISPATCH an operator to Pressurizer Spray Block CV-1009 (B5534).

b. ATTEMPT to close CV-1009 using local handswitch on breaker.

D. ENSURE Pressurizer heaters return RCS pressure to normal.

CAUTION TRM 3.4.3 states (in part) that the temperature difference between pressurizer and spray fluid shall be less than or equal to 430°F.

E. IF necessary to control RCS pressure and spray line temperature, THEN CYCLE Pressurizer Spray Isolation Valve (CV-1009) open and closed.

F. IF BOTH CV-1008 and CV-1009 fail to close AND RCS pressure is dropping, THEN:

1) ENSURE ALL PZR heaters ON.

2) BEGIN reducing load to 60-65% at rate determined by CRS (based on rate of pressure drop) per 1203.045, Rapid Plant Shutdown.

1. Continued on next page PAGE: 18 of 27 1203.015 PRESSURIZER SYSTEMS FAILURE CHANGE: 024

SECTION 6 -- PRESSURIZER SPRAY VALVE (CV-1008) FAILURE

1. (CONTINUED)

3) IF 4 RCPs are running AND BOTH of the following conditions are met:

Load is reduced to less than or equal to 675 MWe (less than or equal to 75% load)

Reactor power is less than or equal to 75%

THEN:

a) START one of the following:

C RCP HP Oil Lift Pump (P-63C)

C Emergency HP Oil Lift Pump (P-80C)

b) PLACE the pump not started in PULL-TO-LOCK:

C RCP HP Oil Lift Pump (P -63C)

C Emergency HP Oil Lift Pump (P -80C)

c) START BOTH of the following:

C RCP Backstop Lube Oil Pump (P -81C)

C Backup Backstop Lube Oil Pump (P -82C)

d) STOP P-32C.

e) WHEN zero speed is indicated, THEN ENSURE the following pumps in PULL-TO-LOCK:

P-63C

P-80C

P-81C

P-82C

1. Continued on next page PAGE: 19 of 27 1203.015 PRESSURIZER SYSTEMS FAILURE CHANGE: 024

SECTION 6 -- PRESSURIZER SPRAY VALVE (CV-1008) FAILURE

1. (CONTINUED)

NOTE In Modes 1 and 2, operation with only one RCP in each loop causes entry into TS 3.4.4 Condition A.

4) IF 3 RCPs running AND ALL of the following conditions are met:

Load is reduced to less than or equal to 360 MWe (less than or equal to 40% load)

Reactor power is less than or equal to 55%,

C and D RCPs are in service

THEN:

a) START one of the following:

C RCP HP Oil Lift Pump (P-63C)

C Emergency HP Oil Lift Pump (P-80C)

b) PLACE the pump not started in PULL-TO-LOCK:

C RCP HP Oil Lift Pump (P -63C)

C Emergency HP Oil Lift Pump (P-80C)

c) START BOTH of the following:

C RCP Backstop Lube Oil Pump (P -81C)

C Backup Backstop Lube Oil Pump (P -82C)

d) STOP P-32C.

e) WHEN zero speed is indicated, THEN ENSURE the following pumps in PULL-TO-LOCK:

P-63C

P-80C

P-81C

P-82C

f) ENTER TS 3.4.4 Condition A.

1. Continued on next page PAGE: 20 of 27 1203.015 PRESSURIZER SYSTEMS FAILURE CHANGE: 024

SECTION 6 -- PRESSURIZER SPRAY VALVE (CV-1008) FAILURE

1. (CONTINUED)

5) IF 3 RCPs running, AND D RCP is secured, THEN:

a) TRIP the Reactor.

b) SECURE P-32C as follows:

1) START one of the following:

C RCP HP Oil Lift Pump (P-63C)

C Emergency HP Oil Lift Pump (P-80C)

2) PLACE the pump not started in PULL-TO-LOCK:

C RCP HP Oil Lift Pump (P -63C)

C Emergency HP Oil Lift Pump (P -80C)

3) START both of the following:

C RCP Backstop Lube Oil Pump (P -81C)

C Backup Backstop Lube Oil Pump (P -82C)

4) STOP P-32C.

5) WHEN zero speed is indicated, THEN ENSURE the following pumps in PULL-TO-LOCK:

P-63C

P-80C

P-81C

P-82C

c) PERFORM 1202.001, Reactor Trip in conjunction with this procedure.

d) ENTER TS 3.4.5 Condition A.

6) WHEN conditions permit a Reactor Building entry, THEN ATTEMPT to manually close either CV-1008 or CV-1009.

G. CONTACT Senior Manager, Operations.

PAGE: 21 of 27 1203.015 PRESSURIZER SYSTEMS FAILURE CHANGE: 024

SECTION 6 -- PRESSURIZER SPRAY VALVE (CV-1008) FAILURE

2. IF Pressurizer Spray Valve (CV-1008) is failed closed, THEN:

A. MAINTAIN the plant at steady state conditions.

B. IF CV-1008 is energized, THEN:

1) PLACE Pressurizer Spray Control Mode switch (HS-1003) in MAN.

2) ATTEMPT to cycle CV-1008 (modulating valve) open and closed.

C. INITIATE a Condition Report to evaluate continued operation of the plant with inoperable Spray Valve.

D. CONTACT Senior Manager, Operations

E. CONSIDER ONE or BOTH of the following:

1) IF CV-1008 will NOT open, THEN COMMENCE a shutdown per 1102.016, Power Reduction and Plant Shutdown and 1102.010, Plant Shutdown and Cooldown.

a. During shutdown:

To prevent lifting of relief valves, REDUCE power slowly.

Manually CONTROL Pressurizer heaters to regulate RCS pressure.

2) WHEN conditions permit a reactor building entry, THEN:

a. At C04, CLOSE Pressurizer Spray Isolation Valve (CV-1009).

b. In RB, ATTEMPT to manually open CV-1008.

CAUTION TRM 3.4.3 states (in part) that the temperature difference between pressurizer and spray fluid shall be less than or equal to 430°F. Closing CV-1009 isolates CV-1008 bypass spray flow.

c. IF CV-1008 can be opened, THEN CYCLE CV-1009 open and closed to control RCS pressure and spray line temperature.

PAGE: 22 of 27 1203.015 PRESSURIZER SYSTEMS FAILURE CHANGE: 024

SECTION 6 -- PRESSURIZER SPRAY VALVE (CV-1008) FAILURE

3. IF an RCS pressure transmitter which is selected for control has failed or is failing, THEN GO TO 1203.012F, Annunciator K07 Corrective Action, SASS Mismatch (K07-B4) instructions.

4. REFER TO RCS Pressure, Temperature and Flow DNB Surveillance Limits of the ANO1 COLR (TS 3.4.1).

END

PAGE: 23 of 27 1203.015 PRESSURIZER SYSTEMS FAILURE CHANGE: 024

SECTION 7 -- LOSS OF ALL PRESSURIZER LEVEL INDICATION ENTRY CONDITIONS

One or more of the following:

Loss of all compensated PZR level indication as demonstrated by:

Loss of PZR Level Transmitter (LT-1001) indications including:

LRS-1001 on C04 LI-1001 on R08 outside MUT room PMS point T-CORR RC PZR LVL (L1001B)

SPDS point PZR Level Red Channel (LPZR1R)

If HS-1002 on C04 is selected to LT-1001, LI-1000 on the Dasey Panel Loss of PZR Level Transmitter (LT-1002) indications including:

LIS-1002 on C04 LI-1002 on R33 by FW Heater (E-1A)

PMS point T-CORR RC PRZR LVL (L1002B)

SPDS point PZR Level GRN Channel (LPZR1G)

If HS-1002 on C04 is selected to LT-1002, LI-1000 on the Dasey Panel

Loss of all uncompensated Pressurizer level indication as demonstrated by loss of the following SPDS points:

Pressurizer Level (L1001) (LT-1001)

Pressurizer Level (L1002) (LT-1002)

Level control functions not responding properly Pressurizer heaters level interlock malfunction Pressurizer Level Control (CV-1235) full open or full closed during steady state operations

Any of the following alarms in conjunction with multiple instrument problems:

PZR LEVEL LO LO (K09-A3)

PZR LEVEL HI HI (K09-B3)

PZR LEVEL LO (K09-C3)

PZR LEVEL HI (K09-D3)

RCS inventory change with no associated Pressurizer level change.

PAGE: 24 of 27 1203.015 PRESSURIZER SYSTEMS FAILURE CHANGE: 024

SECTION 7 -- LOSS OF ALL PRESSURIZER LEVEL INDICATION INSTRUCTIONS

1. PLACE Pressurizer Level Control (CV-1235) in HAND.

2. ADJUST makeup flow with CV-1235 to maintain the previous slope of Makeup Tank Level recorder (LR-1248).

3. CONTACT maintenance to attempt to restore any Pressurizer level indication possible.

4. REFER TO the following technical specifications:

Post Accident Monitoring (PAM) Instrumentation (TS 3.3.15) due to loss of PZR Level Indication (item #11)

RCS Pressure, Temperature and Flow DNB Surveillance Limits (TS 3.4.1)

Pressurizer (TS 3.4.9) due to inability to monitor for high PZR level

5. CONTACT Senior Manager, Operations.

CAUTION Pressurizer heater cutoff interlock at 55 in. is not functional if all Pressurizer level transmitters are failed. A reactor trip can uncover Pressurizer heaters.

6. Within one hour, COMMENCE a slow power reduction (approximately 10%/hr) per 1102.016, Power Reduction and Plant Shutdown, Power Reduction to 25% section.

7. IF Pressurizer heaters are interlocked off due to Pressurizer level failed low AND firing proportional heaters is needed for RCS pressure control, THEN:

A. IF in Modes 1-3, or Mode 4 with RCS temperature greater than 259°F, THEN:

1) ENTER TS 3.4.9, Condition C due to inability to energize Group 5 vital-powered heaters.

2) REFER TO 1103.005, Pressurizer Operation, Operability section).

B. ENSURE desired Proportional Pressurizer Heaters breaker(s) closed:

B5144

B6144

C. IF desired to energize Proportional Heater bank 1 (full firing),

THEN in LSEPR, PLACE proportional heater control switch in MAN on Pressurizer Heater SCR Cabinet #1.

D. IF desired to energize Proportional Heater bank 2 (full firing),

THEN in UNEPR, PLACE proportional heater control switch in MAN on Pressurizer Heater SCR Cabinet #2.

PAGE: 25 of 27 1203.015 PRESSURIZER SYSTEMS FAILURE CHANGE: 024

SECTION 7 -- LOSS OF ALL PRESSURIZER LEVEL INDICATION

8. MONITOR for indications of a low Pressurizer level.

9. IF a Pressurizer heater breaker trips OR PZR HEATER GROUND FAULT (K09-E3) alarms, THEN RAISE makeup flow at CV-1235 to raise Pressurizer level.

10 For any tripped breaker, REFER TO 1107.001, Electrical System Operations, Reclosing Tripped Individual Load Supply Breakers section.

11. MONITOR for indications of high Pressurizer level.

NOTE RCS pressure above saturation pressure for PZR temperature might indicate a solid Pressurizer. A rapid rise in RCS pressure without a corresponding rise in T-ave indicates a solid PZR.

12. IF RCS indicates solid condition, THEN REDUCE makeup flow and raise letdown flow until RC pressure starts to drop.

13. WHEN RC pressure returns to normal for PZR saturation conditions, THEN LOWER letdown flow to previous rate and RAISE makeup flow to slightly less than previous rate.

14. During power reduction, as T-ave is lowered from 579°F to 532°F, ADD boric acid and water at current RCS boron concentration in small batches to Makeup Tank as indicated by Attachment A, RCS Makeup Volume During Cooldown.

15. REFER TO Attachment B, Example Calculations for Adding Water to Makeup Tank.

16. RAISE makeup flow by opening CV-1235 to maintain Makeup Tank level fairly constant during additions.

17. WHEN conditions permit a Reactor Building entry, THEN DIRECT I&C to repair Pressurizer level instrument(s).

END

PAGE: 26 of 27 1203.015 PRESSURIZER SYSTEMS FAILURE CHANGE: 024

ATTACHMENT A RCS MAKEUP VOLUME DURING COOLDOWN 87

85 100 2000 GAL 83 185 2000 GAL 81 245 2000 GAL 79 295 2000 GAL 77 340 2000 GAL 75 385 2000 GAL 73 420 2000 GAL 71 455 2000 GAL 69 490 2000 GAL 67 520 2000 GAL 65 545 2000 GAL 63 565 1580 GAL 61 579

59 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 Tave (DEGREES F)

PAGE: 27 of 27 1203.015 PRESSURIZER SYSTEMS FAILURE CHANGE: 024

ATTACHMENT B PAGE 1 OF 1 EXAMPLE CALCULATIONS FOR ADDING WATER TO MAKEUP TANK

1.0 EXAMPLE 1: Reactor at Power, Tave = 579, Pressurizer level in normal range.

A. While cooling down from 579°F to 565°F, add 1580 gallons of water.

See Attachment A.

B. While cooling down from 565°F to 545°F, add 2000 gallons of water.

See Attachment A.

C. Continue cooling down and adding 2000 gallons of water between each of the following temperatures:

545 - 520 - 490 - 455 - 420 - 385 - 340 - 295 - 245 - 185 - 100

NOTE 2000 gallons of water is approximately equal to 84 inches of Pressurizer level. This would eliminate the danger of uncovering the heaters or going solid when starting from the normal range of the Pressurizer.

2.0 EXAMPLE 2: Reactor shut down, T-ave = 500, Pressurizer level in normal range.

A. While cooling down from 500°F to 490°F, add 700 gallons of water. See Attachment A.

B. Continue cooling down and adding 2000 gallons of water between each of the following temperatures:

490 - 455 - 420 - 385 - 340 - 295 - 245 - 185 - 100

Enclosure, Attachment 4

1CAN072401

ANO-1 Operating Procedure, OP-1107.003, Inverter and 120 Vital AC Distribution, Revision 035

For Information Only

Arkansas Nuclear One Safety Related Page 1 of 166

CONTINUOUS USE Rev. 035

1107.003 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Revision Summary Location Description of Changes

See 1000.006C form.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 2 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.0 PURPOSE AND SCOPE................................ ............................................................................. 6

2.0 REFERENCES

/COMMITMENTS ................................ ................................................................ 6

3.0 PRECAUTIONS AND LIMITATIONS................................................................ ........................... 8

4.0 SETPOINTS................................................................................................................................ 9

5.0 PREREQUISITES ....................................................................................................................... 9

6.0 INSTRUCTIONS FOR INVERTER Y11 OPERATION ............................................................... 10

6.1 Y11 Startup with RS1 Supplied from Inverter Y15 ................................ ......................... 10

6.2 Y11 Startup with RS1 Supplied from Y15 Alternate Source ................................ ........... 14

6.3 Y11 Startup with RS1 De-energized ................................ .............................................. 18

6.4 Y11 Shutdown with RS1 to Remain Energized from Y15 when Y15 is Supplying RS3 ............................................................................................................... 20

6.5 Inverter Y11 Shutdown with RS1 to Remain Energized from Y15 when Y15 is Idle ................................................................................................................................ 27

6.6 Y11 Shutdown with RS1 to Remain Energized from Y11 Alternate Source.................... 32

6.7 Y11 Shutdown with RS1 to be De-energized ................................................................. 34

6.8 Shifting RS1 Power from Y11 Inverter to Y11 Alternate Source ................................ ..... 35

6.9 Shifting RS1 Power from Y11 Alternate Source to Y11 Inverter ................................ ..... 36

6.10 Y11 Startup with RS1 Supplied from Y11 Alternate Source ................................ ........... 37

7.0 INSTRUCTIONS FOR INVERTER Y13 OPERATION ............................................................... 40

7.1 Y13 Startup with RS3 Supplied from Inverter Y15 ................................ ......................... 40

7.2 Y13 Startup with RS3 Supplied from Y15 Alternate Source ................................ ........... 44

7.3 Y13 Startup with RS3 De-energized ................................ .............................................. 47

7.4 Y13 Shutdown with RS3 to Remain Energized from Y15 when Y15 is Supplying RS1 ............................................................................................................... 50

7.5 Y13 Shutdown with RS3 to Remain Energized from Y15 when Y15 is Idle .................... 56

7.6 Y13 Shutdown with RS3 to Remain Energized from Y13 Alternate Source.................... 61

7.7 Y13 Shutdown with RS3 to be De-energized ................................................................. 63

7.8 Shifting RS3 Power from Y13 Inverter to Y13 Alternate Source ................................ ..... 64

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 3 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS

7.9 Shifting RS3 Power from Y13 Alternate Source to Y13 Inverter ................................ ..... 65

7.10 Y13 Startup with RS3 Supplied from Y13 Alternate Source ................................ ........... 66

8.0 INSTRUCTIONS FOR INVERTER Y15 OPERATION ............................................................... 69

8.1 Shifting RS1 (RS3) Power from Y15 Inverter to Y15 Alternate Source ........................... 69

8.2 Shifting RS1 (RS3) Power from Y15 Alternate Source to Y15 Inverter ........................... 70

8.3 Y15 Shutdown with RS1 (RS3) to Remain Energized from Y15 Alternate Source ........................................................................................................................... 71

9.0 INSTRUCTIONS FOR INVERTER Y22 OPERATION ............................................................... 73

9.1 Y22 Startup with RS2 Supplied from Inverter Y25 ......................................................... 73

9.2 Y22 Startup with RS2 Supplied from Y25 Alternate Source ................................ ........... 77

9.3 Y22 Startup with RS2 De-energized .............................................................................. 80

9.4 Y22 Shutdown with RS2 to Remain Energized from Y25 when Y25 is Supplying RS4 ............................................................................................................... 83

9.5 Y22 Shutdown with RS2 to Remain Energized from Y25 when Y25 is Idle .................... 89

9.6 Y22 Shutdown with RS2 to Remain Energized from Y22 Alternate Source.................... 94

9.7 Y22 Shutdown with RS2 to be De-energized ................................................................. 96

9.8 Shifting RS2 Power from Y22 Inverter to Y22 Alternate Source ................................ ..... 97

9.9 Shifting RS2 Power from Y22 Alternate Source to Y22 Inverter ................................ ..... 98

9.10 Y22 Startup with RS2 Supplied from Y22 Alternate Source ................................ ........... 99

10.0 INSTRUCTIONS FOR INVERTER Y24 OPERATION ............................................................. 102

10.1 Y24 Startup with RS4 Supplied from Inverter Y25 ....................................................... 102

10.2 Y24 Startup with RS4 Supplied from Y25 Alternate Source ................................ ......... 106

10.3 Y24 Startup with RS4 De-energized ............................................................................ 109

10.4 Y24 Shutdown with RS4 to Remain Energized from Inverter Y25 when Y25 is Supplying RS2 ............................................................................................................. 112

10.5 Y24 Shutdown with RS4 to Remain Energized from Y25 when Y25 is Idle .................. 118

10.6 Y24 Shutdown with RS4 to Remain Energized from Y24 Alternate Source.................. 123

10.7 Y24 Shutdown with RS4 to be De-energized ............................................................... 125

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 4 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS

10.8 Shifting RS4 Power from Y24 Inverter to Y24 Alternate Source ................................ ... 126

10.9 Shifting RS4 Power from Y24 Alternate Source to Y24 Inverter ................................ ... 127

10.10 Y24 Startup with RS4 Supplied from Y24 Alternate Source ................................ ......... 128

11.0 INSTRUCTIONS FOR INVERTER Y25 OPERATION ............................................................. 131

11.1 Shifting RS2 (RS4) Power from Y25 Inverter to Y25 Alternate Source ......................... 131

11.2 Shifting RS2 (RS4) Power from Y25 Alternate Source to Y25 Inverter ......................... 132

11.3 Y25 Shutdown with RS2 (RS4) to Remain Energized from Y25 Alternate Source ......................................................................................................................... 133

12.0 INSTRUCTIONS FOR INVERTER Y41 OPERATION ............................................................. 134

12.1 Inverter Y41 Startup .................................................................................................... 134

12.2 Y41 Shutdown with RC1 to Remain in Service ............................................................ 135

12.3 Shifting RC1 Power from Y41 Inverter to Y41 Alternate Source ................................ ... 136

12.4 Shifting RC1 Power from Y41 Alternate Source to Y41 Inverter ................................ ... 137

12.5 Y41 Startup with Alternate AC Source Unavailable ...................................................... 138

12.6 Aligning Alternate Source to Inverter Y41 with Inverter Supplying Load ....................... 139

13.0 INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTRUMENT AC PANEL (Y01/Y02) TRANSER OPERATIONS ........................................................................................................................ 140

13.1 Powering Y01 from Y02 Without Paralleling Power Sources ................................ ....... 140

13.2 Returning Y01 to Normal After Being Powered from Y02 Without Paralleling Power Sources ............................................................................................................ 141

13.3 Powering Y02 from Y01 Without Paralleling Power Sources ................................ ....... 142

13.4 Returning Y02 to Normal After Being Powered from Y01 Without Paralleling Power Sources ............................................................................................................ 143

13.5 Powering Y01 from Y02 by Paralleling Power Sources ................................ ................ 144

13.6 Returning Y01 to Normal After Being Powered from Y02 by Paralleling Power Sources ....................................................................................................................... 145

13.7 Powering Y02 from Y01 by Paralleling Power Sources ................................ ................ 147

13.8 Returning Y02 to Normal After Being Powered from Y01 by Paralleling Power Sources ....................................................................................................................... 148

14.0 C27 AND C28 POWER SUPPLY OPERATIONS ................................ .................................... 150 1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 5 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS

15.0 RECORDS ................................ .............................................................................................. 150

ATTACHMENTS

Attachment A - 120V Vital AC Distribution Panel Breaker Alignment .................................................. 151

Attachment B - Consequences for Loss of Power to C540 ................................ ................................. 152

EXHIBITS

Exhibit A - Panel RS1 ......................................................................................................................... 154

Exhibit B - Panel RS2 ......................................................................................................................... 155

Exhibit C - Panel RS3 ......................................................................................................................... 156

Exhibit D - Panel RS4 ......................................................................................................................... 157

Exhibit E - Panel Y01 ................................ .......................................................................................... 158

Exhibit F - Panel Y02 ................................ .......................................................................................... 160

Exhibit G - Panel Y03 ......................................................................................................................... 162

Exhibit H - Panel Y04 ................................ .......................................................................................... 163

Exhibit I - Panel RC1 ................................ .......................................................................................... 164

Exhibit K - Red Train Inverter One Line Diagram ................................ ................................................ 165

Exhibit L - Green Train Inverter One Line Diagram ............................................................................. 166

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 6 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

1.0 PURPOSE AND SCOPE

1. This procedure provides instructions for operating inverters and 120V vital AC distribution system.

2. This procedure applies to start up and shut down of the following systems. It also applies to switching of power supplies for these systems.

Inverters and their distribution panels:

Inverter (Y11)

Inverter (Y13)

Inverter (Y15)

Inverter (Y22)

Inverter (Y24)

Inverter (Y25)

Inverter (Y41)

120V vital AC power distribution panels:

Y01 Y02 Y03 Y04

Instrument power supplies in the following cabinets:

Balance of Plant Power Supplies (C27)

AUX Systems Relays (C28)

Instrument Power Supply (C45)

2.0 REFERENCES

/COMMITMENTS

2.1 Developmental References

1. 1107.001, Electrical System Operations

2. 120/208 Volt Instrument AC Panels (E-23)

3. Auxiliary Systems Miscellaneous Instruments (E-254)

4. Schematic Diagram Miscellaneous Instrumentation Power Supplies (E-330)

5. Elementary Wiring DC Power Distribution Plates (M204-153)

6. Elementary Wiring DC Power Accessory & Distribution Plates (M204-364)

7. Clarification of Inverter Operation (0CNA068704, IE-INFO-87-24)

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 7 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 2.1 (Continued)

8. Operational experience involving losses of electrical inverters NRC Information Notice 87-24 (0CNA068704)

9. Safety System Diagnostic Instrumentation (DCP 86-1006)

10. Dose Assessment System Upgrade (DCP 88-1012)

11. MFWP Trip Reduction (DCP 87-1048)

12. ICS Simplification (DCP 87-1070)

13. CR-ANO-C-1990-119-04, Caution De-energizing RI-8001

14. CR-ANO-1-1998-0692, Inverter cooling fan failure

15. CR-ANO-2-2000-0604 Blown fuses on in-service inverters

16. CR-ANO-2-2002-1138 Inverter alarm during startup

17. ER-ANO-2001-0437-003, Disable Normal 480 VAC Input to Y28

18. ER-ANO-2002-1090-000, Unit 1 EHC Improvements

19. CR-ANO-1-2008-00269, Inverter (Y-41) voltage concerns when Black Battery (D-45) is on equalizing charge

20. EC-11038, Upgrade Main Generator Voltage Regulator

21. EC-12880, Y28 "abandoned in place", power supply to C540A/B is now from Inverter supplying RS-2

22. EC-91931, ANO U1 Turbine Electronics Room Power Feed

23. EC-89300, Unit 1 Turbine Control System DEHC Upgrade Implement ation

2.2 Commitments

1. P 677, Include caution when opening breaker supplying control room radiation monitor that this will actuate control room isolation

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 8 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

3.0 PRECAUTIONS AND LIMITATIONS

1. The manual selector switch is aligned to Alternate Source To Load position for maintenance on the inverter.

2. Use of the manual selector switch requires the systems to be in sync due to the switch being make-before-break.

3. Mis-operation of inverter breakers can result in loss of power to systems such as RPS, ESAS, EFIC, and vital instrumentation.

4. When performing a live bus transfer of Y01 or Y02, power sources are confirmed in sync by the Electrical Department to prevent equipment damage or personnel injury.

5. Dead bus power transfer for Y01 or Y02 is only performed with the unit off line and the reactor shut down, since loss of Y01/Y02 can trip the plant.

6. Operating a breaker without knowing the consequences can result in a safety system actuation or other adverse effect.

7. Successful reclosing of a tripped breaker does not provide adequate basis for operability determination of the affected components.

8. After startup of a de-energized inverter, HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm can occur and this condition can exist from a few minutes to an hour depending on room temperature.

9. Placing Battery Charger (D-42) on equalize potentially exceeds the maximum input voltage rating of some loads connected to DC Bus (D-41) including Inverter (Y41) and Generator Voltage Regulator (E-01).

10. Improper inverter breaker/switch operation can result in loss of power to a vital 120V AC panel that could cause a plant trip or upset.

11. If Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp is lit, the load will remain on Alternate Source regardless of Manual selector Switch position.

12. If Manual Selector Switch is in Alternate Source position, the load remains on Alternate Source regardless of static switch position.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 9 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

4.0 SETPOINTS

NOTE Setpoints in Section 4.1 apply to the following:

RS1 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-A5)

RS3 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-B5)

RS2 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-A6)

RS4 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-B6)

4.1 Inverter Trouble Causes

Low DC Input Voltage

Hi DC Input Voltage

Low Inverter Voltage

Hi Inverter Voltage

Inverter Failure

Out of Sync

Fan Failure

Static Switch Transfer

Hi Temp

Alternate Source Trouble

Low System Voltage

Hi System Voltage

4.2 Y41 TROUBLE (K01-C5) Causes

Inverter failure

Transfer to alternate AC supply

Low output voltage

4.3 Instrument AC Panel alarms (Y01/Y02/Y03/Y04 LOSS OF VOLTAGE (K01-E5, K01-E6, K01-F5 and K01-F6)

Alarms at less than 80% of operating voltage

5.0 PREREQUISITES

1. None

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 10 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

6.0 INSTRUCTIONS FOR INVERTER Y11 OPERATION

6.1 Y11 Startup with RS1 Supplied from Inverter Y15

NOTE

RS1 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-A5) is expected during performance of this section.

Electrical Maintenance availability for assistance during inverter operation can be a callout situation as determined by the CRS/SM.

1. REQUEST CRS/SM confirm availability of Electrical Maintenance to address any component indication issues discovered during performance of this section.

2. IF a component indication is suspect, THEN NOTIFY CRS that Electrical Maintenance assistance is required.

3. At Inverter Y11, ENSURE the following breaker and switch positions:

DC Input breaker open

Inverter Output breaker open

Alt Source AC Input breaker open

Y11 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1122) in ALT SOURCE TO LOAD

RS1 Transfer Switch Y11S2 (HS-1123) in Y15 TO RS1

4. ENSURE DC Power Supply to Inverter Y11 (D01 -22A) breaker closed.

CAUTION Starting idle inverter with battery manual disconnect open or in-service battery charger on equalize could blow fuses on the on-line inverter.

5. ENSURE D07 Manual Disconnect Red (D-13) closed.

6. CHECK in-service Battery Charger for D01 (D-03A/B) on float.

7. CLOSE Y11 DC Input breaker.

8. WAIT 60 seconds for inverter to stabilize.

9. CHECK Y11 Frequency Output (E1) 59.7 to 60.3 hertz.

10. CLOSE Y11 Alt Source AC Input breaker.

11. CHECK Y11 120VAC Alt Source (V3) 118 to 130 volts.

12. CHECK Y11 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 11 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 6.1 (Continued)

NOTE Y11 Static Transfer Switch can automatically shift from Alternate Source Supplying Load to Inverter Supplying Load 30 seconds after inverter output breaker is closed.

13. CLOSE Y11 Inverter Output breaker.

14. WAIT 60 seconds for inverter to stabilize.

15. IF Inverter Supplying Load green lamp is lit (static switch transferred),

THEN DEPRESS Y11 Alt Source To Load (PB-1101).

16. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

17. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

18. Checking Y11 inverter output voltage:

a. CHECK Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

b. PLACE Y11 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1122) to NORMAL SOURCE TO LOAD.

c. DEPRESS Y11 Inverter To Load (PB-1100).

d. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp lit.

e. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp off.

f. CHECK Y11 120VAC Output (V2) 118 to 130 volts.

19. Aligning Y11 to Alternate Source:

a. CHECK Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

b. DEPRESS Y11 Alt Source To Load (PB-1101).

c. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

d. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

e. PLACE Y11 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1122) to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 12 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 6.1 (Continued)

20. Aligning Y15 to Alternate Source:

a. ENSURE TS or administrative time clock applicable for the current mode or condition has been entered as follows:

1) IF Unit is in Modes 1-4 AND ALL other RS buses are energized from operable inverters, THEN APPLY 2-hour administrative time clock per TS 3.8.7.

2) IF 2-hour administrative time clock per TS 3.8.7 does NOT apply in Modes 1-4, THEN ENSURE compliance with TS 3.8.7, Condition A or C.

3) IF unit is in Mode 5, 6 or during movement of irradiated fuel assemblies AND ANY TS component powered from RS1 is required by TS 3.8.10, THEN ENSURE compliance with TS 3.8.8, Condition A.

b. IF transfer of RS1 to Inverter Y11 is delayed OR RS1 will remain powered from Alternate Source for any reason, THEN NOTIFY CRS/SM.

c. CHECK Y15 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

d. CHECK Y15 Frequency Output (E1) 59.7 to 60.3 hertz.

e. DEPRESS Y15 Alt Source To Load (PB-1105).

f. CHECK Y15 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

g. CHECK Y15 Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

h. PLACE Y15 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1126) to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD.

21. Transferring RS1 to Y11 Alternate Source:

a. At Y11, PLACE Y11/15 Sync Disc toggle switch (HS-1134) to ON.

b. CHECK Y11 In Sync With Swing Inverter green lamp lit.

c. PLACE Y11 RS1 Transfer Switch Y11S2 (HS-1123) to Y11 TO RS1.

d. PLACE Y11/15 Sync Disc toggle switch (HS-1134) to OFF.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 13 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 6.1 (Continued)

NOTE RS1 remains on Alt Source until Y11 Inverter To Load (PB-1100) is depressed.

22. Transferring RS1 to Y11 Inverter:

a. CHECK Y11 Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

b. CHECK Y11 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

c. PLACE Y11 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1122) to NORMAL SOURCE TO LOAD.

d. DEPRESS Y11 Inverter To Load (PB-1100).

e. CHECK Y11 Inverter Supplying Load green lamp lit.

f. CHECK Y11 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp off.

g. CHECK Y11 120VAC Output (V2) 118 to 130 volts.

NOTE After startup of a de-energized inverter, HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm can occur. This condition can exist from a few minutes to several hours depending on room temperature and inverter load.

h. OBSERVE Y11 alarm panel (K1620) status is ONE of the following:

ALL alarms are clear

ONLY HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm is in

i. IF another alarm condition exists, THEN NOTIFY the CRS of the condition.

j. NOTIFY Control Room that transfer is complete and time clocks entered for RS1 on Alternate Source can be exited.

k. REQUEST CRS update risk management software for Inverter alignment.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 14 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 6.1 (Continued)

NOTE

Idle inverters are typically shut down to minimize extra heat generation in the room.

It is permissible for idle inverters to remain energized for maintenance activities.

23. IF CRS directs to shutdown Inverter Y15, THEN:

a. OPEN Y15 Alt Source AC Input breaker.

b. OPEN Y15 Inverter Output breaker.

c. OPEN Y15 DC Input breaker.

24. RESET Y11 local alarm panel (K1620).

25. OBSERVE RS1 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-A5) alarm clears.

6.2 Y11 Startup with RS1 Supplied from Y15 Alternate Source

NOTE

RS1 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-A5) is expected during performance of this section.

Electrical Maintenance availability for assistance during inverter operation can be a callout situation as determined by the CRS/SM.

1. REQUEST CRS/SM confirm availability of Electrical Maintenance to address any component indication issues discovered during performance of this section.

2. IF a component indication is suspect, THEN NOTIFY CRS that Electrical Maintenance assistance is required.

3. CHECK Inverter Y15 on Alternate Source:

Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit

Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off

Y15 S1 Manual Selector SW (HS-1126) selected to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD

4. At Inverter Y11, ENSURE the following breaker and switch positions:

DC Input breaker open

Inverter Output breaker open

Alt Source AC Input breaker open

Inverter Y11 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1122) in ALT SOURCE TO LOAD

RS1 Transfer switch Y11S2 (HS-1123) in Y15 TO RS1

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 15 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 6.2 (Continued)

5. ENSURE DC Power Supply to Inverter Y11 (D01 -22A) breaker closed.

CAUTION Starting idle inverter with battery manual disconnect open or in-service battery charger on equalize could blow fuses on the on-line inverter.

6. ENSURE Battery D07 Manual Disconnect Red (D-13) closed.

7. CHECK in-service Battery Charger for D01 (D-03A/B) on float.

8. CLOSE Y11 DC Input breaker.

9. WAIT 60 seconds for inverter to stabilize.

10. CHECK Y11 Frequency Output (E1) 59.7 to 60.3 hertz.

11. CLOSE Y11 Alt Source AC Input breaker.

12. CHECK Y11 120VAC Alt Source (V3) 118 to 130 volts.

13. CHECK Y11 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

NOTE Y11 Static Transfer Switch can automatically shift from Alternate Source Supplying Load to Inverter Supplying Load 30 seconds after inverter output breaker is closed.

14. CLOSE Y11 Inverter Output breaker.

15. WAIT 60 seconds for inverter to stabilize.

16. IF Inverter Supplying Load green lamp is lit (static switch transferred),

THEN DEPRESS Y11 Alt Source To Load (PB-1101).

17. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

18. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 16 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 6.2 (Continued)

19. Checking Y11 output voltage:

a. CHECK Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

b. PLACE Y11 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1122) to NORMAL SOURCE TO LOAD.

c. DEPRESS Y11 Inverter To Load (PB-1100).

d. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp lit.

e. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp off.

f. CHECK Y11 120VAC Output (V2) 118 to 130 volts.

20. Aligning Y11 to Alternate Source:

a. CHECK Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

b. DEPRESS Y11 Alt Source To Load (PB-1101).

c. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

d. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

e. PLACE Y11 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1122) to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD.

21. Transferring RS1 from Y15 to Y11 Alternate Source:

a. PLACE Y11/15 Sync Disc toggle switch (HS-1134) to ON.

b. CHECK Y11 In Sync With Swing Inverter green lamp lit.

c. PLACE Y11 RS1 Transfer Switch Y11S2 (HS-1123) to Y11 TO RS1.

d. PLACE Y11/15 Sync Disc toggle switch (HS-1134) to OFF.

22. Transferring RS1 from Y11 Alternate Source to Y11 Inverter:

a. CHECK Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

b. PLACE Y11 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1122) to NORMAL SOURCE TO LOAD.

c. DEPRESS Y11 Inverter To Load (PB-1100).

d. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp lit.

e. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp off.

f. CHECK Y11 120VAC Output (V2) 118 to 130 volts.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 17 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 6.2 Step 22 (Continued)

NOTE After startup of a de-energized inverter, HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm can occur. This condition can exist from a few minutes to several hours depending on room temperature and inverter load.

g. OBSERVE Y11 alarm panel (K1620) status is ONE of the following:

ALL alarms are clear

ONLY HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm is in

h. IF another alarm condition exists, THEN NOTIFY the CRS of the condition.

i. NOTIFY Control Room that transfer is complete and time clocks entered for RS1 on Alternate Source can be exited.

j. REQUEST CRS update risk management software for Inverter alignment.

NOTE

Idle inverters are typically shut down to minimize extra heat generation in the room.

It is permissible for idle inverters to remain energized for maintenance activities.

23. IF CRS directs to shutdown Inverter Y15, THEN:

a. OPEN Y15 Alt Source AC Input breaker.

b. OPEN Y15 Inverter Output breaker.

c. OPEN Y15 DC Input breaker.

24. RESET Y11 local alarm panel (K1620).

25. OBSERVE RS1 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-A5) alarm clears.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 18 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

6.3 Y11 Startup with RS1 De-energized

NOTE

RS1 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-A5) is expected to reflash during performance of this section.

Electrical Maintenance availability for assistance during inverter operation can be a callout situation as determined by the CRS/SM.

1. REQUEST CRS/SM confirm availability of Electrical Maintenance to address any component indication issues discovered during performance of this section.

2. IF a component indication is suspect, THEN NOTIFY CRS that Electrical Maintenance assistance is required.

3. At Inverter Y11, ENSURE the following breaker and switch positions:

DC Input breaker open

Inverter Output breaker open

Alt Source AC Input breaker open

Inverter Y11 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1122) in ALT SOURCE TO LOAD

RS1 Transfer Switch Y11S2 (HS-1123) in Y11 TO RS1

4. ENSURE DC Power Supply to Inverter Y11 (D01 -22A) breaker closed.

CAUTION Starting idle inverter with battery manual disconnect open or in-service battery charger on equalize could blow fuses on the on-line inverter.

5. ENSURE Battery D07 Manual Disconnect Red (D-13) closed.

6. CHECK in-service Battery Charger for D01 (D-03A/B) on float.

7. CLOSE Y11 DC Input breaker.

8. WAIT 60 seconds for inverter to stabilize.

9. CHECK Y11 Frequency Output (E1) 59.7 to 60.3 hertz.

10. CLOSE Y11 Alt Source AC Input breaker to energize RS1.

11. CHECK Y11 120VAC Alt Source (V3) 118 to 130 volts.

12. CHECK Y11 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 19 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 6.3 (Continued)

NOTE Y11 static transfer switch can automatically shift from Alternate Source Supplying Load to Inverter Supplying Load 30 seconds after inverter output breaker is closed.

13. CLOSE Y11 Inverter Output breaker.

14. WAIT 60 seconds for inverter to stabilize.

15. IF Inverter Supplying Load green lamp is lit (static switch transferred),

THEN DEPRESS Y11 Alt Source To Load (PB-1101).

16. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

17. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

18. Transferring RS1 from Alternate Source to Y11 Inverter:

a. CHECK Y11 Frequency Output (E1) 59.7 to 60.3 hertz.

b. CHECK Inverter Y11 UNIT IN SYNC green lamp lit.

c. PLACE Y11 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1122) to NORMAL SOURCE TO LOAD.

d. DEPRESS Y11 Inverter To Load (PB-1100).

e. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp lit.

f. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp off.

g. CHECK Y11 120VAC Output (V2) 118 to 130 volts.

NOTE After startup of a de-energized inverter, HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm can occur. This condition can exist from a few minutes to several hours depending on room temperature and inverter load.

h. OBSERVE Y11 alarm panel (K1620) alarm status is ONE of the following:

ALL alarms are clear

ONLY HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm is in

i. IF another alarm condition exists, THEN NOTIFY the CRS of the condition.

j. NOTIFY Control Room that transfer is complete and time clocks entered for RS1 de-energized can be exited.

k. REQUEST CRS update risk management software for Inverter alignment.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 20 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 6.3 (Continued)

19. RESET Y11 local alarm panel (K1620).

20. OBSERVE RS1 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-A5) alarm clears.

6.4 Y11 Shutdown with RS1 to Remain Energized from Y15 when Y15 is Supplying RS3

NOTE

RS1 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-A5) and RS3 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-B5) are expected during performance of this section.

Electrical Maintenance availability for assistance during inverter operation can be a callout situation as determined by the CRS/SM.

1. Initial Conditions

CHECK Inverter Y13 is idle.

CHECK Inverter Y15 is supplying RS3.

CHECK Inverter Y11 is supplying RS1.

2. REQUEST CRS/SM confirm availability of Electrical Maintenance to address any component indication issues discovered during performance of this section.

3. IF a component indication is suspect, THEN NOTIFY CRS that Electrical Maintenance assistance is required.

4. At Inverter Y13, ENSURE the following breaker and switch positions:

DC Input breaker open

Inverter Output breaker open

Alt Source AC Input breaker open

Y13 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1124) in ALT SOURCE TO LOAD

RS3 Transfer switch Y13 S2 (HS-1125) in Y15 TO RS3

5. ENSURE DC Power Supply to Inverter Y13 (D01 -52B) closed.

CAUTION Starting idle inverter with battery manual disconnect open or in-service battery charger on equalize could blow fuses on the on-line inverter.

6. ENSURE D07 Manual Disconnect Red (D-13) closed.

7. CHECK in-service Battery Charger for D01 (D-03A/B) on float.

8. CLOSE Y13 DC Input breaker.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 21 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 6.4 (Continued)

9. WAIT 60 seconds for inverter to stabilize.

10. CHECK Y13 Frequency Output (E1) 59.7 to 60.3 hertz.

11. CLOSE Y13 Alt Source AC Input breaker.

12. CHECK Y13 120VAC Alt Source (V3) 118 to 130 volts.

13. CHECK Y13 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

NOTE Y13 Static Transfer Switch can automatically shift from Alternate Source Supplying Load to Inverter Supplying Load 30 seconds after inverter output breaker is closed.

14. CLOSE Y13 Inverter Output breaker.

15. WAIT 60 seconds for inverter to stabilize.

16. IF Inverter Supplying Load green lamp is lit (static switch transferred),

THEN DEPRESS Y13 Alt Source To Load (PB-1103).

17. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

18. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

19. Checking Y13 inverter output voltage:

a. CHECK Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

b. PLACE Y13 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1124) to NORMAL SOURCE TO LOAD.

c. DEPRESS Y13 Inverter To Load (PB-1102).

d. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp lit.

e. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp off.

f. CHECK Y13 120VAC Output (V2) 118 to 130 volts.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 22 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 6.4 (Continued)

20. Aligning Y13 to Alternate Source:

a. CHECK Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

b. DEPRESS Y13 Alt Source To Load (PB-1103).

c. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

d. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

e. PLACE Y13 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1124) to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD.

21. Aligning Y15 to Alternate Source:

a. ENSURE TS or administrative time clock applicable for the current mode or condition has been entered as follows:

1) IF Unit is in Modes 1-4 AND ALL other RS buses are energized from operable inverters, THEN APPLY 2-hour administrative time clock per TS 3.8.7.

2) IF 2-hour administrative time clock per TS 3.8.7 does NOT apply in Modes 1-4, THEN ENSURE compliance with TS 3.8.7, Condition A or C.

3) IF unit is in Mode 5, 6 or during movement of irradiated fuel assemblies AND ANY TS component powered from RS3 is required by TS 3.8.10, THEN ENSURE compliance with TS 3.8.8, Condition A.

b. IF transfer of RS3 to Inverter Y13 is delayed OR RS3 will remain powered from Alternate Source for any reason, THEN NOTIFY CRS/SM.

c. CHECK Y15 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

d. CHECK Y15 Frequency Output (E1) 59.7 to 60.3 hertz.

e. DEPRESS Y15 Alt Source To Load (PB-1105).

f. CHECK Y15 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

g. CHECK Y15 Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

h. PLACE Y15 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1126) to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 23 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 6.4 (Continued)

22. Transferring RS3 to Y13 Alternate Source:

a. At Y13, PLACE Y13/15 Sync Disc toggle switch (HS-1135) to ON.

b. CHECK Y13 In Sync With Swing Inverter green lamp lit.

c. PLACE Y13 RS3 Transfer Switch (HS-1125) to Y13 TO RS3.

d. PLACE Y13/15 Sync Disc toggle switch (HS-1135) to OFF.

23. IF transferring RS3 from Alt Source to Y13 Inverter, THEN:

a. CHECK Y13 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

b. PLACE Y13 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1124) to NORMAL SOURCE TO LOAD.

c. DEPRESS Y13 Inverter To Load (PB-1102).

d. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp lit.

e. CHECK Y13 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp off.

f. CHECK Y13 120VAC Output (V2) 118 to 130 volts.

NOTE After startup of a de-energized inverter, HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm can occur. This condition can exist from a few minutes to several hours depending on room temperature and inverter load.

g. OBSERVE Y13 alarm panel (K1621) alarm status is ONE of the following:

ALL alarms are clear

ONLY HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm is in

h. IF another alarm condition exists, THEN NOTIFY the CRS of the condition.

i. NOTIFY Control Room that transfer is complete and time clocks entered for RS3 on Alternate Source can be exited.

j. REQUEST CRS update risk management software for Inverter alignment.

24. While continuing with this section, to clear alarms on Y13:

a. RESET Y13 local alarm panel (K1621).

b. OBSERVE RS3 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-B5) alarm clears.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 24 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 6.4 (Continued)

25. IF RS1 is on Y11 ALTERNATE Source, THEN CHECK the following:

Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit

Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off

Y11 S1 Manual Selector SW (HS-1122) selected to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD

26. IF RS1 is on Y11 INVERTER Source, THEN to transfer RS1 to Y11 Alternate Source:

a. ENSURE TS or administrative time clock applicable for the current mode or condition has been entered as follows:

1) IF Unit is in Modes 1-4 AND ALL other RS buses are energized from operable inverters, THEN APPLY 2-hour administrative time clock per TS 3.8.7.

2) IF 2-hour administrative time clock per TS 3.8.7 does NOT apply in Modes 1-4, THEN ENSURE compliance with TS 3.8.7, Condition A or C.

3) IF unit is in Mode 5, 6 or during movement of irradiated fuel assemblies AND ANY TS component powered from RS1 is required by TS 3.8.10, THEN ENSURE compliance with TS 3.8.8, Condition A.

b. IF transfer of RS1 to Inverter Y15 is delayed OR RS1 will remain on Alternate Source for any reason, THEN NOTIFY CRS/SM.

c. CHECK Y11 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

d. CHECK Y11 Frequency Output (E1) 59.7 to 60.3 hertz.

e. DEPRESS Y11 Alt Source To Load (PB-1101).

f. CHECK Y11 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

g. CHECK Y11 Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

h. PLACE Y11 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1122) to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 25 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 6.4 (Continued)

27. Transferring RS1 to Y15 Alternate Source:

a. PLACE Y15 Output Transfer Sw (HS-1127) to SYSTEM OUTPUT TO Y11.

b. At Y11, PLACE Y11/15 Sync Disc toggle switch (HS-1134) to ON.

c. IF DC power is available to Y11, THEN CHECK Y11 In Sync With Swing Inverter green lamp lit.

d. At Y11, PLACE RS1 Transfer switch Y11S2 (HS-1123) to Y15 to RS1.

e. PLACE Y11/15 Sync Disc toggle switch (HS-1134) to OFF.

NOTE

Idle inverters are typically shut down to minimize extra heat generation in the room.

It is permissible for idle inverters to remain energized for maintenance activities.

28. IF RS1 is to remain on Y15 Alternate Source AND CRS directs to shutdown inverter Y11, THEN:

a. OPEN Y11 Alt Source AC Input breaker.

b. OPEN Y11 Inverter Output breaker.

c. OPEN Y11 DC Input breaker.

d. EXIT this section.

29. Transferring RS1 to Y15 inverter:

a. CHECK Y15 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

b. CHECK Y15 Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

c. CHECK Y15 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

d. PLACE Y15 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1126) to NORMAL SOURCE TO LOAD.

e. DEPRESS Y15 Inverter To Load (PB-1104).

f. CHECK Y15 Inverter Supplying Load green lamp lit.

g. CHECK Y15 Alt Source Supplying Load lamp off.

h. CHECK Y15 120VAC Output (V2) 118 to 130 volts.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 26 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 6.4 Step 29 (Continued)

NOTE After startup of a de-energized inverter, HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm can occur. This condition can exist from a few minutes to several hours depending on room temperature and inverter load.

i. At alarm panel (K1654), OBSERVE alarm status is ONE of the following:

ALL alarms are clear

ONLY HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm is in

j. IF another alarm condition exists, THEN NOTIFY the CRS of the condition.

k. NOTIFY Control Room that transfer is complete and any time clocks entered for RS1 on Alternate Source can be exited.

l. REQUEST CRS update risk management software for Inverter alignment.

NOTE

Idle inverters are typically shut down to minimize extra heat generation in the room.

It is permissible for idle inverters to remain energized for maintenance activities.

30. IF CRS directs to shutdown Inverter Y11, THEN:

a. OPEN Y11 Alt Source AC Input breaker.

b. OPEN Y11 Inverter Output breaker.

c. OPEN Y11 DC Input breaker.

NOTE HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm, if temperature induced, typically clears within 2 hours2.314815e-5 days 5.555556e-4 hours 3.306878e-6 weeks 7.61e-7 months .

31. RESET Y15 local alarm panel (K1654).

32. OBSERVE RS1 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-A5) alarm clears.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 27 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

6.5 Inverter Y11 Shutdown with RS1 to Remain Energized from Y15 when Y15 is Idle

NOTE

RS1 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-A5) is expected during performance of this section.

Electrical Maintenance availability for assistance during inverter operation can be a callout situation as determined by the CRS/SM.

1. REQUEST CRS/SM confirm availability of Electrical Maintenance to address any component indication issues discovered during performance of this section.

2. IF a component indication is suspect, THEN NOTIFY CRS that Electrical Maintenance assistance is required.

3. At Y15, ENSURE the following breaker and switch positions:

DC Input breaker open

Inverter Output breaker open

Alt Source AC Input breaker open

Y15 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1126) in ALT SOURCE TO LOAD

Y15 Output Transfer Switch (HS -1127) in SYSTEM OUTPUT TO Y11

4. ENSURE DC Power Supply to Inverter Y15 (D01 -53A) breaker closed.

CAUTION Starting idle inverter with battery manual disconnect open or in-service battery charger on equalize could blow fuses on the on-line inverter.

5. ENSURE D07 Manual Disconnect Red (D-13) closed.

6. CHECK in-service Battery Charger for D01 (D-03A/B) on float.

7. CLOSE Y15 DC Input breaker.

8. WAIT 60 seconds for inverter to stabilize.

9. CHECK Y15 Frequency Output (E1) 59.7 to 60.3 hertz.

10. CLOSE Y15 Alt Source AC Input breaker.

11. CHECK Y15 120VAC Alt Source (V3) 118 to 130 volts.

12. CHECK Y15 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 28 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 6.5 (Continued)

NOTE Y15 Static Transfer Switch can automatically shift from Alternate Source Supplying Load to Inverter Supplying Load 30 seconds after inverter output breaker is closed.

13. CLOSE Y15 Inverter Output breaker.

14. WAIT 60 seconds for inverter to stabilize.

15. IF Inverter Supplying Load green lamp is lit (static switch transferred),

THEN DEPRESS Y15 Alt Source To Load (PB-1105).

16. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

17. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

18. Checking Y15 inverter output voltage:

a. CHECK Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

b. PLACE Y15 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1126) to NORMAL SOURCE TO LOAD.

c. DEPRESS Y15 Inverter To Load (PB-1104).

d. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp lit.

e. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp off.

f. CHECK Y15 120VAC Output (V2) 118 to 130 volts.

19. Aligning Y15 to Alternate Source:

a. CHECK Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

b. DEPRESS Y15 Alt Source To Load (PB-1105).

c. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

d. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

e. PLACE Y15 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1126) to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD.

20. IF RS1 is on Y11 ALTERNATE Source, THEN CHECK the following:

Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit

Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off

Y11 S1 Manual Selector SW (HS-1122) selected to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 29 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 6.5 (Continued)

21. IF RS1 is on Y11 INVERTER Source, THEN to transfer RS1 to Y11 Alternate Source:

a. ENSURE TS or administrative time clock applicable for the current mode or condition has been entered as follows:

1) IF Unit is in Modes 1-4 AND ALL other RS buses are energized from operable inverters, THEN APPLY 2-hour administrative time clock per TS 3.8.7.

2) IF 2-hour administrative time clock per TS 3.8.7 does NOT apply in Modes 1-4, THEN ENSURE compliance with TS 3.8.7, Condition A or C.

3) IF unit is in Mode 5, 6 or during movement of irradiated fuel assemblies AND ANY TS component powered from RS1 is required by TS 3.8.10, THEN ENSURE compliance with TS 3.8.8, Condition A.

b. CHECK Y11 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

c. CHECK Y11 Frequency Output (E1) 59.7 to 60.3 hertz.

d. DEPRESS Y11 Alt Source To Load (PB-1101).

e. CHECK Y11 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

f. CHECK Y11 Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

g. PLACE Y11 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1122) to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD.

22. Transferring RS1 to Y15 Alternate Source:

a. IF transfer of RS1 to Inverter Y15 is delayed OR RS1 will remain on Alternate Source for any reason, THEN NOTIFY CRS/SM.

b. PLACE Y11/15 Sync Disc toggle switch (HS-1134) to ON.

c. CHECK Y11 In Sync With Swing Inverter green lamp lit.

d. PLACE Y11 RS1 Transfer Switch (HS-1123) to Y15 to RS1.

e. PLACE Y11/15 Sync Disc toggle switch (HS-1134) to OFF.

f. CHECK Y15 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 30 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 6.5 (Continued)

NOTE

Idle inverters are typically shut down to minimize extra heat generation in the room.

It is permissible for idle inverters to remain energized for maintenance activities.

23. IF RS1 is to remain on Y15 Alternate Source AND CRS directs to shutdown Inverter Y11, THEN:

a. OPEN Y11 Alt Source AC Input breaker.

b. OPEN Y11 Inverter Output breaker.

c. OPEN Y11 DC Input breaker.

d. EXIT this section.

24. Transferring RS1 to Y15 inverter:

a. CHECK Y15 Inverter Supplying Load lamp off.

b. CHECK Y15 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

c. PLACE Y15 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1126) to NORMAL SOURCE TO LOAD.

d. DEPRESS Y15 Inverter To Load (PB-1104).

e. CHECK Y15 Inverter Supplying Load green lamp lit.

f. CHECK Y15 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp off.

g. CHECK Y15 120VAC Output (V2) 118 to 130 volts.

NOTE After startup of a de-energized inverter, HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm can occur. This condition can exist from a few minutes to several hours depending on room temperature and inverter load.

h. OBSERVE Y15 alarm panel (K1654) status is ONE of the following:

ALL alarms are clear

ONLY HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm is in

i. IF another alarm condition exists, THEN NOTIFY the CRS of the condition.

j. NOTIFY Control Room that transfer is complete and time clocks entered for RS1 on Alternate Source can be exited.

k. REQUEST CRS update risk management software for Inverter alignment.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 31 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 6.5 (Continued)

NOTE

Idle inverters are typically shut down to minimize extra heat generation in the room.

It is permissible for idle inverters to remain energized for maintenance activities.

25. IF CRS directs to shutdown Inverter Y11, THEN:

a. OPEN Y11 Alt Source AC Input breaker.

b. OPEN Y11 Inverter Output breaker.

c. OPEN Y11 DC Input breaker.

26. RESET Y15 local alarm panel (K1654).

27. OBSERVE RS1 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-A5) alarm clears.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 32 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

6.6 Y11 Shutdown with RS1 to Remain Energized from Y11 Alternate Source

NOTE

Steps in this section are expected to alarm RS1 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-A5).

Electrical Maintenance availability for assistance during inverter operation can be a callout situation as determined by the CRS/SM.

1. REQUEST CRS/SM confirm availability of Electrical Maintenance to address any component indication issues discovered during performance of this section.

2. IF a component indication is suspect, THEN NOTIFY CRS that Electrical Maintenance assistance is required.

3. ENSURE TS or administrative time clock applicable for the current mode or condition has been entered as follows:

a. IF ALL of the following apply:

Unit is in Modes 1-4

ALL other RS buses are energized from operable inverters

RS1 will be supplied by Y11 on Alternate source for a short period of time

THEN APPLY 2-hour administrative time clock per TS 3.8.7.

b. IF 2-hour administrative time clock per TS 3.8.7 does NOT apply in Modes 1-4, THEN ENSURE compliance with TS 3.8.7, Condition A or C.

c. IF unit is in Mode 5, 6 or during movement of irradiated fuel assemblies AND ANY TS component powered from RS1 is required by TS 3.8.10, THEN ENSURE compliance with TS 3.8.8, Condition A.

4. IF RS1 is already on Y11 ALTERNATE Source, THEN CHECK the following:

Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit

Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off

Y11 S1 Manual Selector SW (HS-1122) selected to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 33 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 6.6 (Continued)

5. IF RS1 is on Y11 INVERTER Source, THEN to transfer RS1 to Y11 Alternate Source:

a. CHECK Y11 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

b. CHECK Y11 Frequency Output (E1) 59.7 to 60.3 hertz.

c. DEPRESS Y11 Alt Source To Load (PB-1101).

d. CHECK Y11 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

e. CHECK Y11 Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

f. PLACE Y11 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1122) to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD.

NOTE

Idle inverters are typically shut down to minimize extra heat generation in the room.

It is permissible for idle inverters to remain energized for maintenance activities.

6. IF CRS directs to shutdown Y11 inverter, THEN:

a. OPEN Y11 Inverter Output breaker.

b. OPEN Y11 DC Input breaker.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 34 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

6.7 Y11 Shutdown with RS1 to be De-energized

NOTE

Steps in this section are expected to alarm RS1 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-A5).

Electrical Maintenance availability for assistance during inverter operation can be a callout situation as determined by the CRS/SM.

1. REQUEST CRS/SM confirm availability of Electrical Maintenance to address any component indication issues discovered during performance of this section.

2. IF a component indication is suspect, THEN NOTIFY CRS that Electrical Maintenance assistance is required.

3. ENSURE applicable TS Condition for de-energizing RS1 entered as follows:

a. IF unit is in Modes 1-4, THEN REFER TO TS 3.8.9, Condition B.

b. IF unit is in Mode 5, 6 or during movement of irradiated fuel AND any required TS component is being supplied by RS1, THEN REFER TO TS 3.8.10.

4. IF RS1 is already on Y11 ALTERNATE Source, THEN CHECK the following:

Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit

Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off

Y11 S1 Manual Selector SW (HS-1122) selected to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD

5. IF RS1 is on Y11 INVERTER Source, THEN TRANSFER RS1 to Y11 Alternate Source as follows:

a. CHECK Y11 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

b. CHECK Y11 Frequency Output (E1) 59.7 to 60.3 hertz.

c. DEPRESS Y11 Alt Source To Load (PB-1101).

d. CHECK Y11 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

e. CHECK Y11 Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

f. PLACE Y11 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1122) to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD.

6. OPEN Y11 Alt Source AC Input breaker.

7. OPEN Y11 Inverter Output breaker.

8. OPEN Y11 DC Input breaker.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 35 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

6.8 Shifting RS1 Power from Y11 Inverter to Y11 Alternate Source

NOTE

Steps in this section are expected to alarm RS1 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-A5).

Electrical Maintenance availability for assistance during inverter operation can be a callout situation as determined by the CRS/SM.

1. REQUEST CRS/SM confirm availability of Electrical Maintenance to address any component indication issues discovered during performance of this section.

2. IF a component indication is suspect, THEN NOTIFY CRS that Electrical Maintenance assistance is required.

3. CHECK Y11 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

4. CHECK Y11 Frequency Output (E1) 59.7 to 60.3 hertz.

5. ENSURE TS Condition applicable for the current mode or condition for powering RS1 from Alternate Source has been entered as follows:

a. IF ALL of the following apply:

Unit is in Modes 1-4

ALL other RS buses are energized from operable inverters

RS1 will be supplied by Y11 on Alternate source for a short period of time

THEN APPLY 2-hour administrative time clock per TS 3.8.7.

b. IF 2-hour administrative time clock per TS 3.8.7 does NOT apply in Modes 1-4, THEN ENSURE compliance with TS 3.8.7, Condition A or C.

c. IF unit is in Mode 5, 6 or during movement of irradiated fuel assemblies AND ANY TS component powered from RS1 is required by TS 3.8.10, THEN ENSURE compliance with TS 3.8.8, Condition A.

6. DEPRESS Y11 Alt Source To Load (PB-1101).

7. CHECK Y11 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

8. CHECK Y11 Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

9. PLACE Y11 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1122) to ALTERNATE SOURCE TO LOAD.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 36 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

6.9 Shifting RS1 Power from Y11 Alternate Source to Y11 Inverter

NOTE Electrical Maintenance availability for assistance during inverter operation can be a callout situation as determined by the CRS/SM.

1. REQUEST CRS/SM confirm availability of Electrical Maintenance to address any component indication issues discovered during performance of this section.

2. IF a component indication is suspect, THEN NOTIFY CRS that Electrical Maintenance assistance is required.

3. CHECK Y11 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp is lit.

4. CHECK Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

5. CHECK Y11 Frequency Output (E1) 59.7 to 60.3 hertz.

6. PLACE Y11 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1122) in NORMAL SOURCE TO LOAD.

7. DEPRESS Inverter To Load (PB-1100).

8. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp lit.

9. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp off.

10. CHECK Y11 120VAC Output (V2) 118 to 130 volts.

11. OBSERVE Y11 alarm panel (K1620) status is ONE of the following:

ALL alarms are clear

ONLY HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm is in

12. IF another alarm condition exists, THEN NOTIFY the CRS of the condition.

13. IF time clock entered for RS1 panel on Alternate Source, THEN NOTIFY CRS that time clock can be exited.

NOTE HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm, if temperature induced, typically clears within 2 hours2.314815e-5 days 5.555556e-4 hours 3.306878e-6 weeks 7.61e-7 months .

14. RESET Inverter Y11 local alarm panel (K1620).

15. OBSERVE RS1 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-A5) alarm clears.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 37 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

6.10 Y11 Startup with RS1 Supplied from Y11 Alternate Source

NOTE

Steps in this section are expected to alarm RS1 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-A5).

Electrical Maintenance availability for assistance during inverter operation can be a callout situation as determined by the CRS/SM.

1. REQUEST CRS/SM confirm availability of Electrical Maintenance to address any component indication issues discovered during performance of this section.

2. IF a component indication is suspect, THEN NOTIFY CRS that Electrical Maintenance assistance is required.

3. CHECK the following:

Y11 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit

Y11 Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off

Y11 S1 Manual Selector SW (HS-1122) selected to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD

RS1 Transfer Switch Y11S2 (HS-1123) in Y11 TO RS1

4. ENSURE the following breaker positions:

Y11 DC Input breaker open

Y11 Inverter Output breaker open

5. ENSURE DC Power Supply to Inverter Y11 (D01 -22A) breaker closed.

CAUTION Starting idle inverter with battery manual disconnect open or in-service battery charger on equalize could blow fuses on the on-line inverter.

6. ENSURE D07 Manual Disconnect Red (D-13) closed.

7. CHECK in-service Battery Charger for D01 (D-03A/B) on float.

8. CLOSE Y11 DC Input breaker.

9. WAIT 60 seconds for inverter to stabilize.

10. CHECK Y11 Frequency Output (E1) 59.7 to 60.3 hertz.

11. CHECK Y11 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 38 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 6.10 (Continued)

NOTE Y11 Static Transfer Switch can automatically shift from Alternate Source Supplying Load to Inverter Supplying Load 30 seconds after inverter output breaker is closed.

12. CLOSE Y11 Inverter Output breaker.

13. WAIT 60 seconds for inverter to stabilize.

14. IF Inverter Supplying Load green lamp is lit (static switch transferred),

THEN to transfer to Alternate Source AC as follows:

a. DEPRESS Y11 Alt Source To Load (PB-1101).

b. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

c. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

15. Transferring RS1 to Y11 inverter:

a. CHECK Y11 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

b. PLACE Y11 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1122) to NORMAL SOURCE TO LOAD.

c. DEPRESS Y11 Inverter To Load (PB-1100).

d. CHECK Y11 Inverter Supplying Load green lamp lit.

e. CHECK Y11 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp off.

f. CHECK Y11 120VAC Output (V2) 118 to 130 volts.

NOTE After startup of a de-energized inverter, HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm can occur. This condition can exist from a few minutes to several hours depending on room temperature and inverter load.

g. OBSERVE Y11 alarm panel (K1620) status is ONE of the following:

ALL alarms are clear

ONLY HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm is in

h. IF another alarm condition exists, THEN NOTIFY the CRS of the condition.

i. NOTIFY Control Room that transfer is complete and any time clocks entered for RS1 on Alternate Source can be exited.

j. REQUEST CRS update risk management software for Inverter alignment.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 39 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 6.10 (Continued)

16. RESET Y11 local alarm panel (K1620).

17. OBSERVE RS1 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-A5) alarm clears.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 40 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

7.0 INSTRUCTIONS FOR INVERTER Y13 OPERATION

7.1 Y13 Startup with RS3 Supplied from Inverter Y15

NOTE

RS3 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-B5) is expected during performance of this section.

Electrical Maintenance availability for assistance during inverter operation can be a callout situation as determined by the CRS/SM.

1. REQUEST CRS/SM confirm availability of Electrical Maintenance to address any component indication issues discovered during performance of this section.

2. IF a component indication is suspect, THEN NOTIFY CRS that Electrical Maintenance assistance is required.

3. At Inverter Y13, ENSURE the following breaker and switch positions:

DC Input breaker open

Inverter Output breaker open

Alt Source AC Input breaker open

Y13 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1124) in ALT SOURCE TO LOAD

RS3 Transfer Switch Y13 S2 (HS-1125) in Y15 TO RS3

4. ENSURE DC Power Supply to Inverter Y13 (D01 -52B) breaker closed.

CAUTION Starting idle inverter with battery manual disconnect open or in-service battery charger on equalize could blow fuses on the on-line inverter.

5. ENSURE D07 Manual Disconnect Red (D-13) closed.

6. CHECK in-service Battery Charger for D01 (D-03A/B) on float.

7. CLOSE Y13 DC Input breaker.

8. WAIT 60 seconds for inverter to stabilize.

9. CHECK Y13 Frequency Output (E1) 59.7 to 60.3 hertz.

10. CLOSE Y13 Alt Source AC Input breaker.

11. CHECK Y13 120VAC Alt Source (V3) 118 to 130 volts.

12. CHECK Y13 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 41 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 7.1 (Continued)

NOTE Y13 Static Transfer Switch can automatically shift from Alternate Source Supplying Load to Inverter Supplying Load 30 seconds after inverter output breaker is closed.

13. CLOSE Y13 Inverter Output breaker.

14. WAIT 60 seconds for inverter to stabilize.

15. IF Inverter Supplying Load green lamp is lit (static switch transferred),

THEN DEPRESS Y13 Alt Source To Load (PB-1103).

16. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

17. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

18. Checking Y13 inverter output voltage:

a. CHECK Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

b. PLACE Y13 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1124) to NORMAL SOURCE TO LOAD.

c. DEPRESS Y13 Inverter To Load (PB-1102).

d. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp lit.

e. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp off.

f. CHECK Y13 120VAC Output (V2) 118 to 130 volts.

19. Aligning Y13 to Alternate Source:

a. CHECK Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

b. DEPRESS Y13 Alt Source To Load (PB-1103).

c. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

d. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

e. PLACE Y13 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1124) to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 42 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 7.1 (Continued)

20. Aligning Y15 to Alternate Source:

a. ENSURE TS or administrative time clock applicable for the current mode or condition has been entered as follows:

1) IF Unit is in Modes 1-4 AND ALL other RS buses are energized from operable inverters, THEN APPLY 2-hour administrative time clock per TS 3.8.7.

2) IF 2-hour administrative time clock per TS 3.8.7 does NOT apply in Modes 1-4, THEN ENSURE compliance with TS 3.8.7, Condition A or C.

3) IF unit is in Mode 5, 6 or during movement of irradiated fuel assemblies AND ANY TS component powered from RS3 is required by TS 3.8.10, THEN ENSURE compliance with TS 3.8.8, Condition A.

b. IF transfer of RS3 to Inverter Y13 is delayed OR RS3 will remain powered from Alternate Source for any reason, THEN NOTIFY CRS/SM.

c. CHECK Y15 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

d. CHECK Y15 Frequency Output (E1) 59.7 to 60.3 hertz.

e. DEPRESS Y15 Alt Source To Load (PB-1105).

f. CHECK Y15 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

g. CHECK Y15 Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

h. PLACE Y15 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1126) to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD.

21. Transferring RS3 to Y13 Alternate Source:

a. At Y13, PLACE Y13/15 Sync Disc toggle switch (HS-1135) to ON.

b. CHECK Y13 In Sync With Swing Inverter green lamp lit.

c. PLACE Y13 RS3 Transfer Switch Y13 S2 (HS-1125) to Y13 TO RS3.

d. PLACE Y13/15 Sync Disc toggle switch (HS-1135) to OFF.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 43 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 7.1 (Continued)

NOTE RS3 remains on Alt Source until Y13 Inverter To Load (PB-1102) is depressed.

22. Transferring RS3 to Y13 Inverter:

a. CHECK Y13 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

b. PLACE Y13 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1124) to NORMAL SOURCE TO LOAD.

c. DEPRESS Y13 Inverter To Load (PB-1102).

d. CHECK Y13 Inverter Supplying Load green lamp lit.

e. CHECK Y13 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp off.

f. CHECK Y13 120VAC Output (V2) 118 to 130 volts.

NOTE After startup of a de-energized inverter, HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm can occur. This condition can exist from a few minutes to several hours depending on room temperature and inverter load.

g. OBSERVE Y13 alarm panel (K1621) status is ONE of the following:

ALL alarms are clear

ONLY HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm is in

h. IF another alarm condition exists, THEN NOTIFY the CRS of the condition.

i. NOTIFY Control Room that transfer is complete and any time clocks entered for RS3 on Alternate Source can be exited.

j. REQUEST CRS update risk management software for Inverter alignment.

NOTE

Idle inverters are typically shut down to minimize extra heat generation in the room.

It is permissible for idle inverters to remain energized for maintenance activities.

23. IF CRS directs to shutdown Inverter Y15, THEN:

a. OPEN Y15 Alt Source AC Input breaker.

b. OPEN Y15 Inverter Output breaker.

c. OPEN Y15 DC Input breaker.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 44 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 7.1 (Continued)

24. RESET Y13 local alarm panel (K1621).

25. OBSERVE RS3 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-B5) alarm clears.

7.2 Y13 Startup with RS3 Supplied from Y15 Alternate Source

NOTE

RS3 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-B5) is expected during performance of this section.

Electrical Maintenance availability for assistance during inverter operation can be a callout situation as determined by the CRS/SM.

1. REQUEST CRS/SM confirm availability of Electrical Maintenance to address any component indication issues discovered during performance of this section.

2. IF a component indication is suspect, THEN NOTIFY CRS that Electrical Maintenance assistance is required.

3. CHECK Inverter Y15 on Alternate Source:

Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit

Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off

Y15 S1 Manual Selector SW (HS-1126) selected to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD

4. At Inverter Y13, ENSURE the following breaker and switch positions:

DC Input breaker open

Inverter Output breaker open

Alt Source AC Input breaker open

Inverter Y13 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1124) in ALT SOURCE TO LOAD

RS3 Transfer switch Y13 S2 (HS-1125) in Y15 TO RS3

5. ENSURE DC Power Supply to Inverter Y13 (D01 -52B) breaker closed.

CAUTION Starting idle inverter with battery manual disconnect open or in-service battery charger on equalize could blow fuses on the on-line inverter.

6. ENSURE Battery D07 Manual Disconnect Red (D-13) closed.

7. CHECK in-service Battery Charger for D01 (D-03A/B) on float.

8. CLOSE Y13 DC Input breaker.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 45 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 7.2 (Continued)

9. WAIT 60 seconds for inverter to stabilize.

10. CHECK Y13 Frequency Output (E1) 59.7 to 60.3 hertz.

11. CLOSE Y13 Alt Source AC Input breaker.

12. CHECK Y13 120VAC Alt Source (V3) 118 to 130 volts.

13. CHECK Y13 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

NOTE Y13 Static Transfer Switch can automatically shift from Alternate Source Supplying Load to Inverter Supplying Load 30 seconds after inverter output breaker is closed.

14. CLOSE Y13 Inverter Output breaker.

15. WAIT 60 seconds for inverter to stabilize.

16. IF Inverter Supplying Load green lamp is lit (static switch transferred),

THEN DEPRESS Y13 Alt Source To Load (PB-1103).

17. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

18. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

19. Checking Y13 output voltage:

a. CHECK Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

b. PLACE Y13 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1124) to NORMAL SOURCE TO LOAD.

c. DEPRESS Y13 Inverter To Load (PB-1102).

d. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp lit.

e. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp off.

f. CHECK Y13 120VAC Output (V2) 118 to 130 volts.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 46 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 7.2 (Continued)

20. Aligning Y13 to Alternate Source:

a. CHECK Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

b. DEPRESS Y13 Alt Source To Load (PB-1103).

c. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

d. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

e. PLACE Y13 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1124) to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD.

21. Transferring RS3 from Y15 to Y13 Alternate Source:

a. PLACE Y13/15 Sync Disc toggle switch (HS-1135) to ON.

b. CHECK Y13 In Sync With Swing Inverter green lamp lit.

c. PLACE Y13 RS3 Transfer Switch Y13 S2 (HS-1125) to Y13 TO RS3.

d. PLACE Y13/15 Sync Disc toggle switch (HS-1135) to OFF.

22. Transferring RS3 from Y13 Alternate Source to Y13 Inverter:

a. CHECK Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

b. PLACE Y13 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1124) to NORMAL SOURCE TO LOAD.

c. DEPRESS Y13 Inverter To Load (PB-1102).

d. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp lit.

e. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp off.

f. CHECK Y13 120VAC Output (V2) 118 to 130 volts.

NOTE After startup of a de-energized inverter, HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm can occur. This condition can exist from a few minutes to several hours depending on room temperature and inverter load.

g. OBSERVE Y13 alarm panel (K1621) status is ONE of the following:

ALL alarms are clear

ONLY HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm is in

h. IF another alarm condition exists, THEN NOTIFY the CRS of the condition.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 47 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 7.2 Step 22 (Continued)

i. NOTIFY Control Room that transfer is complete and any time clocks entered for RS3 on Alternate Source can be exited.

j. REQUEST CRS update risk management software for Inverter alignment.

NOTE

Idle inverters are typically shut down to minimize extra heat generation in the room.

It is permissible for idle inverters to remain energized for maintenance activities.

23. IF CRS directs to shutdown Inverter Y15, THEN:

a. OPEN Y15 Alt Source AC Input breaker.

b. OPEN Y15 Inverter Output breaker.

c. OPEN Y15 DC Input breaker.

24. RESET Y13 local alarm panel (K1621).

25. OBSERVE RS3 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-B5) alarm clears.

7.3 Y13 Startup with RS3 De-energized

NOTE

RS3 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-B5) is expected to reflash during performance of this section.

Electrical Maintenance availability for assistance during inverter operation can be a callout situation as determined by the CRS/SM.

1. REQUEST CRS/SM confirm availability of Electrical Maintenance to address any component indication issues discovered during performance of this section.

2. IF a component indication is suspect, THEN NOTIFY CRS that Electrical Maintenance assistance is required.

3. At Inverter Y13, ENSURE the following breaker and switch positions:

DC Input breaker open

Inverter Output breaker open

Alt Source AC Input breaker open

Inverter Y13 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1124) in ALT SOURCE TO LOAD

RS3 Transfer Switch Y13 S2 (HS-1125) in Y13 TO RS3

4. ENSURE DC Power Supply to Inverter Y13 (D01 -52B) breaker closed.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 48 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 7.3 (Continued)

CAUTION Starting idle inverter with battery manual disconnect open or in-service battery charger on equalize could blow fuses on the on-line inverter.

5. ENSURE Battery D07 Manual Disconnect Red (D-13) closed.

6. CHECK in-service Battery Charger for D01 (D-03A/B) on float.

7. CLOSE Y13 DC Input breaker.

8. WAIT 60 seconds for inverter to stabilize.

9. CHECK Y13 Frequency Output (E1) 59.7 to 60.3 hertz.

10. CLOSE Y13 Alt Source AC Input breaker to energize RS3.

11. CHECK Y13 120VAC Alt Source (V3) 118 to 130 volts.

12. CHECK Y13 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

NOTE Y13 static transfer switch can automatically shift from Alternate Source Supplying Load to Inverter Supplying Load 30 seconds after inverter output breaker is closed.

13. CLOSE Y13 Inverter Output breaker.

14. WAIT 60 seconds for inverter to stabilize.

15. IF Inverter Supplying Load green lamp is lit (static switch transferred),

THEN DEPRESS Y13 Alt Source To Load (PB-1103).

16. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

17. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

18. Transferring RS3 from Alternate Source to Y13 Inverter:

a. CHECK Y13 Frequency Output (E1) 59.7 to 60.3 hertz.

b. CHECK Y13 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

c. PLACE Y13 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1124) to NORMAL SOURCE TO LOAD.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 49 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 7.3 Step 18 (Continued)

d. DEPRESS Y13 Inverter To Load (PB-1102).

e. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp lit.

f. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp off.

g. CHECK Y13 120VAC Output (V2) 118 to 130 volts.

NOTE After startup of a de-energized inverter, HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm can occur. This condition can exist from a few minutes to several hours depending on room temperature and inverter load.

h. OBSERVE Y13 alarm panel (K1621) status is ONE of the following:

ALL alarms are clear

ONLY HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm is in

i. IF another alarm condition exists, THEN NOTIFY the CRS of the condition.

j. NOTIFY Control Room that transfer is complete and any time clocks entered for RS3 on Alternate Source or RS3 de-energized can be exited.

k. REQUEST CRS update risk management software for Inverter alignment.

19. RESET Y13 local alarm panel (K1621).

20. OBSERVE RS3 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-B5) alarm clears.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 50 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

7.4 Y13 Shutdown with RS3 to Remain Energized from Y15 when Y15 is Supplying RS1

NOTE

RS3 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-B5) and RS1 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-A5) are expected during performance of this section.

Electrical Maintenance availability for assistance during inverter operation can be a callout situation as determined by the CRS/SM.

1. Initial Conditions

CHECK Y11 is idle.

CHECK Y15 is supplying RS1.

CHECK Y13 is supplying RS3.

2. REQUEST CRS/SM confirm availability of Electrical Maintenance to address any component indication issues discovered during performance of this section.

3. IF a component indication is suspect, THEN NOTIFY CRS that Electrical Maintenance assistance is required.

4. At Inverter Y11, ENSURE the following breaker and switch positions:

DC Input breaker open

Inverter Output breaker open

Alt Source AC Input breaker open

Y11 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1122) in ALT SOURCE TO LOAD

RS1 Transfer switch Y11S2 (HS-1123) in Y15 TO RS1

5. ENSURE DC Power Supply to Inverter Y11 (D01 -22A) closed.

CAUTION Starting idle inverter with battery manual disconnect open or in-service battery charger on equalize could blow fuses on the on-line inverter.

6. ENSURE D07 Manual Disconnect Red (D-13) closed.

7. CHECK in-service Battery Charger for D01 (D-03A/B) on float.

8. CLOSE Y11 DC Input breaker.

9. WAIT 60 seconds for inverter to stabilize.

10. CHECK Y11 Frequency Output (E1) 59.7 to 60.3 hertz.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 51 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 7.4 (Continued)

11. CLOSE Y11 Alt Source AC Input breaker.

12. CHECK Y11 120VAC Alt Source (V3) 118 to 130 volts.

13. CHECK Y11 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

NOTE Y11 Static Transfer Switch can automatically shift from Alternate Source Supplying Load to Inverter Supplying Load 30 seconds after inverter output breaker is closed.

14. CLOSE Y11 Inverter Output breaker.

15. WAIT 60 seconds for inverter to stabilize.

16. IF Inverter Supplying Load green lamp is lit (static switch transferred),

THEN DEPRESS Y11 Alt Source To Load (PB-1101).

17. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

18. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

19. Checking Y11 inverter output voltage:

a. CHECK Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

b. PLACE Y11 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1122) to NORMAL SOURCE TO LOAD.

c. DEPRESS Y11 Inverter To Load (PB-1100).

d. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp lit.

e. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp off.

f. CHECK Y11 120VAC Output (V2) 118 to 130 volts.

20. Aligning Y11 to Alternate Source:

a. CHECK Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

b. DEPRESS Y11 Alt Source To Load (PB-1101).

c. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

d. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

e. PLACE Y11 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1122) to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 52 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 7.4 (Continued)

21. Aligning Y15 to Alternate Source:

a. ENSURE TS or administrative time clock applicable for the current mode or condition has been entered as follows:

1) IF Unit is in Modes 1-4 AND ALL other RS buses are energized from operable inverters, THEN APPLY 2-hour administrative time clock per TS 3.8.7.

2) IF 2-hour administrative time clock per TS 3.8.7 does NOT apply in Modes 1 4, THEN ENSURE compliance with TS 3.8.7, Condition A or C.

3) IF unit is in Mode 5, 6 or during movement of irradiated fuel assemblies AND ANY TS component powered from RS1 is required by TS 3.8.10, THEN ENSURE compliance with TS 3.8.8, Condition A.

b. IF transfer of RS1 to Inverter Y11 is delayed OR RS1 will remain powered from Alternate Source for any reason, THEN NOTIFY CRS/SM.

c. CHECK Y15 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

d. CHECK Y15 Frequency Output (E1) 59.7 to 60.3 hertz.

e. DEPRESS Y15 Alt Source To Load (PB-1105).

f. CHECK Y15 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

g. CHECK Y15 Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

h. PLACE Y15 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1126) to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD.

22. Transferring RS1 to Y11 Alternate Source:

a. At Y11, PLACE Y11/15 Sync Disc toggle switch (HS-1134) to ON.

b. CHECK Y11 In Sync With Swing Inverter green lamp lit.

c. PLACE Y11 RS1 Transfer Switch (HS-1123) to Y11 TO RS1.

d. PLACE Y11/15 Sync Disc toggle switch (HS-1134) to OFF.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 53 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 7.4 (Continued)

23. IF transferring RS1 from Alt Source to Y11 Inverter, THEN:

a. CHECK Y11 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

b. PLACE Y11 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1122) to NORMAL SOURCE TO LOAD.

c. DEPRESS Y11 Inverter To Load (PB-1100).

d. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp lit.

e. CHECK Y11 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp off.

f. CHECK Y11 120VAC Output (V2) 118 to 130 volts.

NOTE After startup of a de-energized inverter, HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm can occur. This condition can exist from a few minutes to several hours depending on room temperature and inverter load.

g. OBSERVE Y11 alarm panel (K1620) status is ONE of the following:

ALL alarms are clear

ONLY HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm is in

h. IF another alarm condition exists, THEN NOTIFY the CRS of the condition.

i. NOTIFY Control Room that transfer is complete and any time clocks entered for RS1 on Alternate Source can be exited.

j. REQUEST CRS update risk management software for Inverter alignment.

24. While continuing with this section, to clear alarms on Y11:

a. RESET Y11 local alarm panel (K1620).

b. OBSERVE RS1 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-A5) alarm clears.

25. IF RS3 is on Y13 ALTERNATE Source, THEN CHECK the following:

Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit

Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off

Y13 S1 Manual Selector SW (HS-1124) selected to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 54 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 7.4 (Continued)

26. IF RS3 is on Y13 INVERTER Source, THEN to transfer RS3 to Y13 Alternate Source:

a. ENSURE TS or administrative time clock applicable for the current mode or condition has been entered as follows:

1) IF Unit is in Modes 1-4 AND ALL other RS buses are energized from operable inverters, THEN APPLY 2-hour administrative time clock per TS 3.8.7.

2) IF 2-hour administrative time clock per TS 3.8.7 does NOT apply in Modes 1-4, THEN ENSURE compliance with TS 3.8.7, Condition A or C.

3) IF unit is in Mode 5, 6 or during movement of irradiated fuel assemblies AND ANY TS component powered from RS3 is required by TS 3.8.10, THEN ENSURE compliance with TS 3.8.8, Condition A.

b. IF transfer of RS3 to Inverter Y15 is delayed OR RS3 will remain on Alternate Source for any reason, THEN NOTIFY CRS/SM.

c. CHECK Y13 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

d. CHECK Y13 Frequency Output (E1) 59.7 to 60.3 hertz.

e. DEPRESS Y13 Alt Source To Load (PB-1103).

f. CHECK Y13 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

g. CHECK Y13 Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

h. PLACE Y13 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1124) to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD.

27. Transferring RS3 to Y15 Alternate Source:

a. PLACE Y15 Output Transfer Sw (HS-1127) to SYSTEM OUTPUT TO Y13.

b. At Y13, PLACE Y13/15 Sync Disc toggle switch (HS-1135) to ON.

c. IF DC power is available to Y13, THEN CHECK Y13 In Sync With Swing Inverter green lamp lit.

d. At Y13, PLACE RS3 Transfer switch Y13 S2 (HS-1125) to Y15 to RS3.

e. PLACE Y13/15 Sync Disc toggle switch (HS-1135) to OFF.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 55 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 7.4 (Continued)

NOTE

Idle inverters are typically shut down to minimize extra heat generation in the room.

It is permissible for idle inverters to remain energized for maintenance activities.

28. IF RS3 is to remain on Y15 Alternate Source AND CRS directs to shutdown Inverter Y13, THEN:

a. OPEN Y13 Alt Source AC Input breaker.

b. OPEN Y13 Inverter Output breaker.

c. OPEN Y13 DC Input breaker.

d. EXIT this section.

29. Transferring RS3 to Y15 inverter:

a. CHECK Y15 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

b. CHECK Y15 Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

c. CHECK Y15 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

d. PLACE Y15 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1126) to NORMAL SOURCE TO LOAD.

e. DEPRESS Y15 Inverter To Load (PB-1104).

f. CHECK Y15 Inverter Supplying Load green lamp lit.

g. CHECK Y15 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp off.

h. CHECK Y15 120VAC Output (V2) 118 to 130 volts.

NOTE After startup of a de-energized inverter, HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm can occur. This condition can exist from a few minutes to several hours depending on room temperature and inverter load.

i. At alarm panel (K1654), OBSERVE alarm status is ONE of the following:

ALL alarms are clear

ONLY HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm is in

j. IF another alarm condition exists, THEN NOTIFY the CRS of the condition.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 56 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 7.4 Step 29 (Continued)

k. NOTIFY Control Room that transfer is complete and any time clocks entered for RS3 on Alternate Source can be exited.

l. REQUEST CRS update risk management software for Inverter alignment.

NOTE

Idle inverters are typically shut down to minimize extra heat generation in the room.

It is permissible for idle inverters to remain energized for maintenance activities.

30. IF CRS directs to shutdown Inverter Y13, THEN:

a. OPEN Y13 Alt Source AC Input breaker.

b. OPEN Y13 Inverter Output breaker.

c. OPEN Y13 DC Input breaker.

31. RESET Y15 local alarm panel (K1654).

32. OBSERVE RS3 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-B5) alarm clears.

7.5 Y13 Shutdown with RS3 to Remain Energized from Y15 when Y15 is Idle

NOTE

RS3 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-B5) is expected during performance of this section.

Electrical Maintenance availability for assistance during inverter operation can be a callout situation as determined by the CRS/SM.

1. REQUEST CRS/SM confirm availability of Electrical Maintenance to address any component indication issues discovered during performance of this section.

2. IF a component indication is suspect, THEN NOTIFY CRS that Electrical Maintenance assistance is required.

3. At Y15, ENSURE the following breaker and switch positions:

DC Input breaker open

Inverter Output breaker open

Alt Source AC Input breaker open

Y15 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1126) in ALT SOURCE TO LOAD

Y15 Output Transfer Switch (HS-1127) in SYSTEM OUTPUT TO Y13

4. ENSURE DC Power Supply to Inverter Y15 (D01 -53A) breaker closed.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 57 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 7.5 (Continued)

CAUTION Starting idle inverter with battery manual disconnect open or in-service battery charger on equalize could blow fuses on the on-line inverter.

5. ENSURE D07 Manual Disconnect Red (D-13) closed.

6. CHECK in-service Battery Charger for D01 (D-03A/B) on float.

7. CLOSE Y15 DC Input breaker.

8. WAIT 60 seconds for inverter to stabilize.

9. CHECK Y15 Frequency Output (E1) 59.7 to 60.3 hertz.

10. CLOSE Y15 Alt Source AC Input breaker.

11. CHECK Y15 120VAC Alt Source (V3) 118 t o 130 volts.

12. CHECK Y15 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

NOTE Y15 Static Transfer Switch can automatically shift from Alternate Source Supplying Load to Inverter Supplying Load 30 seconds after inverter output breaker is closed.

13. CLOSE Y15 Inverter Output breaker.

14. WAIT 60 seconds for inverter to stabilize.

15. IF Inverter Supplying Load green lamp is lit (static switch transferred),

THEN DEPRESS Y15 Alt Source To Load (PB-1105).

16. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

17. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

18. Checking Y15 inverter output voltage:

a. CHECK Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

b. PLACE Y15 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1126) to NORMAL SOURCE TO LOAD.

c. DEPRESS Y15 Inverter To Load (PB-1104).

d. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp lit.

e. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp off.

f. CHECK Y15 120VAC Output (V2) 118 to 130 volts.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 58 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 7.5 (Continued)

19. Aligning Y15 to Alternate Source:

a. CHECK Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

b. DEPRESS Y15 Alt Source To Load (PB-1105).

c. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

d. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

e. PLACE Y15 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1126) to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD.

20. IF RS3 is on Y13 ALTERNATE Source, THEN CHECK the following:

Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit

Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off

Y13 S1 Manual Selector SW (HS-1124) selected to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD

21. IF RS3 is on Y13 INVERTER Source, THEN to transfer RS3 to Y13 Alternate Source:

a. ENSURE TS or administrative time clock applicable for the current mode or condition has been entered as follows:

1) IF Unit is in Modes 1-4 AND ALL other RS buses are energized from operable inverters, THEN APPLY 2-hour administrative time clock per TS 3.8.7.

2) IF 2-hour administrative time clock per TS 3.8.7 does NOT apply in Modes 1-4, THEN ENSURE compliance with TS 3.8.7, Condition A or C.

3) IF unit is in Mode 5, 6 or during movement of irradiated fuel assemblies AND ANY TS component powered from RS3 is required by TS 3.8.10, THEN ENSURE compliance with TS 3.8.8, Condition A.

b. CHECK Y13 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

c. CHECK Y13 Frequency Output (E1) 59.7 to 60.3 hertz.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 59 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 7.5 Step 21 (Continued)

d. DEPRESS Y13 Alt Source To Load (PB-1103).

e. CHECK Y13 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

f. CHECK Y13 Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

g. PLACE Y13 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1124) to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD.

22. Transferring RS3 to Y15 Alternate Source:

a. IF transfer of RS3 to Inverter Y15 is delayed OR RS3 will remain on Alternate Source for any reason, THEN NOTIFY CRS/SM.

b. PLACE Y13/15 Sync Disc toggle switch (HS-1135) to ON.

c. CHECK Y13 In Sync With Swing Inverter green lamp lit.

d. PLACE Y13 RS3 Transfer Switch (HS-1125) to Y15 to RS3.

e. PLACE Y13/15 Sync Disc toggle switch (HS-1135) to OFF.

f. CHECK Y15 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

NOTE

Idle inverters are typically shut down to minimize extra heat generation in the room.

It is permissible for idle inverters to remain energized for maintenance activities.

23. IF RS3 is to remain on Y15 Alternate Source AND CRS directs to shutdown Inverter Y13, THEN:

a. OPEN Y13 Alt Source AC Input breaker.

b. OPEN Y13 Inverter Output breaker.

c. OPEN Y13 DC Input breaker.

d. EXIT this section.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 60 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 7.5 (Continued)

24. Transferring RS3 to Y15 inverter:

a. CHECK Y15 Inverter Supplying Load lamp off.

b. CHECK Y15 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

c. PLACE Y15 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1126) to NORMAL SOURCE TO LOAD.

d. DEPRESS Y15 Inverter To Load (PB-1104).

e. CHECK Y15 Inverter Supplying Load green lamp lit.

f. CHECK Y15 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp off.

g. CHECK Y15 120VAC Output (V2) 118 to 130 volts.

NOTE After startup of a de-energized inverter, HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm can occur. This condition can exist from a few minutes to several hours depending on room temperature and inverter load.

h. OBSERVE Y15 alarm panel (K1654) status is ONE of the following:

ALL alarms are clear

ONLY HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm is in

i. IF another alarm condition exists, THEN NOTIFY the CRS of the condition.

j. NOTIFY Control Room that transfer is complete and any time clocks entered for RS3 on Alternate Source can be exited.

k. REQUEST CRS update risk management software for Inverter alignment.

NOTE

Idle inverters are typically shut down to minimize extra heat generation in the room.

It is permissible for idle inverters to remain energized for maintenance activities.

25. IF CRS directs to shutdown Inverter Y13, THEN:

a. OPEN Y13 Alt Source AC Input breaker.

b. OPEN Y13 Inverter Output breaker.

c. OPEN Y13 DC Input breaker.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 61 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 7.5 (Continued)

26. RESET Y15 local alarm panel (K1654).

27. OBSERVE RS3 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-B5) alarm clears.

7.6 Y13 Shutdown with RS3 to Remain Energized from Y13 Alternate Source

NOTE

Steps in this section are expected to cause RS3 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-B5).

Electrical Maintenance availability for assistance during inverter operation can be a callout situation as determined by the CRS/SM.

1. REQUEST CRS/SM confirm availability of Electrical Maintenance to address any component indication issues discovered during performance of this section.

2. IF a component indication is suspect, THEN NOTIFY CRS that Electrical Maintenance assistance is required.

3. ENSURE applicable TS Condition and associated time clock has been entered as follows:

a. IF ALL of the following apply:

Unit is in Modes 1-4

ALL other RS buses are energized from operable inverters

RS3 will be supplied by Y13 Alternate source for a short period of time

THEN APPLY 2-hour administrative time clock per TS 3.8.7.

b. IF 2-hour administrative time clock per TS 3.8.7 does NOT apply in Modes 1-4, THEN ENSURE compliance with TS 3.8.7, Condition A or C.

c. IF unit is in Mode 5, 6 or during movement of irradiated fuel assemblies AND ANY TS component powered from RS3 is required by TS 3.8.10, THEN ENSURE compliance with TS 3.8.8, Condition A.

4. IF RS3 is already on Y13 ALTERNATE Source, THEN CHECK the following:

Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit

Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off

Y13 S1 Manual Selector SW (HS-1124) selected to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 62 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 7.6 (Continued)

5. IF RS3 is on Y13 INVERTER Source, THEN to transfer RS3 to Y13 Alternate Source:

a. CHECK Y13 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

b. CHECK Y13 Frequency Output (E1) 59.7 to 60.3 hertz.

c. DEPRESS Y13 Alt Source To Load (PB-1103).

d. CHECK Y13 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

e. CHECK Y13 Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

f. PLACE Y13 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1124) to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD.

NOTE

Idle inverters are typically shut down to minimize extra heat generation in the room.

It is permissible for idle inverters to remain energized for maintenance activities.

6. IF CRS directs to shutdown Inverter Y13, THEN:

a. OPEN Y13 Inverter Output breaker.

b. OPEN Y13 DC Input breaker.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 63 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

7.7 Y13 Shutdown with RS3 to be De-energized

NOTE

Steps in this section are expected to alarm RS3 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-B5).

Electrical Maintenance availability for assistance during inverter operation can be a callout situation as determined by the CRS/SM.

1. REQUEST CRS/SM confirm availability of Electrical Maintenance to address any component indication issues discovered during performance of this section.

2. IF a component indication is suspect, THEN NOTIFY CRS that Electrical Maintenance assistance is required.

3. ENSURE applicable TS Condition for de-energizing RS3 has been entered as follows:

a. IF unit is in Modes 1-4, THEN REFER TO TS 3.8.9, Condition B.

b. IF unit is in Mode 5, 6 or during movement of irradiated fuel AND any required TS component is being supplied by RS3, THEN REFER TO TS 3.8.10.

4. IF RS3 is on Y13 ALTERNATE Source, THEN CHECK the following:

Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit

Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off

Y13 S1 Manual Selector SW (HS-1124) selected to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD

5. IF RS3 is on Y13 INVERTER Source, THEN to transfer RS3 to Y13 Alternate Source:

a. CHECK Y13 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

b. CHECK Y13 Frequency Output (E1) 59.7 to 60.3 hertz.

c. DEPRESS Y13 Alt Source To Load (PB-1101).

d. CHECK Y13 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

e. CHECK Y13 Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

f. PLACE Y13 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1124) to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD.

6. OPEN Y13 Alt Source AC Input breaker.

7. OPEN Y13 Inverter Output breaker.

8. OPEN Y13 DC Input breaker.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 64 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

7.8 Shifting RS3 Power from Y13 Inverter to Y13 Alternate Source

NOTE

Steps in this section are expected to alarm RS3 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-B5).

Electrical Maintenance availability for assistance during inverter operation can be a callout situation as determined by the CRS/SM.

1. REQUEST CRS/SM confirm availability of Electrical Maintenance to address any component indication issues discovered during performance of this section.

2. IF a component indication is suspect, THEN NOTIFY CRS that Electrical Maintenance assistance is required.

3. CHECK Y13 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

4. CHECK Y13 Frequency Output (E1) 59.7 to 60.3 hertz.

5. ENSURE TS Condition applicable to the current mode or condition for powering RS3 from Alternate Source has been entered as follows:

a. IF ALL of the following apply:

Unit is in Modes 1-4

ALL other RS buses are energized from operable inverters

RS3 will be supplied by Y13 on Alternate source for a short period of time

THEN APPLY 2-hour administrative time clock per TS 3.8.7.

b. IF 2-hour administrative time clock per TS 3.8.7 does NOT apply in Modes 1-4, THEN ENSURE compliance with TS 3.8.7, Condition A or C.

c. IF unit is in Mode 5, 6 or during movement of irradiated fuel assemblies AND ANY TS component powered from RS3 is required by TS 3.8.10, THEN ENSURE compliance with TS 3.8.8, Condition A.

6. DEPRESS Y13 Alt Source To Load (PB-1103).

7. CHECK Y13 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

8. CHECK Y13 Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

9. PLACE Y13 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1124) to ALTERNATE SOURCE TO LOAD.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 65 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

7.9 Shifting RS3 Power from Y13 Alternate Source to Y13 Inverter

NOTE Electrical Maintenance availability for assistance during inverter operation can be a callout situation as determined by the CRS/SM.

1. REQUEST CRS/SM confirm availability of Electrical Maintenance to address any component indication issues discovered during performance of this section.

2. IF a component indication is suspect, THEN NOTIFY CRS that Electrical Maintenance assistance is required.

3. CHECK Y13 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp is lit.

4. CHECK Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

5. CHECK Y13 Frequency Output (E1) 59.7 to 60.3 hertz.

6. PLACE Y13 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1124) in NORMAL SOURCE TO LOAD.

7. DEPRESS Inverter To Load (PB-1102).

8. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp lit.

9. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp off.

10. CHECK Y13 120VAC Output (V2) 118 to 130 volts.

11. OBSERVE Y13 alarm panel (K1621) status is ONE of the following:

ALL alarms are clear

ONLY HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm is in

12. IF another alarm condition exists, THEN NOTIFY the CRS of the condition.

13. IF time clock entered for RS3 panel on Alternate Source, THEN NOTIFY CRS that time clock can be exited.

NOTE HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm, if temperature induced, typically clears within 2 hours2.314815e-5 days 5.555556e-4 hours 3.306878e-6 weeks 7.61e-7 months .

14. RESET Inverter Y13 local alarm panel (K1621).

15. OBSERVE RS3 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-B5) alarm clears.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 66 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

7.10 Y13 Startup with RS3 Supplied from Y13 Alternate Source

NOTE

Steps in this section are expected to alarm RS1 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-A5).

Electrical Maintenance availability for assistance during inverter operation can be a callout situation as determined by the CRS/SM.

1. REQUEST CRS/SM confirm availability of Electrical Maintenance to address any component indication issues discovered during performance of this section.

2. IF a component indication is suspect, THEN NOTIFY CRS that Electrical Maintenance assistance is required.

3. CHECK the following:

Y13 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit

Y13 Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off

Y13 S1 Manual Selector SW (HS-1124) selected to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD

RS3 Transfer Switch Y13 S2 (HS-1125) in Y13 TO RS3

4. ENSURE the following breaker positions:

Y13 DC Input breaker open

Y13 Inverter Output breaker open

5. ENSURE DC Power Supply to Inverter Y13 (D01 -52B) breaker closed.

CAUTION Starting idle inverter with battery manual disconnect open or in-service battery charger on equalize could blow fuses on the on-line inverter.

6. ENSURE D07 Manual Disconnect Red (D-13) closed.

7. CHECK in-service Battery Charger for D01 (D-03A/B) on float.

8. CLOSE Y13 DC Input breaker.

9. WAIT 60 seconds for inverter to stabilize.

10. CHECK Y13 Frequency Output (E1) 59.7 to 60.3 hertz.

11. CHECK Y13 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 67 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 7.10 (Continued)

NOTE Y13 Static Transfer Switch can automatically shift from Alternate Source Supplying Load to Inverter Supplying Load 30 seconds after inverter output breaker is closed.

12. CLOSE Y13 Inverter Output breaker.

13. WAIT 60 seconds for inverter to stabilize.

14. IF Inverter Supplying Load green lamp is lit (static switch transferred),

THEN to transfer to Alternate Source AC:

a. DEPRESS Y13 Alt Source To Load (PB-1103).

b. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

c. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

15. Transferring RS3 to Y13 inverter:

a. CHECK Y13 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

b. PLACE Y13 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1124) to NORMAL SOURCE TO LOAD.

c. DEPRESS Y13 Inverter To Load (PB-1102).

d. CHECK Y13 Inverter Supplying Load green lamp lit.

e. CHECK Y13 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp off.

f. CHECK Y13 120VAC Output (V2) 118 to 130 volts.

NOTE After startup of a de-energized inverter, HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm can occur. This condition can exist from a few minutes to several hours depending on room temperature and inverter load.

g. OBSERVE Y13 alarm panel (K1621) status is ONE of the following:

ALL alarms are clear

ONLY HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm is in

h. IF another alarm condition exists, THEN NOTIFY the CRS of the condition.

i. NOTIFY Control Room that transfer is complete and any time clocks entered for RS3 on Alternate Source can be exited.

j. REQUEST CRS update risk management software for Inverter alignment.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 68 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 7.10 (Continued)

16. RESET Y13 local alarm panel (K1621).

17. OBSERVE RS3 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-B5) alarm clears.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 69 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

8.0 INSTRUCTIONS FOR INVERTER Y15 OPERATION

8.1 Shifting RS1 (RS3) Power from Y15 Inverter to Y15 Alternate Source

NOTE

Steps in this section are expected to alarm RS1 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-A5) or RS3 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-B5).

Electrical Maintenance availability for assistance during inverter operation can be a callout situation as determined by the CRS/SM.

1. REQUEST CRS/SM confirm availability of Electrical Maintenance to address any component indication issues discovered during performance of this section.

2. IF a component indication is suspect, THEN NOTIFY CRS that Electrical Maintenance assistance is required.

3. CHECK Y15 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

4. ENSURE applicable TS time clock has been entered as follows:

a. IF ALL of the following apply:

Unit is in Modes 1-4

ALL other RS buses are energized from operable inverters

RS1 (RS3) will be supplied by Y15 on Alternate source for a short period of time

THEN APPLY 2-hour administrative time clock per TS 3.8.7.

b. IF 2-hour admin time clock per TS 3.8.7 does NOT apply in Modes 1-4, THEN ENSURE compliance with TS 3.8.7, Condition A or C.

c. IF unit is in Mode 5, 6 or during movement of irradiated fuel assemblies AND ANY TS component powered from RS1 (RS3) is required by TS 3.8.10, THEN ENSURE compliance with TS 3.8.8, Condition A.

5. DEPRESS Y15 Alt Source To Load (PB-1105).

6. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

7. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

8. PLACE Y15 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1126) to ALTERNATE SOURCE TO LOAD.

9. CHECK Y15 120VAC Output (V2) 118 to 130 volts.

10. OBSERVE Y15 alarm panel (K1654).

11. OBSERVE RS1 (RS3) INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-A5/B5) alarm clear.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 70 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

8.2 Shifting RS1 (RS3) Power from Y15 Alternate Source to Y15 Inverter

NOTE

Steps in this section are expected to alarm RS1 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-A5) or RS3 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-B5).

Electrical Maintenance availability for assistance during inverter operation can be a callout situation as determined by the CRS/SM.

1. REQUEST CRS/SM confirm availability of Electrical Maintenance to address any component indication issues discovered during performance of this section.

2. IF a component indication is suspect, THEN NOTIFY CRS that Electrical Maintenance assistance is required.

3. CHECK Y15 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

4. CHECK Y15 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

5. CHECK Y15 Frequency Output (E1) 59.7 to 60.3 hertz.

6. PLACE Y15 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1126) to NORMAL SOURCE TO LOAD.

7. DEPRESS Y15 Inverter To Load (PB-1104).

8. CHECK Y15 Inverter Supplying Load green lamp lit.

9. CHECK Y15 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp off.

10. CHECK Y15 120VAC Output (V2) 118 to 130 volts.

11. IF time clock entered for RS1 (RS3) panel on Alternate Source, THEN NOTIFY CRS that time clock can be exited.

12. REQUEST CRS update risk management software for Inverter alignment.

NOTE HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm, if temperature induced, typically clears within 2 hours2.314815e-5 days 5.555556e-4 hours 3.306878e-6 weeks 7.61e-7 months .

13. RESET Inverter Y15 local alarm panel (K1654).

14. OBSERVE RS1 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-A5) or RS3 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-B5) alarm clear.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 71 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

8.3 Y15 Shutdown with RS1 (RS3) to Remain Energized from Y15 Alternate Source

NOTE

Steps in this section are expected to alarm RS1 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-A5) or RS3 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-B5).

Electrical Maintenance availability for assistance during inverter operation can be a callout situation as determined by the CRS/SM.

1. REQUEST CRS/SM confirm availability of Electrical Maintenance to address any component indication issues discovered during performance of this section.

2. IF a component indication is suspect, THEN NOTIFY CRS that Electrical Maintenance assistance is required.

3. ENSURE applicable TS Condition and associated time clock has been entered as follows:

a. IF ALL of the following apply:

Unit is in Modes 1-4

ALL other RS buses are energized from operable inverters

RS1 (RS3) will be supplied by Y15 Alternate source for a short period of time

THEN APPLY 2-hour administrative time clock per TS 3.8.7.

b. IF 2-hour administrative time clock per TS 3.8.7 does NOT apply in Modes 1-4, THEN ENSURE compliance with TS 3.8.7, Condition A or C.

c. IF unit is in Mode 5, 6 or during movement of irradiated fuel assemblies AND ANY TS component powered from RS1 (RS3) is required by TS 3.8.10, THEN ENSURE compliance with TS 3.8.8, Condition A.

4. IF RS1 (RS-3) is already on Y15 ALTERNATE Source, THEN CHECK the following:

Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit

Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off

Y15 S1 Manual Selector SW (HS-1126) selected to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 72 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 8.3 (Continued)

5. IF RS1 (RS-3) is on Y15 INVERTER Source, THEN to transfer RS1 (RS3) to Y15 Alternate Source:

a. CHECK Y15 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

b. CHECK Y15 Frequency Output (E1) 59.7 to 60.3 hertz.

c. DEPRESS Y15 Alt Source To Load (PB-1105).

d. CHECK Y15 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

e. CHECK Y15 Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

f. PLACE Y15 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1126) to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD.

NOTE

Idle inverters are typically shut down to minimize extra heat generation in the room.

It is permissible for idle inverters to remain energized for maintenance activities.

6. IF CRS directs to shutdown Y15 inverter, THEN:

a. OPEN Y15 Inverter Output breaker.

b. OPEN Y15 DC Input breaker.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 73 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

9.0 INSTRUCTIONS FOR INVERTER Y22 OPERATION

9.1 Y22 Startup with RS2 Supplied from Inverter Y25

NOTE

RS2 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-A6) is expected during performance of this section.

Electrical Maintenance availability for assistance during inverter operation can be a callout situation as determined by the CRS/SM.

1. REQUEST CRS/SM confirm availability of Electrical Maintenance to address any component indication issues discovered during performance of this section.

2. IF a component indication is suspect, THEN NOTIFY CRS that Electrical Maintenance assistance is required.

3. At Inverter Y22, ENSURE the following breaker and switch positions:

DC Input breaker open

Inverter Output breaker open

Alt Source AC Input breaker open

Y22 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1128) in ALT SOURCE TO LOAD

RS2 Transfer Switch Y22 S2 (HS-1129) in Y25 TO RS2

4. ENSURE DC Power Supply to Inverter Y22 (D02 -42A) breaker closed.

CAUTION Starting idle inverter with battery manual disconnect open or in-service battery charger on equalize could blow fuses on the on-line inverter.

5. ENSURE D06 Manual Disconnect Green (D-14) closed.

6. CHECK in-service Battery Charger for D02 (D-04A/B) on float.

7. CLOSE Y22 DC Input breaker.

8. WAIT 60 seconds for inverter to stabilize.

9. CHECK Y22 Frequency Output (E1) 59.7 to 60.3 hertz.

10. CLOSE Y22 Alt Source AC Input breaker.

11. CHECK Y22 120VAC Alt Source (V3) 118 to 130 volts.

12. CHECK Y22 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 74 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 9.1 (Continued)

NOTE Y22 Static Transfer Switch can automatically shift from Alternate Source Supplying Load to Inverter Supplying Load 30 seconds after inverter output breaker is closed.

13. CLOSE Y22 Inverter Output breaker.

14. WAIT 60 seconds for inverter to stabilize.

15. IF Inverter Supplying Load green lamp is lit (static switch transferred),

THEN DEPRESS Y22 Alt Source To Load (PB-1107).

16. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

17. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

18. Checking Y22 inverter output voltage:

a. CHECK Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

b. PLACE Y22 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1128) to NORMAL SOURCE TO LOAD.

c. DEPRESS Y22 Inverter To Load (PB-1106).

d. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp lit.

e. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp off.

f. CHECK Y22 120VAC Output (V2) 118 to 130 volts.

19. Aligning Y22 to Alternate Source:

a. CHECK Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

b. DEPRESS Y22 Alt Source To Load (PB-1107).

c. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

d. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

e. PLACE Y22 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1128) to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 75 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 9.1 (Continued)

20. Aligning Y25 to Alternate Source:

a. ENSURE TS or administrative time clock applicable for the current mode or condition has been entered as follows:

1) IF Unit is in Modes 1-4 AND ALL other RS buses are energized from operable inverters, THEN APPLY 2-hour administrative time clock per TS 3.8.7.

2) IF 2-hour administrative time clock per TS 3.8.7 does NOT apply in Modes 1-4, THEN ENSURE compliance with TS 3.8.7, Condition A or C.

3) IF unit is in Mode 5, 6 or during movement of irradiated fuel assemblies AND ANY TS component powered from RS2 is required by TS 3.8.10, THEN ENSURE compliance with TS 3.8.8, Condition A.

b. IF transfer of RS2 to Inverter Y22 is delayed OR RS2 will remain powered from Alternate Source for any reason, THEN NOTIFY CRS/SM.

c. CHECK Y25 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

d. CHECK Y25 Frequency Output (E1) 59.7 to 60.3 hertz.

e. DEPRESS Y25 Alt Source To Load (PB-1111).

f. CHECK Y25 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

g. CHECK Y25 Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

h. PLACE Y25 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1132) to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD.

21. Transferring RS2 to Y22 Alternate Source:

a. At Y22, PLACE Y22/25 Sync Disc toggle switch (HS-1136) to ON.

b. CHECK Y22 In Sync With Swing Inverter green lamp lit.

c. PLACE Y22 RS2 Transfer Switch Y22S2 (HS-1129) to Y22 TO RS2.

d. PLACE Y22/25 Sync Disc toggle switch (HS-1136) to OFF.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 76 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 9.1 (Continued)

NOTE RS2 remains on Alt Source until Y22 Inverter To Load (PB-1106) is depressed.

22. Transferring RS2 to Y22 Inverter:

a. CHECK Y22 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

b. PLACE Y22 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1128) to NORMAL SOURCE TO LOAD.

c. DEPRESS Y22 Inverter To Load (PB-1106).

d. CHECK Y22 Inverter Supplying Load green lamp lit.

e. CHECK Y22 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp off.

f. CHECK Y22 120VAC Output (V2) 118 to 130 volts.

NOTE After startup of a de-energized inverter, HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm can occur. This condition can exist from a few minutes to several hours depending on room temperature and inverter load.

g. OBSERVE Y22 alarm panel (K1622) status is ONE of the following:

ALL alarms are clear

ONLY HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm is in

h. IF another alarm condition exists, THEN NOTIFY the CRS of the condition.

i. NOTIFY Control Room that transfer is complete and any time clocks entered for RS2 on Alternate Source can be exited.

j. REQUEST CRS update risk management software for Inverter alignment.

NOTE

Idle inverters are typically shut down to minimize extra heat generation in the room.

It is permissible for idle inverters to remain energized for maintenance activities.

23. IF CRS directs to shutdown Inverter Y25, THEN:

a. OPEN Y25 Alt Source AC Input breaker.

b. OPEN Y25 Inverter Output breaker.

c. OPEN Y25 DC Input breaker.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 77 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 9.1 (Continued)

24. RESET Y22 local alarm panel (K1622).

25. OBSERVE RS2 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-A6) alarm clears.

9.2 Y22 Startup with RS2 Supplied from Y25 Alternate Source

NOTE

RS2 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-A6) is expected during performance of this section.

Electrical Maintenance availability for assistance during inverter operation can be a callout situation as determined by the CRS/SM.

1. REQUEST CRS/SM confirm availability of Electrical Maintenance to address any component indication issues discovered during performance of this section.

2. IF a component indication is suspect, THEN NOTIFY CRS that Electrical Maintenance assistance is required.

3. CHECK Inverter Y25 on Alternate Source:

Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit

Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off

Y25 S1 Manual Selector SW (HS-1132) selected to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD.

4. At Inverter Y22, ENSURE the following breaker and switch positions:

DC Input breaker open

Inverter Output breaker open

Alt Source AC Input breaker open

Inverter Y22 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1128) in ALT SOURCE TO LOAD

RS2 Transfer switch Y22 S2 (HS-1123) in Y25 TO RS2

5. ENSURE DC Power Supply to Inverter Y22 (D02 -42A) breaker closed.

CAUTION Starting idle inverter with battery manual disconnect open or in-service battery charger on equalize could blow fuses on the on-line inverter.

6. ENSURE Battery D06 Manual Disconnect Green (D-14) closed.

7. CHECK in-service Battery Charger for D02 (D-04A/B) on float.

8. CLOSE Y22 DC Input breaker.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 78 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 9.2 (Continued)

9. WAIT 60 seconds for inverter to stabilize.

10. CHECK Y22 Frequency Output (E1) 59.7 to 60.3 hertz.

11. CLOSE Y22 Alt Source AC Input breaker.

12. CHECK Y22 120VAC Alt Source (V3) 118 to 130 volts.

13. CHECK Y22 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

NOTE Y22 Static Transfer Switch can automatically shift from Alternate Source Supplying Load to Inverter Supplying Load 30 seconds after inverter output breaker is closed.

14. CLOSE Y22 Inverter Output breaker.

15. WAIT 60 seconds for inverter to stabilize.

16. IF Inverter Supplying Load green lamp is lit (static switch transferred),

THEN DEPRESS Y22 Alt Source To Load (PB-1107).

17. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

18. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

19. Checking Y22 output voltage:

a. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

b. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

c. CHECK Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

d. PLACE Y22 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1128) to NORMAL SOURCE TO LOAD.

e. DEPRESS Y22 Inverter To Load (PB-1106).

f. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp lit.

g. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp off.

h. CHECK Y22 120VAC Output (V2) 118 to 130 volts.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 79 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 9.2 (Continued)

20. Aligning Y22 to Alternate Source:

a. CHECK Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

b. DEPRESS Y22 Alt Source To Load (PB-1107).

c. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

d. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

e. PLACE Y22 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1128) to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD.

21. Transferring RS2 from Y25 to Y22 Alternate Source:

a. PLACE Y22/25 Sync Disc toggle switch (HS-1136) to ON.

b. CHECK Y22 In Sync With Swing Inverter green lamp lit.

c. PLACE Y22 RS2 Transfer Switch Y22 S2 (HS-1129) to Y22 TO RS2.

d. PLACE Y22/25 Sync Disc toggle switch (HS-1136) to OFF.

22. Transferring RS2 from Y22 Alternate Source to Y22 Inverter:

a. CHECK Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

b. PLACE Y22 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1128) to NORMAL SOURCE TO LOAD.

c. DEPRESS Y22 Inverter To Load (PB-1106).

d. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp lit.

e. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp off.

f. CHECK Y22 120VAC Output (V2) 118 to 130 volts.

NOTE After startup of a de-energized inverter, HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm can occur. This condition can exist from a few minutes to several hours depending on room temperature and inverter load.

g. OBSERVE Y22 alarm panel (K1622) status is ONE of the following:

ALL alarms are clear

ONLY HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm is in

h. IF another alarm condition exists, THEN NOTIFY the CRS of the condition.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 80 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 9.2 Step 22 (Continued)

i. NOTIFY Control Room that transfer is complete and any time clocks entered for RS2 on Alternate Source can be exited.

j. REQUEST CRS update risk management software for Inverter alignment.

NOTE

Idle inverters are typically shut down to minimize extra heat generation in the room.

It is permissible for idle inverters to remain energized for maintenance activities.

23. IF CRS directs to shutdown Inverter Y25, THEN:

a. OPEN Y25 Alt Source AC Input breaker.

b. OPEN Y25 Inverter Output breaker.

c. OPEN Y25 DC Input breaker.

24. RESET Y22 local alarm panel (K1622).

25. OBSERVE RS2 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-A6) alarm clears.

9.3 Y22 Startup with RS2 De-energized

NOTE

RS2 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-A6) is expected to reflash during performance of this section.

Electrical Maintenance availability for assistance during inverter operation can be a callout situation as determined by the CRS/SM.

1. REQUEST CRS/SM confirm availability of Electrical Maintenance to address any component indication issues discovered during performance of this section.

2. IF a component indication is suspect, THEN NOTIFY CRS that Electrical Maintenance assistance is required.

3. At Inverter Y22, ENSURE the following breaker and switch positions:

DC Input breaker open

Inverter Output breaker open

Alt Source AC Input breaker open

Inverter Y22 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1128) in ALT SOURCE TO LOAD

RS2 Transfer Switch Y22 S2 (HS-1129) in Y22 TO RS2

4. ENSURE DC Power Supply to Inverter Y22 (D02 -42A) breaker closed.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 81 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 9.3 (Continued)

CAUTION Starting idle inverter with battery manual disconnect open or in-service battery charger on equalize could blow fuses on the on-line inverter.

5. ENSURE Battery D06 Manual Disconnect Green (D-14) closed.

6. CHECK in-service Battery Charger for D02 (D-04A/B) on float.

7. CLOSE Y22 DC Input breaker.

8. WAIT 60 seconds for inverter to stabilize.

9. CHECK Y22 Frequency Output (E1) 59.7 to 60.3 hertz.

10. CLOSE Y22 Alt Source AC Input breaker to energize RS2.

11. CHECK Y22 120VAC Alt Source (V3) 118 to 130 volts.

12. CHECK Y22 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

NOTE Y22 static transfer switch can automatically shift from Alternate Source Supplying Load to Inverter Supplying Load 30 seconds after inverter output breaker is closed.

13. CLOSE Y22 Inverter Output breaker.

14. WAIT 60 seconds for inverter to stabilize.

15. IF Inverter Supplying Load green lamp is lit (static switch transferred),

THEN DEPRESS Y22 Alt Source To Load (PB-1107).

16. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

17. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

18. Transferring RS2 from Alternate Source to Y22 Inverter:

a. CHECK Y22 Frequency Output (E1) 59.7 to 60.3 hertz.

b. CHECK Y22 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

c. PLACE Y22 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1128) to NORMAL SOURCE TO LOAD.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 82 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 9.3 Step 18 (Continued)

d. DEPRESS Y22 Inverter To Load (PB-1106).

e. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp lit.

f. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp off.

g. CHECK Y22 120VAC Output (V2) 118 to 130 volts.

NOTE After startup of a de-energized inverter, HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm can occur. This condition can exist from a few minutes to several hours depending on room temperature and inverter load.

h. OBSERVE Y22 alarm panel (K1622) status is ONE of the following:

ALL alarms are clear

ONLY HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm is in

i. IF another alarm condition exists, THEN NOTIFY the CRS of the condition.

j. NOTIFY Control Room that transfer is complete and any time clocks entered for RS2 on Alternate Source or RS2 de-energized can be exited.

k. REQUEST CRS update risk management software for Inverter alignment.

19. RESET Y22 local alarm panel (K1622).

20. OBSERVE RS2 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-A6) alarm clears.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 83 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

9.4 Y22 Shutdown with RS2 to Remain Energized from Y25 when Y25 is Supplying RS4

NOTE

RS2 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-A6) and RS4 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-B6) are expected during performance of this section.

Electrical Maintenance availability for assistance during inverter operation can be a callout situation as determined by the CRS/SM.

1. Initial Conditions

CHECK Y24 is idle.

CHECK Y25 is supplying RS4.

CHECK Y22 is supplying RS2.

2. REQUEST CRS/SM confirm availability of Electrical Maintenance to address any component indication issues discovered during performance of this section.

3. IF a component indication is suspect, THEN NOTIFY CRS that Electrical Maintenance assistance is required.

4. At Inverter Y24, ENSURE the following breaker and switch positions:

DC Input breaker open

Inverter Output breaker open

Alt Source AC Input breaker open

Y24 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1130) in ALT SOURCE TO LOAD

RS4 Transfer switch Y24 S2 (HS-1131) in Y25 TO RS4

5. ENSURE DC Power Supply to Inverter Y24 (D02-22A) closed.

CAUTION Starting idle inverter with battery manual disconnect open or in-service battery charger on equalize could blow fuses on the on-line inverter.

6. ENSURE D06 Manual Disconnect Green (D-14) closed.

7. CHECK in-service Battery Charger for D02 (D-04A/B) on float.

8. CLOSE Y24 DC Input breaker.

9. WAIT 60 seconds for inverter to stabilize.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 84 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 9.4 (Continued)

10. CHECK Y24 Frequency Output (E1) 59.7 to 60.3 hertz.

11. CLOSE Y24 Alt Source AC Input breaker.

12. CHECK Y24 120VAC Alt Source (V3) 118 to 130 volts.

13. CHECK Y24 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

NOTE Y24 Static Transfer Switch can automatically shift from Alternate Source Supplying Load to Inverter Supplying Load 30 seconds after inverter output breaker is closed.

14. CLOSE Y24 Inverter Output breaker.

15. WAIT 60 seconds for inverter to stabilize.

16. IF Inverter Supplying Load green lamp is lit (static switch transferred),

THEN DEPRESS Y24 Alt Source To Load (PB-1109).

17. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

18. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

19. Checking Y24 inverter output voltage:

a. CHECK Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

b. PLACE Y24 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1130) to NORMAL SOURCE TO LOAD.

c. DEPRESS Y24 Inverter To Load (PB-1108).

d. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp lit.

e. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp off.

f. CHECK Y24 120VAC Output (V2) 118 to 130 volts.

20. Aligning Y24 to Alternate Source:

a. CHECK Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

b. DEPRESS Y24 Alt Source To Load (PB-1109).

c. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

d. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

e. PLACE Y24 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1130) to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 85 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 9.4 (Continued)

21. Aligning Y25 to Alternate Source:

a. ENSURE TS or administrative time clock applicable for the current mode or condition has been entered as follows:

1) IF Unit is in Modes 1-4 AND ALL other RS buses are energized from operable inverters, THEN APPLY 2-hour administrative time clock per TS 3.8.7.

2) IF 2-hour administrative time clock per TS 3.8.7 does NOT apply in Modes 1-4, THEN ENSURE compliance with TS 3.8.7, Condition A or C.

3) IF unit is in Mode 5, 6 or during movement of irradiated fuel assemblies AND ANY TS component powered from RS4 is required by TS 3.8.10, THEN ENSURE compliance with TS 3.8.8, Condition A.

b. IF transfer of RS4 to Inverter Y24 is delayed OR RS4 will remain powered from Alternate Source for any reason, THEN NOTIFY CRS/SM.

c. CHECK Y25 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

d. CHECK Y25 Frequency Output (E1) 59.7 to 60.3 hertz.

e. DEPRESS Y25 Alt Source To Load (PB-1111).

f. CHECK Y25 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

g. CHECK Y25 Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

h. PLACE Y25 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1132) to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD.

22. Transferring RS4 to Y24 Alternate Source:

a. At Y24, PLACE Y24/25 Sync Disc toggle switch (HS-1137) to ON.

b. CHECK Y24 In Sync With Swing Inverter green lamp lit.

c. PLACE Y24 RS4 Transfer Switch (HS-1131) to Y24 TO RS4.

d. PLACE Y24/25 Sync Disc toggle switch (HS-1137) to OFF.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 86 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 9.4 (Continued)

23. IF transferring RS4 from Alt Source to Y24 Inverter, THEN:

a. CHECK Y24 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

b. PLACE Y24 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1130) to NORMAL SOURCE TO LOAD.

c. DEPRESS Y24 Inverter To Load (PB-1108).

d. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp lit.

e. CHECK Y24 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp off.

f. CHECK Y24 120VAC Output (V2) 118 to 130 volts.

NOTE After startup of a de-energized inverter, HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm can occur. This condition can exist from a few minutes to several hours depending on room temperature and inverter load.

g. OBSERVE Y24 alarm panel (K1623) status is ONE of the following:

ALL alarms are clear

ONLY HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm is in

h. IF another alarm condition exists, THEN NOTIFY the CRS of the condition.

i. NOTIFY Control Room that transfer is complete and any time clocks entered for RS4 on Alternate Source can be exited.

j. REQUEST CRS update risk management software for Inverter alignment.

24. While continuing with this section, to clear alarms on Y24:

a. RESET Y24 local alarm panel (K1623).

b. OBSERVE RS4 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-B6) alarm clears.

25. IF RS2 is already on Y22 ALTERNATE Source, THEN CHECK the following:

Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit

Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off

Y22 S1 Manual Selector SW (HS-1128) selected to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 87 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 9.4 (Continued)

26. IF RS2 is on Y22 INVERTER Source, THEN to transfer RS2 to Y22 Alternate Source:

a. ENSURE TS or administrative time clock applicable for the current mode or condition has been entered as follows:

1) IF Unit is in Modes 1-4 AND ALL other RS buses are energized from operable inverters, THEN APPLY 2-hour administrative time clock per TS 3.8.7.

2) IF 2-hour administrative time clock per TS 3.8.7 does NOT apply in Modes 1-4, THEN ENSURE compliance with TS 3.8.7, Condition A or C.

3) IF unit is in Mode 5, 6 or during movement of irradiated fuel assemblies AND ANY TS component powered from RS2 is required by TS 3.8.10, THEN ENSURE compliance with TS 3.8.8, Condition A.

b. IF transfer of RS2 to Inverter Y25 is delayed OR RS2 will remain on Alternate Source for any reason, THEN NOTIFY CRS/SM.

c. CHECK Y22 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

d. CHECK Y22 Frequency Output (E1) 59.7 to 60.3 hertz.

e. DEPRESS Y22 Alt Source To Load (PB-1107).

f. CHECK Y22 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

g. CHECK Y22 Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

h. PLACE Y22 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1128) to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD.

27. Transferring RS2 to Y25 Alternate Source:

a. PLACE Y25 Output Transfer Sw (HS-1133) to SYSTEM OUTPUT TO Y22.

b. At Y22, PLACE Y22/25 Sync Disc toggle switch (HS-1136) to ON

c. IF DC power is available to Y22, THEN CHECK Y22 In Sync With Swing Inverter green lamp lit.

d. At Y22, PLACE RS2 Transfer switch Y22 S2 (HS-1129) to Y25 to RS2.

e. PLACE Y22/25 Sync Disc toggle switch (HS-1136) to OFF.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 88 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 9.4 (Continued)

NOTE

Idle inverters are typically shut down to minimize extra heat generation in the room.

It is permissible for idle inverters to remain energized for maintenance activities.

28. IF RS2 is to remain on Y25 Alternate Source AND CRS directs to shutdown Inverter Y22, THEN:

a. OPEN Y22 Alt Source AC Input breaker.

b. OPEN Y22 Inverter Output breaker.

c. OPEN Y22 DC Input breaker.

d. EXIT this section.

29. Transferring RS2 to Y25 inverter:

a. CHECK Y25 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

b. CHECK Y25 Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

c. CHECK Y25 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

d. PLACE Y25 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1132) to NORMAL SOURCE TO LOAD.

e. DEPRESS Y25 Inverter To Load (PB-1110).

f. CHECK Y25 Inverter Supplying Load green lamp lit.

g. CHECK Y25 Alt Source Supplying Load lamp off.

h. CHECK Y25 120VAC Output (V2) 118 to 130 volts.

NOTE After startup of a de-energized inverter, HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm can occur. This condition can exist from a few minutes to several hours depending on room temperature and inverter load.

i. At alarm panel (K1624), OBSERVE status is ONE of the following:

ALL alarms are clear

ONLY HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm is in

j. IF another alarm condition exists, THEN NOTIFY the CRS of the condition.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 89 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 9.4 Step 29 (Continued)

k. NOTIFY Control Room that transfer is complete and any time clocks entered for RS2 on Alternate Source can be exited.

l. REQUEST CRS update risk management software for Inverter alignment.

NOTE

Idle inverters are typically shut down to minimize extra heat generation in the room.

It is permissible for idle inverters to remain energized for maintenance activities.

30. IF CRS directs to shutdown Inverter Y22, THEN:

a. OPEN Y22 Alt Source AC Input breaker.

b. OPEN Y22 Inverter Output breaker.

c. OPEN Y22 DC Input breaker.

31. RESET Y25 local alarm panel (K1624).

32. OBSERVE RS2 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-A6) alarm clears.

9.5 Y22 Shutdown with RS2 to Remain Energized from Y25 when Y25 is Idle

NOTE

RS2 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-A6) is expected during performance of this section.

Electrical Maintenance availability for assistance during inverter operation can be a callout situation as determined by the CRS/SM.

1. REQUEST CRS/SM confirm availability of Electrical Maintenance to address any component indication issues discovered during performance of this section.

2. IF a component indication is suspect, THEN NOTIFY CRS that Electrical Maintenance assistance is required.

3. At Y25, ENSURE the following breaker and switch positions:

DC Input breaker open

Inverter Output breaker open

Alt Source AC Input breaker open

Y25 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1132) in ALT SOURCE TO LOAD

Y25 Output Transfer Switch (HS-1133) in SYSTEM OUTPUT TO Y22

4. ENSURE DC Power Supply to Inverter Y25 (D02 -32) breaker closed.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 90 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 9.5 (Continued)

CAUTION Starting idle inverter with battery manual disconnect open or in-service battery charger on equalize could blow fuses on the on-line inverter.

5. ENSURE D06 Manual Disconnect Green (D-14) closed.

6. CHECK in-service Battery Charger for D02 (D-04A/B) on float.

7. CLOSE Y25 DC Input breaker.

8. WAIT 60 seconds for inverter to stabilize.

9. CHECK Y25 Frequency Output (E1) 59.7 to 60.3 hertz.

10. CLOSE Y25 Alt Source AC Input breaker.

11. CHECK Y25 120VAC Alt Source (V3) 118 t o 130 volts.

12. CHECK Y25 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

NOTE Y25 Static Transfer Switch can automatically shift from Alternate Source Supplying Load to Inverter Supplying Load 30 seconds after inverter output breaker is closed.

13. CLOSE Y25 Inverter Output breaker.

14. WAIT 60 seconds for inverter to stabilize.

15. IF Inverter Supplying Load green lamp is lit (static switch transferred),

THEN DEPRESS Y25 Alt Source To Load (PB-1111).

16. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

17. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

18. Checking Y25 inverter output voltage:

a. CHECK Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

b. PLACE Y25 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1132) to NORMAL SOURCE TO LOAD.

c. DEPRESS Y25 Inverter To Load (PB-1110).

d. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp lit.

e. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp off.

f. CHECK Y25 120VAC Output (V2) 118 to 130 volts.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 91 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 9.5 (Continued)

19. Aligning Y25 to Alternate Source:

a. CHECK Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

b. DEPRESS Y25 Alt Source To Load (PB-1111).

c. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

d. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

e. PLACE Y25 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1132) to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD.

20. IF RS2 is on Y22 ALTERNATE Source, THEN CHECK the following:

Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit

Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off

Y22 S1 Manual Selector SW (HS-1128) selected to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD

21. IF RS2 is on Y22 INVERTER Source, THEN to transfer RS2 to Y22 Alternate Source:

a. ENSURE TS or administrative time clock applicable for the current mode or condition has been entered as follows:

1) IF Unit is in Modes 1-4 AND ALL other RS buses are energized from operable inverters, THEN APPLY 2-hour administrative time clock per TS 3.8.7.

2) IF 2-hour administrative time clock per TS 3.8.7 does NOT apply in Modes 1-4, THEN ENSURE compliance with TS 3.8.7, Condition A or C.

3) IF unit is in Mode 5, 6 or during movement of irradiated fuel assemblies AND ANY TS component powered from RS2 is required by TS 3.8.10, THEN ENSURE compliance with TS 3.8.8, Condition A.

b. CHECK Y22 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

c. CHECK Y22 Frequency Output (E1) 59.7 to 60.3 hertz.

d. DEPRESS Y22 Alt Source To Load (PB-1107).

e. CHECK Y22 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

f. CHECK Y22 Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

g. PLACE Y22 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1128) to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 92 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 9.5 (Continued)

22. Transferring RS2 to Y25 Alternate Source:

a. IF transfer of RS2 to Inverter Y25 is delayed OR RS2 will remain on Alternate Source for any reason, THEN NOTIFY CRS/SM.

b. PLACE Y22/25 Sync Disc toggle switch (HS-1136) to ON.

c. CHECK Y22 In Sync With Swing Inverter green lamp lit.

d. PLACE Y22 RS2 Transfer Switch (HS-1129) to Y25 to RS2.

e. PLACE Y22/25 Sync Disc toggle switch (HS-1136) to OFF.

f. CHECK Y25 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

NOTE

Idle inverters are typically shut down to minimize extra heat generation in the room.

It is permissible for idle inverters to remain energized for maintenance activities.

23. IF RS2 is to remain on Y25 Alternate Source AND CRS directs to shutdown Inverter Y22, THEN:

a. OPEN Y22 Alt Source AC Input breaker.

b. OPEN Y22 Inverter Output breaker.

c. OPEN Y22 DC Input breaker.

d. EXIT this section.

24. Transferring RS2 to Y25 inverter:

a. CHECK Y25 Inverter Supplying Load lamp off.

b. CHECK Y25 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

c. PLACE Y25 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1132) to NORMAL SOURCE TO LOAD.

d. DEPRESS Y25 Inverter To Load (PB-1110).

e. CHECK Y25 Inverter Supplying Load green lamp lit.

f. CHECK Y25 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp off.

g. CHECK Y25 120VAC Output (V2) 118 to 130 volts.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 93 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 9.5 Step 24 (Continued)

NOTE After startup of a de-energized inverter, HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm can occur. This condition can exist from a few minutes to several hours depending on room temperature and inverter load.

h. OBSERVE Y25 alarm panel (K1624) status is ONE of the following:

ALL alarms are clear

ONLY HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm is in

i. IF another alarm condition exists, THEN NOTIFY the CRS of the condition.

j. NOTIFY Control Room that transfer is complete and any time clocks entered for RS2 on Alternate Source can be exited.

k. REQUEST CRS update risk management software for Inverter alignment.

NOTE

Idle inverters are typically shut down to minimize extra heat generation in the room.

It is permissible for idle inverters to remain energized for maintenance activities.

25. IF CRS directs to shutdown Inverter Y22, THEN:

a. OPEN Y22 Alt Source AC Input breaker.

b. OPEN Y22 Inverter Output breaker.

c. OPEN Y22 DC Input breaker.

26. RESET Y25 local alarm panel (K1624).

27. OBSERVE RS2 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-A6) alarm clears.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 94 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

9.6 Y22 Shutdown with RS2 to Remain Energized from Y22 Alternate Source

NOTE

Steps in this section are expected to alarm RS2 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-A6).

Electrical Maintenance availability for assistance during inverter operation can be a callout situation as determined by the CRS/SM.

1. REQUEST CRS/SM confirm availability of Electrical Maintenance to address any component indication issues discovered during performance of this section.

2. IF a component indication is suspect, THEN NOTIFY CRS that Electrical Maintenance assistance is required.

3. ENSURE TS Condition and time clock for the current mode or condition has been entered as follows:

a. IF ALL of the following apply:

Unit is in Modes 1-4

ALL other RS buses are energized from operable inverters

RS2 will be supplied by Y11 on Alternate source for a short period of time

THEN APPLY 2-hour administrative time clock per TS 3.8.7.

b. IF 2-hour administrative time clock per TS 3.8.7 does NOT apply in Modes 1-4, THEN ENSURE compliance with TS 3.8.7, Condition A or C.

c. IF unit is in Mode 5, 6 or during movement of irradiated fuel assemblies AND ANY TS component powered from RS2 is required by TS 3.8.10, THEN ENSURE compliance with TS 3.8.8, Condition A.

4. IF RS2 is already on Y22 ALTERNATE Source, THEN CHECK the following:

Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit

Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off

Y22 S1 Manual Selector SW (HS-1128) selected to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 95 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 9.6 (Continued)

5. IF RS2 is on Y22 INVERTER Source, THEN to transfer RS2 to Y22 Alternate Source:

a. CHECK Y22 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

b. CHECK Y22 Frequency Output (E1) 59.7 to 60.3 hertz.

c. DEPRESS Y22 Alt Source To Load (PB-1107).

d. CHECK Y22 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

e. CHECK Y22 Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

f. PLACE Y22 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1128) to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD.

NOTE

Idle inverters are typically shut down to minimize extra heat generation in the room.

It is permissible for idle inverters to remain energized for maintenance activities.

6. IF CRS directs to shutdown Y22 Inverter, THEN:

a. OPEN Y22 Inverter Output breaker.

b. OPEN Y22 DC Input breaker.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 96 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

9.7 Y22 Shutdown with RS2 to be De-energized

NOTE

Steps in this section are expected to alarm RS2 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-A6).

Electrical Maintenance availability for assistance during inverter operation can be a callout situation as determined by the CRS/SM.

1. REQUEST CRS/SM confirm availability of Electrical Maintenance to address any component indication issues discovered during performance of this section.

2. IF a component indication is suspect, THEN NOTIFY CRS that Electrical Maintenance assistance is required.

3. ENSURE TS Condition for de-energizing RS2 for the current mode or condition has been entered as follows:

a. IF unit is in Modes 1-4, THEN REFER TO TS 3.8.9, Condition B.

b. IF unit is in Mode 5, 6 or during movement of irradiated fuel AND ANY required TS component is being supplied by RS2, THEN REFER TO TS 3.8.10.

4. IF RS2 is on Y22 ALTERNATE Source, THEN CHECK the following:

Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit

Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off

Y22 S1 Manual Selector SW (HS-1128) selected to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD

5. IF RS2 is on Y22 INVERTER Source, THEN to transfer RS2 to Y22 Alternate Source:

a. CHECK Y22 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

b. CHECK Y22 Frequency Output (E1) 59.7 to 60.3 hertz.

c. DEPRESS Y22 Alt Source To Load (PB-1107).

d. CHECK Y22 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

e. CHECK Y22 Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

f. PLACE Y22 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1128) to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD.

6. OPEN Y22 Alt Source AC Input breaker.

7. OPEN Y22 Inverter Output breaker.

8. OPEN Y22 DC Input breaker.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 97 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

9.8 Shifting RS2 Power from Y22 Inverter to Y22 Alternate Source

NOTE

Steps in this section are expected to alarm RS2 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-A6).

Electrical Maintenance availability for assistance during inverter operation can be a callout situation as determined by the CRS/SM.

1. REQUEST CRS/SM confirm availability of Electrical Maintenance to address any component indication issues discovered during performance of this section.

2. IF a component indication is suspect, THEN NOTIFY CRS that Electrical Maintenance assistance is required.

3. CHECK Y22 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

4. CHECK Y22 Frequency Output (E1) 59.7 to 60.3 hertz.

5. ENSURE TS Condition for powering RS2 from Alternate Source for the current mode or condition has been entered as follows:

a. IF ALL of the following apply:

Unit is in Modes 1-4

ALL other RS buses are energized from operable inverters

RS2 will be supplied by Y22 on Alternate source for a short period of time

THEN APPLY 2-hour administrative time clock per TS 3.8.7.

b. IF 2-hour administrative time clock per TS 3.8.7 does NOT apply in Modes 1-4, THEN ENSURE compliance with TS 3.8.7, Condition A or C.

c. IF unit is in Mode 5, 6 or during movement of irradiated fuel assemblies AND ANY TS component powered from RS2 is required by TS 3.8.10, THEN ENSURE compliance with TS 3.8.8, Condition A.

6. DEPRESS Y22 Alt Source To Load (PB-1107).

7. CHECK Y22 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

8. CHECK Y22 Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

9. PLACE Y22 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1128) to ALTERNATE SOURCE TO LOAD.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 98 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

9.9 Shifting RS2 Power from Y22 Alternate Source to Y22 Inverter

NOTE Electrical Maintenance availability for assistance during inverter operation can be a callout situation as determined by the CRS/SM.

1. REQUEST CRS/SM confirm availability of Electrical Maintenance to address any component indication issues discovered during performance of this section.

2. IF a component indication is suspect, THEN NOTIFY CRS that Electrical Maintenance assistance is required.

3. CHECK Y22 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp is lit.

4. CHECK Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

5. CHECK Y22 Frequency Output (E1) 59.7 to 60.3 hertz.

6. PLACE Y22 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1128) in NORMAL SOURCE TO LOAD.

7. DEPRESS Y22 Inverter To Load (PB-1106).

8. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp lit.

9. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp off.

10. CHECK Y22 120VAC Output (V2) 118 to 130 volts.

11. OBSERVE Y22 alarm panel (K1622) status is ONE of the following:

ALL alarms are clear

ONLY HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm is in

12. IF another alarm condition exists, THEN NOTIFY the CRS of the condition.

13. IF time clock entered for RS2 panel on Alternate Source, THEN NOTIFY CRS that time clock can be exited.

NOTE HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm, if temperature induced, typically clears within 2 hours2.314815e-5 days 5.555556e-4 hours 3.306878e-6 weeks 7.61e-7 months .

14. RESET Inverter Y22 local alarm panel (K1622).

15. OBSERVE RS2 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-A6) alarm clears.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 99 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

9.10 Y22 Startup with RS2 Supplied from Y22 Alternate Source

NOTE

Steps in this section are expected to alarm RS2 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-A6).

Electrical Maintenance availability for assistance during inverter operation can be a callout situation as determined by the CRS/SM.

1. REQUEST CRS/SM confirm availability of Electrical Maintenance to address any component indication issues discovered during performance of this section.

2. IF a component indication is suspect, THEN NOTIFY CRS that Electrical Maintenance assistance is required.

3. CHECK the following:

Y22 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit

Y22 Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off

Y22 S1 Manual Selector SW (HS-1128) selected to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD

RS2 Transfer Switch Y22 S2 (HS-1129) in Y22 TO RS2

4. ENSURE the following breaker positions:

Y22 DC Input breaker open

Y22 Inverter Output breaker open

5. ENSURE DC Power Supply to Inverter Y22 (D02 -42A) breaker closed.

CAUTION Starting idle inverter with battery manual disconnect open or in-service battery charger on equalize could blow fuses on the on-line inverter.

6. ENSURE D06 Manual Disconnect Green (D-14) closed.

7. CHECK in-service Battery Charger for D02 (D-04A/B) on float.

8. CLOSE Y22 DC Input breaker.

9. WAIT 60 seconds for inverter to stabilize.

10. CHECK Y22 Frequency Output (E1) 59.7 to 60.3 hertz.

11. CHECK Y22 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 100 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 9.10 (Continued)

NOTE Y22 Static Transfer Switch can automatically shift from Alternate Source Supplying Load to Inverter Supplying Load 30 seconds after inverter output breaker is closed.

12. CLOSE Y22 Inverter Output breaker.

13. WAIT 60 seconds for inverter to stabilize.

14. IF Inverter Supplying Load green lamp is lit (static switch transferred),

THEN to transfer to Alternate Source AC:

a. DEPRESS Y22 Alt Source To Load (PB-1107).

b. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

c. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

15. Transferring RS2 to Y22 inverter:

a. CHECK Y22 Unit In Sync green lamp lit .

b. PLACE Y22 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1128) to NORMAL SOURCE TO LOAD.

c. DEPRESS Y22 Inverter To Load (PB-1106).

d. CHECK Y22 Inverter Supplying Load green lamp lit.

e. CHECK Y22 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp off.

f. CHECK Y22 120VAC Output (V2) 118 to 130 volts.

NOTE After startup of a de-energized inverter, HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm can occur. This condition can exist from a few minutes to several hours depending on room temperature and inverter load.

g. OBSERVE Y22 alarm panel (K1622) status is ONE of the following:

ALL alarms are clear

ONLY HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm is in

h. IF another alarm condition exists, THEN NOTIFY the CRS of the condition.

i. NOTIFY Control Room that transfer is complete and any time clocks entered for RS2 on Alternate Source can be exited.

j. REQUEST CRS update risk management software for Inverter alignment.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 101 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 9.10 (Continued)

16. RESET Y22 local alarm panel (K1622).

17. OBSERVE RS2 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-A6) alarm clears.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 102 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

10.0 INSTRUCTIONS FOR INVERTER Y24 OPERATION

10.1 Y24 Startup with RS4 Supplied from Inverter Y25

NOTE

RS4 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-B6) is expected during performance of this section.

Electrical Maintenance availability for assistance during inverter operation can be a callout situation as determined by the CRS/SM.

1. REQUEST CRS/SM confirm availability of Electrical Maintenance to address any component indication issues discovered during performance of this section.

2. IF a component indication is suspect, THEN NOTIFY CRS that Electrical Maintenance assistance is required.

3. At Inverter Y24, ENSURE the following breaker and switch positions:

DC Input breaker open

Inverter Output breaker open

Alt Source AC Input breaker open

Y24 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1130) in ALT SOURCE TO LOAD

RS4 Transfer Switch Y24 S2 (HS-1131) in Y25 TO RS4

4. ENSURE DC Power Supply to Inverter Y24 (D02 -22A) breaker closed.

CAUTION Starting idle inverter with battery manual disconnect open or in-service battery charger on equalize could blow fuses on the on-line inverter.

5. ENSURE D06 Manual Disconnect Green (D-14) closed.

6. CHECK in-service Battery Charger for D02 (D-04A/B) on float.

7. CLOSE Y24 DC Input breaker.

8. WAIT 60 seconds for inverter to stabilize.

9. CHECK Y24 Frequency Output (E1) 59.7 to 60.3 hertz.

10. CLOSE Y24 Alt Source AC Input breaker.

11. CHECK Y24 120VAC Alt Source (V3) 118 to 130 volts.

12. CHECK Y24 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 103 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 10.1 (Continued)

NOTE Y24 Static Transfer Switch can automatically shift from Alternate Source Supplying Load to Inverter Supplying Load 30 seconds after inverter output breaker is closed.

13. CLOSE Y24 Inverter Output breaker.

14. WAIT 60 seconds for inverter to stabilize.

15. IF Inverter Supplying Load green lamp is lit (static switch transferred),

THEN DEPRESS Y24 Alt Source To Load (PB-1109).

16. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

17. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

18. Checking Y24 inverter output voltage:

a. CHECK Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

b. PLACE Y24 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1130) to NORMAL SOURCE TO LOAD.

c. DEPRESS Y24 Inverter To Load (PB-1108).

d. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp lit.

e. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp off.

f. CHECK Y24 120VAC Output (V2) 118 to 130 volts.

19. Aligning Y24 to Alternate Source:

a. CHECK Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

b. DEPRESS Y24 Alt Source To Load (PB-1109).

c. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

d. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

e. PLACE Y24 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1130) to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 104 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 10.1 (Continued)

20. Aligning Y25 to Alternate Source:

a. ENSURE TS or administrative time clock applicable for the current mode or condition has been entered as follows:

1) IF Unit is in Modes 1-4 AND ALL other RS buses are energized from operable inverters, THEN APPLY 2-hour administrative time clock per TS 3.8.7.

2) IF 2-hour administrative time clock per TS 3.8.7 does NOT apply in Modes 1-4, THEN ENSURE compliance with TS 3.8.7, Condition A or C.

3) IF unit is in Mode 5, 6 or during movement of irradiated fuel assemblies AND ANY TS component powered from RS4 is required by TS 3.8.10, THEN ENSURE compliance with TS 3.8.8, Condition A.

b. IF transfer of RS4 to Inverter Y24 is delayed OR RS4 will remain powered from Alternate Source for any reason, THEN NOTIFY CRS/SM.

c. CHECK Y25 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

d. CHECK Y25 Frequency Output (E1) 59.7 to 60.3 hertz.

e. DEPRESS Y25 Alt Source To Load (PB-1111).

f. CHECK Y25 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

g. CHECK Y25 Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

h. PLACE Y25 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1132) to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD.

21. Transferring RS4 to Y24 Alternate Source:

a. At Y24, PLACE Y24/25 Sync Disc toggle switch (HS-1137) to ON.

b. CHECK Y24 In Sync With Swing Inverter green lamp lit.

c. PLACE Y24 RS4 Transfer Switch Y24 S2 (HS-1131) to Y24 TO RS4.

d. PLACE Y24/25 Sync Disc toggle switch (HS-1137) to OFF.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 105 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 10.1 (Continued)

NOTE RS4 remains on Alt Source until Y24 Inverter To Load (PB-1108) is depressed.

22. Transferring RS4 to Y24 Inverter:

a. CHECK Y24 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

b. PLACE Y24 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1130) to NORMAL SOURCE TO LOAD.

c. DEPRESS Y24 Inverter To Load (PB-1108).

d. CHECK Y24 Inverter Supplying Load green lamp lit.

e. CHECK Y24 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp off.

f. CHECK Y24 120VAC Output (V2) 118 to 130 volts.

NOTE After startup of a de-energized inverter, HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm can occur. This condition can exist from a few minutes to several hours depending on room temperature and inverter load.

g. OBSERVE Y24 alarm panel (K1623) status is ONE of the following:

ALL alarms are clear

ONLY HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm is in

h. IF another alarm condition exists, THEN NOTIFY the CRS of the condition.

i. NOTIFY Control Room that transfer is complete and any time clocks entered for RS4 on Alternate Source can be exited.

j. REQUEST CRS update risk management software for Inverter alignment.

NOTE

Idle inverters are typically shut down to minimize extra heat generation in the room.

It is permissible for idle inverters to remain energized for maintenance activities.

23. IF CRS directs to shutdown Inverter Y25, THEN:

a. OPEN Y25 Alt Source AC Input breaker.

b. OPEN Y25 Inverter Output breaker.

c. OPEN Y25 DC Input breaker.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 106 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 10.1 (Continued)

24. RESET Y24 local alarm panel (K1623).

25. OBSERVE RS4 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-B6) alarm clears.

10.2 Y24 Startup with RS4 Supplied from Y25 Alternate Source

NOTE

RS4 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-B6) is expected during performance of this section.

Electrical Maintenance availability for assistance during inverter operation can be a callout situation as determined by the CRS/SM.

1. REQUEST CRS/SM confirm availability of Electrical Maintenance to address any component indication issues discovered during performance of this section.

2. IF a component indication is suspect, THEN NOTIFY CRS that Electrical Maintenance assistance is required.

3. CHECK Inverter Y25 on Alternate Source:

Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit

Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off

Y25 S1 Manual Selector SW (HS-1132) selected to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD

4. At Inverter Y24, ENSURE the following breaker and switch positions:

DC Input breaker open

Inverter Output breaker open

Alt Source AC Input breaker open

Inverter Y24 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1130) in ALT SOURCE TO LOAD

RS4 Transfer switch Y24 S2 (HS-1131) in Y25 TO RS4

5. ENSURE DC Power Supply to Inverter Y24 (D02 -22A) breaker closed.

CAUTION Starting idle inverter with battery manual disconnect open or in-service battery charger on equalize could blow fuses on the on-line inverter.

6. ENSURE Battery D06 Manual Disconnect Green (D-14) closed.

7. CHECK in-service Battery Charger for D02 (D-04A/B) on float.

8. CLOSE Y24 DC Input breaker.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 107 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 10.2

9. WAIT 60 seconds for inverter to stabilize.

10. CHECK Y24 Frequency Output (E1) 59.7 to 60.3 hertz.

11. CLOSE Y24 Alt Source AC Input breaker.

12. CHECK Y24 120VAC Alt Source (V3) 118 to 130 volts.

13. CHECK Y24 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

NOTE Y24 Static Transfer Switch can automatically shift from Alternate Source Supplying Load to Inverter Supplying Load 30 seconds after inverter output breaker is closed.

14. CLOSE Y24 Inverter Output breaker.

15. WAIT 60 seconds for inverter to stabilize.

16. IF Inverter Supplying Load green lamp is lit (static switch transferred),

THEN DEPRESS Y24 Alt Source To Load (PB-1109).

17. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

18. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

19. Checking Y24 output voltage:

a. CHECK Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

b. PLACE Y24 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1130) to NORMAL SOURCE TO LOAD.

c. DEPRESS Y24 Inverter To Load (PB-1108).

d. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp lit.

e. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp off.

f. CHECK Y24 120VAC Output (V2) 118 to 130 volts.

20. Aligning Y24 to Alternate Source:

a. CHECK Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

b. DEPRESS Y24 Alt Source To Load (PB-1109).

c. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

d. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

e. PLACE Y24 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1130) to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 108 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 10.2

21. Transferring RS4 from Y25 to Y24 Alternate Source:

a. PLACE Y24/25 Sync Disc toggle switch (HS-1137) to ON.

b. CHECK Y24 In Sync With Swing Inverter green lamp lit.

c. PLACE Y24 RS4 Transfer Switch Y24 S2 (HS-1131) to Y24 TO RS4.

d. PLACE Y24/25 Sync Disc toggle switch (HS-1137) to OFF.

22. Transferring RS4 from Y24 Alternate Source to Y24 Inverter:

a. CHECK Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

b. PLACE Y24 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1130) to NORMAL SOURCE TO LOAD.

c. DEPRESS Y24 Inverter To Load (PB-1108).

d. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp lit.

e. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp off.

f. CHECK Y24 120VAC Output (V2) 118 to 130 volts.

NOTE After startup of a de-energized inverter, HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm can occur. This condition can exist from a few minutes to several hours depending on room temperature and inverter load.

g. OBSERVE Y24 alarm panel (K1623) status is ONE of the following:

ALL alarms are clear

ONLY HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm is in

h. IF another alarm condition exists, THEN NOTIFY the CRS of the condition.

i. NOTIFY Control Room that transfer is complete and any time clocks entered for RS4 on Alternate Source can be exited.

j. REQUEST CRS update risk management software for Inverter alignment.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 109 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 10.2

NOTE

Idle inverters are typically shut down to minimize extra heat generation in the room.

It is permissible for idle inverters to remain energized for maintenance activities.

23. IF CRS directs to shutdown Inverter Y25, THEN:

a. OPEN Y25 Alt Source AC Input breaker.

b. OPEN Y25 Inverter Output breaker.

c. OPEN Y25 DC Input breaker.

24. RESET Y24 local alarm panel (K1623).

25. OBSERVE RS4 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-B6) alarm clears.

10.3 Y24 Startup with RS4 De-energized

NOTE

RS4 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-B6) is expected to reflash during performance of this section.

Electrical Maintenance availability for assistance during inverter operation can be a callout situation as determined by the CRS/SM.

1. REQUEST CRS/SM confirm availability of Electrical Maintenance to address any component indication issues discovered during performance of this section.

2. IF a component indication is suspect, THEN NOTIFY CRS that Electrical Maintenance assistance is required.

3. At Inverter Y24, ENSURE the following breaker and switch positions:

DC Input breaker open

Inverter Output breaker open

Alt Source AC Input breaker open

Inverter Y24 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1130) in ALT SOURCE TO LOAD

RS4 Transfer Switch Y24 S2 (HS-1131) in Y24 TO RS4

4. ENSURE DC Power Supply to Inverter Y24 (D02 -22A) breaker closed.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 110 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 10.3 (Continued)

CAUTION Starting idle inverter with battery manual disconnect open or in-service battery charger on equalize could blow fuses on the on-line inverter.

5. ENSURE Battery D06 Manual Disconnect Green (D-14) closed.

6. CHECK in-service Battery Charger for D02 (D-04A/B) on float.

7. CLOSE Y24 DC Input breaker.

8. WAIT 60 seconds for inverter to stabilize.

9. CHECK Y24 Frequency Output (E1) 59.7 to 60.3 hertz.

10. CLOSE Y24 Alt Source AC Input breaker to energize RS4.

11. CHECK Y24 120VAC Alt Source (V3) 118 to 130 volts.

12. CHECK Y24 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

NOTE Y24 static transfer switch can automatically shift from Alternate Source Supplying Load to Inverter Supplying Load 30 seconds after inverter output breaker is closed.

13. CLOSE Y24 Inverter Output breaker.

14. WAIT 60 seconds for inverter to stabilize.

15. IF Inverter Supplying Load green lamp is lit (static switch transferred),

THEN DEPRESS Y24 Alt Source To Load (PB-1109).

16. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

17. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

18. Transferring RS4 from Alternate Source to Y24 Inverter:

a. CHECK Y24 Frequency Output (E1) 59.7 to 60.3 hertz.

b. CHECK Y24 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

c. PLACE Y24 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1130) to NORMAL SOURCE TO LOAD.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 111 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 10.3 Step 18 (Continued)

d. DEPRESS Y24 Inverter To Load (PB-1108).

e. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp lit.

f. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp off.

g. CHECK Y24 120VAC Output (V2) 118 to 130 volts.

NOTE After startup of a de-energized inverter, HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm can occur. This condition can exist from a few minutes to several hours depending on room temperature and inverter load.

h. OBSERVE Y24 alarm panel (K1623) status is ONE of the following:

ALL alarms are clear

ONLY HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm is in

i. IF another alarm condition exists, THEN NOTIFY the CRS of the condition.

j. NOTIFY Control Room that transfer is complete and any time clocks entered for RS4 on Alternate Source or RS4 de-energized can be exited.

k. REQUEST CRS update risk management software for Inverter alignment.

19. RESET Y24 local alarm panel (K1623).

20. OBSERVE RS4 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-B6) alarm clears.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 112 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

10.4 Y24 Shutdown with RS4 to Remain Energized from Inverter Y25 when Y25 is Supplying RS2

NOTE

RS2 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-A6) and RS4 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-B6) are expected during performance of this section.

Electrical Maintenance availability for assistance during inverter operation can be a callout situation as determined by the CRS/SM.

1. Initial Conditions

CHECK Y22 is idle.

CHECK Y25 is supplying RS2.

CHECK Y24 is supplying RS4.

2. REQUEST CRS/SM confirm availability of Electrical Maintenance to address any component indication issues discovered during performance of this section.

3. IF a component indication is suspect, THEN NOTIFY CRS that Electrical Maintenance assistance is required.

4. At Inverter Y22, ENSURE the following breaker and switch positions:

DC Input breaker open

Inverter Output breaker open

Alt Source AC Input breaker open

Y22 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1128) in ALT SOURCE TO LOAD

RS2 Transfer switch Y22 S2 (HS-1129) in Y25 TO RS2

5. ENSURE DC Power Supply to Inverter Y22 (D02-42A) closed.

CAUTION Starting idle inverter with battery manual disconnect open or in-service battery charger on equalize could blow fuses on the on-line inverter.

6. ENSURE D06 Manual Disconnect Green (D-14) closed.

7. CHECK in-service Battery Charger for D02 (D-04A/B) on float.

8. CLOSE Y22 DC Input breaker.

9. WAIT 60 seconds for inverter to stabilize.

10. CHECK Y22 Frequency Output (E1) 59.7 to 60.3 hertz.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 113 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 10.4 (Continued)

11. CLOSE Y22 Alt Source AC Input breaker.

12. CHECK Y22 120VAC Alt Source (V3) 118 to 130 volts.

13. CHECK Y22 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

NOTE Y22 Static Transfer Switch can automatically shift from Alternate Source Supplying Load to Inverter Supplying Load 30 seconds after inverter output breaker is closed.

14. CLOSE Y22 Inverter Output breaker.

15. WAIT 60 seconds for inverter to stabilize.

16. IF Inverter Supplying Load green lamp is lit (static switch transferred),

THEN DEPRESS Y22 Alt Source To Load (PB-1107).

17. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

18. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

19. Checking Y22 inverter output voltage:

a. CHECK Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

b. PLACE Y22 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1128) to NORMAL SOURCE TO LOAD.

c. DEPRESS Y22 Inverter To Load (PB-1106).

d. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp lit.

e. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp off.

f. CHECK Y22 120VAC Output (V2) 118 to 130 volts.

20. Aligning Y22 to Alternate Source:

a. CHECK Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

b. DEPRESS Y22 Alt Source To Load (PB-1107).

c. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

d. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

e. PLACE Y22 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1128) to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 114 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 10.4 (Continued)

21. Aligning Y25 to Alternate Source:

a. ENSURE TS or administrative time clock applicable for the current mode or condition has been entered as follows:

1) IF Unit is in Modes 1-4 AND ALL other RS buses are energized from operable inverters, THEN APPLY 2-hour administrative time clock per TS 3.8.7.

2) IF 2-hour administrative time clock per TS 3.8.7 does NOT apply in Modes 1-4, THEN ENSURE compliance with TS 3.8.7, Condition A or C.

3) IF unit is in Mode 5, 6 or during movement of irradiated fuel assemblies AND ANY TS component powered from RS2 is required by TS 3.8.10, THEN ENSURE compliance with TS 3.8.8, Condition A.

b. IF transfer of RS2 to Inverter Y22 is delayed OR RS2 will remain powered from Alternate Source for any reason, THEN NOTIFY CRS/SM.

c. CHECK Y25 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

d. CHECK Y25 Frequency Output (E1) 59.7 to 60.3 hertz.

e. DEPRESS Y25 Alt Source To Load (PB-1111).

f. CHECK Y25 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

g. CHECK Y25 Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

h. PLACE Y25 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1132) to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD.

22. Transferring RS2 to Y22 Alternate Source:

a. At Y22, PLACE Y22/25 Sync Disc toggle switch (HS-1136) to ON.

b. CHECK Y22 In Sync With Swing Inverter green lamp lit.

c. PLACE Y22 RS2 Transfer Switch (HS-1129) to Y22 TO RS2.

d. PLACE Y22/25 Sync Disc toggle switch (HS-1136) to OFF.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 115 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 10.4 (Continued)

23. IF transferring RS2 from Alt Source to Y22 Inverter, THEN:

a. CHECK Y22 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

b. PLACE Y22 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1128) to NORMAL SOURCE TO LOAD.

c. DEPRESS Y22 Inverter To Load (PB-1106).

d. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp lit.

e. CHECK Y22 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp off.

f. CHECK Y22 120VAC Output (V2) 118 to 130 volts.

NOTE After startup of a de-energized inverter, HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm can occur. This condition can exist from a few minutes to several hours depending on room temperature and inverter load.

g. OBSERVE Y22 alarm panel (K1622) status is ONE of the following:

ALL alarms are clear

ONLY HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm is in

h. IF another alarm condition exists, THEN NOTIFY the CRS of the condition.

i. NOTIFY Control Room that transfer is complete and any time clocks entered for RS2 on Alternate Source can be exited.

j. REQUEST CRS update risk management software for Inverter alignment.

24. While continuing with this section, to clear alarms on Y22:

a. RESET Y22 local alarm panel (K1622).

b. OBSERVE RS2 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-A6) alarm clears.

25. IF RS4 is on Y24 Alternate Source, THEN CHECK the following:

Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit

Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off

Y24 S1 Manual Selector SW (HS-1130) selected to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 116 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 10.4 (Continued)

26. IF RS4 is NOT on Y24 Alternate Source, THEN to transfer RS4 to Y24 Alternate Source:

a. ENSURE TS or administrative time clock applicable for the current mode or condition has been entered as follows:

1) IF Unit is in Modes 1-4 AND ALL other RS buses are energized from operable inverters, THEN APPLY 2-hour administrative time clock per TS 3.8.7.

2) IF 2-hour administrative time clock per TS 3.8.7 does NOT apply in Modes 1-4, THEN ENSURE compliance with TS 3.8.7, Condition A or C.

3) IF unit is in Mode 5, 6 or during movement of irradiated fuel assemblies AND ANY TS component powered from RS4 is required by TS 3.8.10, THEN ENSURE compliance with TS 3.8.8, Condition A.

b. IF transfer of RS4 to Inverter Y25 is delayed OR RS4 will remain on Alternate Source for any reason, THEN NOTIFY CRS/SM.

c. CHECK Y24 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

d. CHECK Y24 Frequency Output (E1) 59.7 to 60.3 hertz.

e. DEPRESS Y24 Alt Source To Load (PB-1109).

f. CHECK Y24 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

g. CHECK Y24 Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

h. PLACE Y24 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1130) to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD.

27. Transferring RS4 to Y25 Alternate Source:

a. PLACE Y25 Output Transfer Sw (HS-1133) to SYSTEM OUTPUT TO Y24.

b. At Y24, PLACE Y24/25 Sync Disc toggle switch (HS-1137) to ON

c. IF DC power is available to Y24, THEN CHECK Y24 In Sync With Swing Inverter green lamp lit.

d. At Y24, PLACE RS4 Transfer switch Y24 S2 (HS-1131) to Y25 to RS4.

e. PLACE Y24/25 Sync Disc toggle switch (HS-1137) to OFF.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 117 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 10.4 (Continued)

NOTE

Idle inverters are typically shut down to minimize extra heat generation in the room.

It is permissible for idle inverters to remain energized for maintenance activities.

28. IF RS4 is to remain on Y25 Alternate Source AND CRS directs to shutdown Inverter Y24, THEN:

a. OPEN Y24 Alt Source AC Input breaker.

b. OPEN Y24 Inverter Output breaker.

c. OPEN Y24 DC Input breaker.

d. EXIT this section.

29. Transferring RS4 to Y25 inverter:

a. CHECK Y25 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

b. CHECK Y25 Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

c. CHECK Y25 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

d. PLACE Y25 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1132) to NORMAL SOURCE TO LOAD.

e. DEPRESS Y25 Inverter To Load (PB-1110).

f. CHECK Y25 Inverter Supplying Load green lamp lit.

g. CHECK Y25 Alt Source Supplying Load lamp off.

h. CHECK Y25 120VAC Output (V2) 118 to 130 volts.

NOTE After startup of a de-energized inverter, HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm can occur. This condition can exist from a few minutes to several hours depending on room temperature and inverter load.

i. At alarm panel (K1624), OBSERVE alarm status is ONE of the following:

ALL alarms are clear

ONLY HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm is in

j. IF another alarm condition exists, THEN NOTIFY the CRS of the condition.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 118 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 10.4 Step 29 (Continued)

k. NOTIFY Control Room that transfer is complete and any time clocks entered for RS4 on Alternate Source can be exited.

l. REQUEST CRS update risk management software for Inverter alignment.

NOTE

Idle inverters are typically shut down to minimize extra heat generation in the room.

It is permissible for idle inverters to remain energized for maintenance activities.

30. IF CRS directs to shutdown Inverter Y24, THEN:

a. OPEN Y24 Alt Source AC Input breaker.

b. OPEN Y24 Inverter Output breaker.

c. OPEN Y24 DC Input breaker.

31. RESET Y25 local alarm panel (K1624).

32. OBSERVE RS4 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-B6) alarm clears.

10.5 Y24 Shutdown with RS4 to Remain Energized from Y25 when Y25 is Idle

NOTE

RS4 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-B6) is expected during performance of this section.

Electrical Maintenance availability for assistance during inverter operation can be a callout situation as determined by the CRS/SM.

1. REQUEST CRS/SM confirm availability of Electrical Maintenance to address any component indication issues discovered during performance of this section.

2. IF a component indication is suspect, THEN NOTIFY CRS that Electrical Maintenance assistance is required.

3. At Y25, ENSURE the following breaker and switch positions:

DC Input breaker open

Inverter Output breaker open

Alt Source AC Input breaker open

Y25 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1132) in ALT SOURCE TO LOAD

Y25 Output Transfer Switch (HS-1133) in SYSTEM OUTPUT TO Y24

4. ENSURE DC Power Supply to Inverter Y25 (D02 -32) breaker closed.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 119 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 10.5 (Continued)

CAUTION Starting idle inverter with battery manual disconnect open or in-service battery charger on equalize could blow fuses on the on-line inverter.

5. ENSURE D06 Manual Disconnect Green (D-14) closed.

6. CHECK in-service Battery Charger for D02 (D-04A/B) on float.

7. CLOSE Y25 DC Input breaker.

8. WAIT 60 seconds for inverter to stabilize.

9. CHECK Y25 Frequency Output (E1) 59.7 to 60.3 hertz.

10. CLOSE Y25 Alt Source AC Input breaker.

11. CHECK Y25 120VAC Alt Source (V3) 118 t o 130 volts.

12. CHECK Y25 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

NOTE Y25 Static Transfer Switch can automatically shift from Alternate Source Supplying Load to Inverter Supplying Load 30 seconds after inverter output breaker is closed.

13. CLOSE Y25 Inverter Output breaker.

14. WAIT 60 seconds for inverter to stabilize.

15. IF Inverter Supplying Load green lamp is lit (static switch transferred),

THEN DEPRESS Y25 Alt Source To Load (PB-1111).

16. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

17. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

18. Checking Y25 inverter output voltage:

a. CHECK Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

b. PLACE Y25 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1132) to NORMAL SOURCE TO LOAD.

c. DEPRESS Y25 Inverter To Load (PB-1110).

d. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp lit.

e. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp off.

f. CHECK Y25 120VAC Output (V2) 118 to 130 volts.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 120 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 10.5 (Continued)

19. Aligning Y25 to Alternate Source:

a. CHECK Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

b. DEPRESS Y25 Alt Source To Load (PB-1111).

c. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

d. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

e. PLACE Y25 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1132) to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD.

20. IF RS4 is on Y24 Alternate Source, THEN CHECK the following:

Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit

Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off

Y24 S1 Manual Selector SW (HS-1130) selected to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD

21. IF RS4 is on Y24 INVERTER Source, THEN to transfer RS4 to Y24 Alternate Source:

a. ENSURE TS or administrative time clock applicable for the current mode or condition has been entered as follows:

1) IF Unit is in Modes 1-4 AND ALL other RS buses are energized from operable inverters, THEN APPLY 2-hour administrative time clock per TS 3.8.7.

2) IF 2-hour administrative time clock per TS 3.8.7 does NOT apply in Modes 1-4, THEN ENSURE compliance with TS 3.8.7, Condition A or C.

3) IF unit is in Mode 5, 6 or during movement of irradiated fuel assemblies AND ANY TS component powered from RS4 is required by TS 3.8.10, THEN ENSURE compliance with TS 3.8.8, Condition A.

b. CHECK Y24 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

c. CHECK Y24 Frequency Output (E1) 59.7 to 60.3 hertz.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 121 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 10.5 Step 21 (Continued)

d. DEPRESS Y24 Alt Source To Load (PB-1109).

e. CHECK Y24 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

f. CHECK Y24 Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

g. PLACE Y24 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1130) to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD.

22. Transferring RS4 to Y25 Alternate Source:

a. IF transfer of RS4 to Inverter Y25 is delayed OR RS4 will remain on Alternate Source for any reason, THEN NOTIFY CRS/SM.

b. PLACE Y24/25 Sync Disc toggle switch (HS-1137) to ON.

c. CHECK Y24 In Sync With Swing Inverter green lamp lit.

d. PLACE Y24 RS4 Transfer Switch (HS-1131) to Y25 to RS4.

e. PLACE Y24/25 Sync Disc toggle switch (HS-1137) to OFF.

f. CHECK Y25 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

NOTE

Idle inverters are typically shut down to minimize extra heat generation in the room.

It is permissible for idle inverters to remain energized for maintenance activities.

23. IF RS4 is to remain on Y25 Alternate Source AND CRS directs to shutdown Inverter Y24, THEN:

a. OPEN Y24 Alt Source AC Input breaker.

b. OPEN Y24 Inverter Output breaker.

c. OPEN Y24 DC Input breaker.

d. EXIT this section.

24. Transferring RS4 to Y25 inverter:

a. CHECK Y25 Inverter Supplying Load lamp off.

b. CHECK Y25 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

c. PLACE Y25 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1132) to NORMAL SOURCE TO LOAD.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 122 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 10.5 Step 24 (Continued)

d. DEPRESS Y25 Inverter To Load (PB-1110).

e. CHECK Y25 Inverter Supplying Load green lamp lit.

f. CHECK Y25 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp off.

g. CHECK Y25 120VAC Output (V2) 118 to 130 volts.

NOTE Y25 Static Transfer Switch can automatically shift from Alternate Source Supplying Load to Inverter Supplying Load 30 seconds after inverter output breaker is closed.

h. OBSERVE Y25 alarm panel (K1624) status is ONE of the following:

ALL alarms are clear

ONLY HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm is in

i. IF another alarm condition exists, THEN NOTIFY the CRS of the condition.

j. NOTIFY Control Room that transfer is complete and any time clocks entered for RS4 on Alternate Source can be exited.

k. REQUEST CRS update risk management software for Inverter alignment.

NOTE

Idle inverters are typically shut down to minimize extra heat generation in the room.

It is permissible for idle inverters to remain energized for maintenance activities.

25. IF CRS directs to shutdown Inverter Y24, THEN:

a. OPEN Y24 Alt Source AC Input breaker.

b. OPEN Y24 Inverter Output breaker.

c. OPEN Y24 DC Input breaker.

26. RESET Y25 local alarm panel (K1624).

27. OBSERVE RS4 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-B6) alarm clears.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 123 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

10.6 Y24 Shutdown with RS4 to Remain Energized from Y24 Alternate Source

NOTE

Steps in this section are expected to alarm RS4 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-B6).

Electrical Maintenance availability for assistance during inverter operation can be a callout situation as determined by the CRS/SM.

1. REQUEST CRS/SM confirm availability of Electrical Maintenance to address any component indication issues discovered during performance of this section.

2. IF a component indication is suspect, THEN NOTIFY CRS that Electrical Maintenance assistance is required.

3. ENSURE TS Condition and associated time clock for the current mode or condition has been entered as follows:

a. IF ALL of the following apply:

Unit is in Modes 1-4

ALL other RS buses are energized from operable inverters

RS4 will be supplied by Y24 on Alternate source for a short period of time

THEN APPLY 2-hour administrative time clock per TS 3.8.7.

b. IF 2-hour administrative time clock per TS 3.8.7 does NOT apply in Modes 1-4, THEN ENSURE compliance with TS 3.8.7, Condition A or C.

c. IF unit is in Mode 5, 6 or during movement of irradiated fuel assemblies AND ANY TS component powered from RS4 is required by TS 3.8.10, THEN ENSURE compliance with TS 3.8.8, Condition A.

4. IF RS4 is already on Y24 ALTERNATE Source, THEN CHECK the following:

Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit

Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off

Y22 S1 Manual Selector SW (HS-1128) selected to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 124 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 10.6 (Continued)

5. IF RS4 is on Y24 INVERTER Source, THEN to transfer RS4 to Y24 Alternate Source:

a. CHECK Y24 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

b. CHECK Y24 Frequency Output (E1) 59.7 to 60.3 hertz.

c. DEPRESS Y24 Alt Source To Load (PB-1109).

d. CHECK Y24 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

e. CHECK Y24 Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

f. PLACE Y24 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1130) to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD.

NOTE

Idle inverters are typically shut down to minimize extra heat generation in the room.

It is permissible for idle inverters to remain energized for maintenance activities.

6. IF CRS directs to shutdown Y24 Inverter, THEN:

a. OPEN Y24 Inverter Output breaker.

b. OPEN Y24 DC Input breaker.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 125 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

10.7 Y24 Shutdown with RS4 to be De-energized

NOTE

Steps in this section are expected to alarm RS4 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-B6).

Electrical Maintenance availability for assistance during inverter operation can be a callout situation as determined by the CRS/SM.

1. REQUEST CRS/SM confirm availability of Electrical Maintenance to address any component indication issues discovered during performance of this section.

2. IF a component indication is suspect, THEN NOTIFY CRS that Electrical Maintenance assistance is required.

3. ENSURE applicable TS Condition for de-energizing RS4 has been entered as follows:

a. IF unit is in Modes 1-4, THEN REFER TO TS 3.8.9, Condition B.

b. IF unit is in Mode 5, 6 or during movement of irradiated fuel AND any required TS component is being supplied by RS4, THEN REFER TO TS 3.8.10.

4. IF RS4 is on Y24 ALTERNATE Source, THEN CHECK the following:

Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit

Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off

Y22 S1 Manual Selector SW (HS-1128) selected to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD

5. IF RS4 is on Y24 INVERTER Source, THEN to transfer RS4 to Y24 Alternate Source:

a. CHECK Y24 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

b. CHECK Y24 Frequency Output (E1) 59.7 to 60.3 hertz.

c. DEPRESS Y24 Alt Source To Load (PB-1109).

d. CHECK Y24 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

e. CHECK Y24 Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

f. PLACE Y24 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1130) to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD.

6. OPEN Y24 Alt Source AC Input breaker.

7. OPEN Y24 Inverter Output breaker.

8. OPEN Y24 DC Input breaker.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 126 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

10.8 Shifting RS4 Power from Y24 Inverter to Y24 Alternate Source

NOTE

Steps in this section are expected to cause RS4 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-B6).

Electrical Maintenance availability for assistance during inverter operation can be a callout situation as determined by the CRS/SM.

1. REQUEST CRS/SM confirm availability of Electrical Maintenance to address any component indication issues discovered during performance of this section.

2. IF a component indication is suspect, THEN NOTIFY CRS that Electrical Maintenance assistance is required.

3. CHECK Y24 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

4. CHECK Y24 Frequency Output (E1) 59.7 to 60.3 hertz.

5. ENSURE TS Condition for powering RS4 from Alternate Source for current mode or condition has been entered as follows:

a. IF ALL of the following apply:

Unit is in Modes 1-4

ALL other RS buses are energized from operable inverters

RS4 will be supplied by Y24 on Alternate source for a short period of time

THEN APPLY 2-hour administrative time clock per TS 3.8.7.

b. IF 2-hour administrative time clock per TS 3.8.7 does NOT apply in Modes 1-4, THEN ENSURE compliance with TS 3.8.7, Condition A or C.

c. IF unit is in Mode 5, 6 or during movement of irradiated fuel assemblies AND ANY TS component powered from RS4 is required by TS 3.8.10, THEN ENSURE compliance with TS 3.8.8, Condition A.

6. DEPRESS Y24 Alt Source To Load (PB-1109).

7. CHECK Y24 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

8. CHECK Y24 Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

9. PLACE Y24 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1130) to ALTERNATE SOURCE TO LOAD.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 127 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

10.9 Shifting RS4 Power from Y24 Alternate Source to Y24 Inverter

NOTE Electrical Maintenance availability for assistance during inverter operation can be a callout situation as determined by the CRS/SM.

1. REQUEST CRS/SM confirm availability of Electrical Maintenance to address any component indication issues discovered during performance of this section.

2. IF a component indication is suspect, THEN NOTIFY CRS that Electrical Maintenance assistance is required.

3. CHECK Y24 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp is lit.

4. CHECK Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

5. CHECK Y24 Frequency Output (E1) 59.7 to 60.3 hertz.

6. PLACE Y24 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1130) in NORMAL SOURCE TO LOAD.

7. DEPRESS Y24 Inverter To Load (PB-1108).

8. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp lit.

9. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp off.

10. CHECK Y24 120VAC Output (V2) 118 to 130 volts.

11. OBSERVE Y24 alarm panel (K1623) status is ONE of the following:

ALL alarms are clear

ONLY HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm is in

12. IF another alarm condition exists, THEN NOTIFY the CRS of the condition.

13. IF time clock entered for RS4 panel on Alternate Source, THEN NOTIFY CRS that time clock can be exited.

NOTE HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm, if temperature induced, typically clears within 2 hours2.314815e-5 days 5.555556e-4 hours 3.306878e-6 weeks 7.61e-7 months .

14. RESET Inverter Y24 local alarm panel (K1623).

15. OBSERVE RS4 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-B6) alarm clears.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 128 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

10.10 Y24 Startup with RS4 Supplied from Y24 Alternate Source

NOTE

Steps in this section are expected to alarm RS4 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-B6).

Electrical Maintenance availability for assistance during inverter operation can be a callout situation as determined by the CRS/SM.

1. REQUEST CRS/SM confirm availability of Electrical Maintenance to address any component indication issues discovered during performance of this section.

2. IF a component indication is suspect, THEN NOTIFY CRS that Electrical Maintenance assistance is required.

3. CHECK the following:

Y24 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit

Y24 Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off

Y24 S1 Manual Selector SW (HS-11308) selected to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD.

RS4 Transfer Switch Y24 S2 (HS-1131) in Y24 TO RS4

4. ENSURE the following breaker positions:

Y24 DC Input breaker open

Y24 Inverter Output breaker open

5. ENSURE DC Power Supply to Inverter Y24 (D02 -22A) breaker closed.

CAUTION Starting idle inverter with battery manual disconnect open or in-service battery charger on equalize could blow fuses on the on-line inverter.

6. ENSURE D06 Manual Disconnect Green (D-14) closed.

7. CHECK in-service Battery Charger for D02 (D-04A/B) on float.

8. CLOSE Y24 DC Input breaker.

9. WAIT 60 seconds for inverter to stabilize.

10. CHECK Y24 Frequency Output (E1) 59.7 to 60.3 hertz.

11. CHECK Y24 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 129 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 10.10 (Continued)

NOTE Y24 Static Transfer Switch can automatically shift from Alternate Source Supplying Load to Inverter Supplying Load 30 seconds after inverter output breaker is closed.

12. CLOSE Y24 Inverter Output breaker.

13. WAIT 60 seconds for inverter to stabilize.

14. IF Inverter Supplying Load green lamp is lit (static switch transferred),

THEN to transfer to Alternate Source AC:

a. DEPRESS Y24 Alt Source To Load (PB-1109).

b. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

c. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

15. Transferring RS4 to Y24 inverter:

a. CHECK Y24 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

b. PLACE Y24 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1130) to NORMAL SOURCE TO LOAD.

c. DEPRESS Y24 Inverter To Load (PB-1108).

d. CHECK Y24 Inverter Supplying Load green lamp lit.

e. CHECK Y24 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp off.

f. CHECK Y24 120VAC Output (V2) 118 to 130 volts.

NOTE After startup of a de-energized inverter, HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm can occur. This condition can exist from a few minutes to several hours depending on room temperature and inverter load.

g. OBSERVE Y24 alarm panel (K1623) status is ONE of the following:

ALL alarms are clear

ONLY HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm is in

h. IF another alarm condition exists, THEN NOTIFY the CRS of the condition.

i. NOTIFY Control Room that transfer is complete and any time clocks entered for RS4 on Alternate Source can be exited.

j. REQUEST CRS update risk management software for Inverter alignment.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 130 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 10.10 (Continued)

16. RESET Y24 local alarm panel (K1623).

17. OBSERVE RS4 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-B6) alarm clears.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 131 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

11.0 INSTRUCTIONS FOR INVERTER Y25 OPERATION

11.1 Shifting RS2 (RS4) Power from Y25 Inverter to Y25 Alternate Source

NOTE

Steps in this section are expected to alarm RS2 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-A6) or RS4 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-B6).

Electrical Maintenance availability for assistance during inverter operation can be a callout situation as determined by the CRS/SM.

1. REQUEST CRS/SM confirm availability of Electrical Maintenance to address any component indication issues discovered during performance of this section.

2. IF a component indication is suspect, THEN NOTIFY CRS that Electrical Maintenance assistance is required.

3. CHECK Y25 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

4. ENSURE applicable TS time clock has been entered as follows:

a. IF ALL of the following apply:

Unit is in Modes 1-4

ALL other RS buses are energized from operable inverters

RS2 (RS4) will be supplied by Y25 on Alternate source for a short period of time

THEN APPLY 2-hour administrative time clock per TS 3.8.7.

b. IF 2-hour administrative time clock per TS 3.8.7 does NOT apply in Modes 1-4, THEN ENSURE compliance with TS 3.8.7, Condition A or C.

c. IF unit is in Mode 5, 6 or during movement of irradiated fuel assemblies AND ANY TS component powered from RS2 (RS4) is required by TS 3.8.10, THEN ENSURE compliance with TS 3.8.8, Condition A.

5. DEPRESS Y25 Alt Source To Load (PB-1111).

6. CHECK Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

7. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

8. PLACE Y25 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1132) to ALTERNATE SOURCE TO LOAD.

9. CHECK Y25 120VAC Output (V2) 118 to 130 volts.

10. OBSERVE Y25 alarm panel (K1654).

11. OBSERVE RS2 (RS43) INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-A6/B6) alarm clear.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 132 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

11.2 Shifting RS2 (RS4) Power from Y25 Alternate Source to Y25 Inverter

NOTE

Steps in this section are expected to cause RS2 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-A6) or RS4 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-B6).

Electrical Maintenance availability for assistance during inverter operation can be a callout situation as determined by the CRS/SM.

1. REQUEST CRS/SM confirm availability of Electrical Maintenance to address any component indication issues discovered during performance of this section.

2. IF a component indication is suspect, THEN NOTIFY CRS that Electrical Maintenance assistance is required.

3. CHECK Y25 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

4. CHECK Y25 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

5. CHECK Y25 Frequency Output (E1) 59.7 to 60.3 hertz.

6. PLACE Y25 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1132) to NORMAL SOURCE TO LOAD.

7. DEPRESS Y25 Inverter To Load (PB-1110).

8. CHECK Y25 Inverter Supplying Load green lamp lit.

9. CHECK Y25 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp off.

10. CHECK Y25 120VAC Output (V2) 118 to 130 volts.

11. IF time clock entered for RS2 (RS4) panel on Alternate Source, THEN NOTIFY CRS that time clock can be exited.

12. REQUEST CRS update risk management software for Inverter alignment.

NOTE HI INVERTER VOLTAGE alarm, if temperature induced, typically clears within 2 hours2.314815e-5 days 5.555556e-4 hours 3.306878e-6 weeks 7.61e-7 months .

13. RESET Inverter Y25 local alarm panel (K1624).

14. OBSERVE RS2 (RS43) INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-A6/B6) alarm clear.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 133 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

11.3 Y25 Shutdown with RS2 (RS4) to Remain Energized from Y25 Alternate Source

NOTE

Steps in this section are expected to cause RS2 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-A6) or RS4 INVERTER TROUBLE (K01-B6).

Electrical Maintenance availability for assistance during inverter operation can be a callout situation as determined by the CRS/SM.

1. REQUEST CRS/SM confirm availability of Electrical Maintenance to address any component indication issues discovered during performance of this section.

2. IF a component indication is suspect, THEN NOTIFY CRS that Electrical Maintenance assistance is required.

3. IF RS2 (RS-4) is on Y25 ALTERNATE Source, THEN CHECK the following:

Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit

Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off

Y25 S1 Manual Selector SW (HS-1132) selected to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD

4. IF RS2 (RS-4) is on Y25 INVERTER Source, THEN to transfer RS2 (RS4) to Y25 Alternate Source:

a. CHECK Y25 Unit In Sync green lamp lit.

b. CHECK Y25 Frequency Output (E1) 59.7 to 60.3 hertz.

c. DEPRESS Y25 Alt Source To Load (PB-1111).

d. CHECK Y25 Alt Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

e. CHECK Y25 Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

f. PLACE Y25 S1 Manual Selector Sw (HS-1132) to ALT SOURCE TO LOAD.

NOTE

Idle inverters are typically shut down to minimize extra heat generation in the room.

It is permissible for idle inverters to remain energized for maintenance activities.

5. IF CRS directs to shutdown Y25 inverter, THEN:

a. OPEN Y25 Inverter Output breaker.

b. OPEN Y25 DC Input breaker.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 134 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

12.0 INSTRUCTIONS FOR INVERTER Y41 OPERATION

12.1 Inverter Y41 Startup

NOTE Electrical Maintenance availability for assistance during inverter operation can be a callout situation as determined by the CRS/SM.

1. REQUEST CRS/SM confirm availability of Electrical Maintenance to address any component indication issues discovered during performance of this section.

2. IF a component indication is suspect, THEN NOTIFY CRS that Electrical Maintenance assistance is required.

3. ENSURE RC1 on Alternate Source by ONE of the following:

Alternate Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit

Manual Bypass Switch selected to ALTERNATE SOURCE TO LOAD

4. ENSURE DC Input breaker open.

5. ENSURE Inverter Output breaker open.

6. ENSURE Alternate Source AC Input breaker closed.

7. CLOSE DC Power Supply to Inverter Y41 (D-4184).

8. ENSURE Battery D45 Disconnect Switch (D44) closed.

9. CLOSE Inverter Output breaker.

10. DEPRESS Precharge Pushbutton until Precharge green lamp is lit.

11. CLOSE DC Input breaker.

12. IF Manual Bypass Switch is selected to ALTERNATE SOURCE TO LOAD, THEN:

a. WAIT 30 seconds and CHECK In Sync green lamp lit.

b. PLACE Manual Bypass Switch to INVERTER TO LOAD.

13. Shifting RC1 to Y41inverter:

a. CHECK In Sync green lamp lit.

b. CHECK Inverter Output frequency is 59.5 to 60.5 hertz.

c. DEPRESS Inverter Supplying Load pushbutton lamp.

d. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp lit.

e. CHECK Alternate Source Supplying Load amber lamp off.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 135 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 12.1 (Continued)

14. RESET local alarm panel (C604).

15. OBSERVE Y41 TROUBLE (K01-C5) alarm clears.

12.2 Y41 Shutdown with RC1 to Remain in Service

NOTE

Steps in this section are expected to cause Y41 TROUBLE (K01-C5).

Electrical Maintenance availability for assistance during inverter operation can be a callout situation as determined by the CRS/SM.

1. REQUEST CRS/SM confirm availability of Electrical Maintenance to address any component indication issues discovered during performance of this section.

2. IF a component indication is suspect, THEN NOTIFY CRS that Electrical Maintenance assistance is required.

3. IF RC1 is on ALTERNATE Source, THEN CHECK the following:

Alternate Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit

Manual Bypass Switch selected to ALTERNATE SOURCE TO LOAD

4. IF RC1 is on INVERTER Source, THEN to transfer RC1 to Alternate Source:

a. CHECK In Sync green lamp lit.

b. CHECK Inverter Output frequency 59.5 to 60.5 hertz.

c. DEPRESS Alternate Source Supplying Load pushbutton lamp.

d. CHECK Alternate Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

e. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

f. PLACE Manual Bypass switch to ALTERNATE SOURCE TO LOAD.

5. OPEN Inverter Output breaker.

6. OPEN DC Input breaker.

7. OPEN DC Power Supply to Inverter Y41 D-4184.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 136 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 12.2 (Continued)

NOTE Manual Bypass Switch in ALTERNATE SOURCE TO LOAD maintains power to RC1 when Alternate Source AC Input breaker is open.

8. IF maintenance is required on Static Switch, THEN OPEN Alternate Source AC Input breaker.

9. MAKE entry on status board that Y41 is on Alternate Source and shifting MCC B55 and B56 will cause plant computer to be de-energized.

12.3 Shifting RC1 Power from Y41 Inverter to Y41 Alternate Source

NOTE

Y41 TROUBLE (K01-C5) is expected during performance of this section.

Electrical Maintenance availability for assistance during inverter operation can be a callout situation as determined by the CRS/SM.

1. REQUEST CRS/SM confirm availability of Electrical Maintenance to address any component indication issues discovered during performance of this section.

2. IF a component indication is suspect, THEN NOTIFY CRS that Electrical Maintenance assistance is required.

3. CHECK In Sync green lamp lit.

4. CHECK Inverter Output frequency 59.5 to 60.5 hertz.

5. DEPRESS Alternate Source Supplying Load pushbutton lamp.

6. CHECK Alternate Source Supplying Load amber lamp lit.

7. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp off.

8. PLACE Manual Bypass Switch to ALTERNATE SOURCE TO LOAD.

9. MAKE entry on status board that Y41 is on Alternate Source and shifting MCC B55 and B56 will cause plant computer to be de-energized.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 137 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

12.4 Shifting RC1 Power from Y41 Alternate Source to Y41 Inverter

NOTE Electrical Maintenance availability for assistance during inverter operation can be a callout situation as determined by the CRS/SM.

1. REQUEST CRS/SM confirm availability of Electrical Maintenance to address any component indication issues discovered during performance of this section.

2. IF a component indication is suspect, THEN NOTIFY CRS that Electrical Maintenance assistance is required.

3. IF Manual Bypass Switch is in ALTERNATE SOURCE TO LOAD, THEN:

a. CHECK In Sync green lamp lit.

b. PLACE Manual Bypass Switch to INVERTER TO LOAD.

4. CHECK Inverter Output frequency 59.5 to 60.5 hertz.

5. CHECK In Sync green lamp lit.

6. DEPRESS Inverter Supplying Load pushbutton lamp.

7. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp lit.

8. CHECK Alternate Source Supplying Load amber lamp off.

9. RESET local alarm panel (C604).

10. OBSERVE Y41 TROUBLE (K01-C5) alarm clears.

11. REMOVE status board entry concerning Y41 on Alternate Source.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 138 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

12.5 Y41 Startup with Alternate AC Source Unavailable

1. ENSURE Electrical Maintenance available to obtain inverter output voltage.

2. CHECK Panel RC1 Main Breaker is open.

3. ENSURE the following breakers open:

Inverter DC Input breaker (B1)

Inverter Output breaker (B2)

Alternate Source AC Input breaker (B4)

4. IF maintenance is being conducted which impacts B5643A or MCC B56, THEN ENSURE Alternate Source AC Input breaker (B4) Danger Tagged open (Ref. EN-OP-102, Protective and Caution Tagging).

5. ENSURE Manual Bypass Switch selected to INVERTER TO LOAD.

6. IF maintenance is being conducted which impacts B5643A or MCC B56, THEN ENSURE Manual Bypass Switch Danger Tagged in INVERTER TO LOAD. (Ref. EN-OP-102, Protective and Caution Tagging)

7. CLOSE DC Power Supply to Inverter Y41 (D-4184).

8. ENSURE Battery D45 Disconnect switch (D44) closed.

9. CLOSE Inverter Output breaker (B2).

10. DEPRESS Precharge Pushbutton until Precharge green lamp is lit.

11. CLOSE DC Input breaker (B1).

12. CHECK Inverter Output voltage 120 VAC.

13. CHECK Inverter Output frequency 59.5 to 60.5 hertz.

14. DEPRESS Inverter Supplying Load pushbutton lamp.

15. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp lit.

16. CHECK Alternate Source Supplying Load amber lamp off.

17. REQUEST Electrical Maintenance check 120 VAC on output of the Manual Bypass Switch (e.g., wire Nos. 199 & 197).

18. CLOSE RC1 Distribution Panel Main Breaker.

19. CHECK inverter has loaded by current indicated on Inverter Output ammeter (A1).

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 139 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

12.6 Aligning Alternate Source to Inverter Y41 with Inverter Supplying Load

1. ENSURE Manual Bypass Switch in INVERTER TO LOAD.

2. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp lit.

3. CHECK Alternate Source Supply Load amber lamp off.

4. ENSURE Alternate Source AC Input breaker (B4) open.

5. CLOSE Comp Inverter Y-41 Alt Source breaker (B5643A).

6. CLOSE Alternate Source AC Input breaker (B4).

7. CHECK In Sync green lamp lit.

8. CHECK Inverter Supplying Load green lamp lit.

9. CHECK Alternate Source Supply Load amber lamp OFF.

10. CHECK RC1 remains energized as indicated by Inverter Output ammeter (A1).

11. RESET local alarm panel (C604).

12. OBSERVE Y41 TROUBLE (K01-C5) alarm clears.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 140 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

13.0 INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTRUMENT AC PANEL (Y01/Y02) TRANSER OPERATIONS

13.1 Powering Y01 from Y02 Without Paralleling Power Sources

NOTE

Keys 47 and 48 are needed to perform this evolution.

Steps in this section are expected to alarm Y01 LOSS OF VOLTAGE (K01-E5).

1. CHECK reactor is shutdown.

CRITICAL STEP

2. CHECK at least ONE of the following conditions exists:

Consequence of de-energizing panel Y01 is acceptable

Y01 is de-energized and no fault exists on panel Y01 or Y01 Instrument AC Transformer (X-51)

3. IF Y01 is energized, THEN:

a. At Y01, using key 47, UNLOCK Normal Feed to Y01.

b. OPEN and LOCK Normal Feed to Y01.

4. IF Y01 is de-energized AND Normal Feed to Y01 is closed, THEN:

a. Using key 47, UNLOCK Normal Feed to Y01.

b. OPEN and LOCK Normal Feed to Y01.

5. At Y01, for Tie Breaker to Y02:

a. Using key 47, UNLOCK Tie Breaker to Y02.

b. CLOSE and LOCK Tie Breaker to Y02.

6. At Y02, for Tie Breaker to Y01:

a. Using key 48, UNLOCK Tie Breaker to Y01.

b. CLOSE and LOCK Tie Breaker to Y01.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 141 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

13.2 Returning Y01 to Normal After Being Powered from Y02 Without Paralleling Power Sources

NOTE

Keys 47 and 48 are needed to perform this evolution.

Steps in this section are expected to alarm Y01 LOSS OF VOLTAGE (K01-E5).

1. CHECK reactor is shutdown.

CRITICAL STEP

2. CHECK consequence of de-energizing panel Y01 is acceptable.

3. ENSURE Normal Supply to Y01 Instrument AC Transformer X-51 (B5143B) closed.

4. At Y01, for Tie Breaker to Y02:

a. Using key 47, UNLOCK Tie Breaker to Y02.

b. OPEN and LOCK Tie Breaker to Y02.

5. At Y01, for Normal Feed to Y01:

a. Using key 47, UNLOCK Normal Feed to Y01.

b. CLOSE and LOCK Normal Feed to Y01.

6. At Y02, for Tie Breaker to Y01:

a. Using key 48, UNLOCK Tie Breaker to Y01.

b. OPEN and LOCK Tie Breaker to Y01.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 142 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

13.3 Powering Y02 from Y01 Without Paralleling Power Sources

NOTE

Keys 47 and 48 are needed to perform this evolution.

Steps in this section are expected to alarm Y02 LOSS OF VOLTAGE (K01-E6).

1. CHECK reactor is shutdown.

CRITICAL STEP

2. CHECK at least ONE of the following conditions exists:

Consequence of de-energizing panel Y02 is acceptable

Y02 is de-energized and no fault exists on panel Y02 or Y02 Instrument AC Transformer (X-61)

3. IF Y02 is energized, THEN:

a. At Y02, using key 48, UNLOCK Normal Feed to Y02.

b. OPEN and LOCK Normal Feed to Y02.

4. IF Y02 is de-energized AND Normal Feed to Y02 is closed, THEN:

a. Using key 48, UNLOCK Normal Feed to Y02.

b. OPEN and LOCK Normal Feed to Y02.

5. At Y02, for Tie Breaker to Y01:

a. Using key 48, UNLOCK Tie Breaker to Y01.

b. CLOSE and LOCK Tie Breaker to Y01.

6. At Y01, for Tie Breaker to Y02:

a. Using key 47, UNLOCK Tie Breaker to Y02.

b. CLOSE and LOCK Tie Breaker to Y02.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 143 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

13.4 Returning Y02 to Normal After Being Powered from Y01 Without Paralleling Power Sources

NOTE

Keys 47 and 48 are needed to perform this evolution.

Steps in this section are expected to alarm Y02 LOSS OF VOLTAGE (K01-E6).

1. CHECK reactor is shutdown.

CRITICAL STEP

2. CHECK consequence of de-energizing panel Y02 is acceptable.

3. ENSURE Normal Supply to Y02 Instrument AC Transformer X-61 (B6143B) closed.

4. At Y02, for Tie Breaker to Y01:

a. Using key 48, UNLOCK Tie Breaker to Y01.

b. OPEN and LOCK Tie Breaker to Y01.

5. At Y02, for Normal Feed to Y02:

a. Using key 48, UNLOCK Normal Feed to Y02.

b. CLOSE and LOCK Normal Feed to Y02.

6. At Y01, for Tie Breaker to Y02:

a. Using key 47, UNLOCK Tie Breaker to Y02.

b. OPEN and LOCK Tie Breaker to Y02.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 144 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

13.5 Powering Y01 from Y02 by Paralleling Power Sources

NOTE

Keys 47 and 48 are needed to perform this evolution.

Check of synchronism at Y01 prior to transfer is performed by Electrical Maintenance.

CAUTION

If a diesel generator is supplying power to bus A3 or A4, the DG is out of sync with buses that the DG is not supplying.

Even with bus B5 and B6 in synchronism, electrical connections at Y01, Y02, the Y01 transformer or the Y02 transformer can be such that Y01 and Y02 are not in synch.

WARNING Paralleling power sources out of synch can result in personnel injury and equipment damage.

1. CHECK reactor is shutdown.

2. CHECK neither bus A3 nor bus A4 is being powered from a DG.

3. At Y01, CHECK Tie breaker to Y02 open.

4. At Y02, for Tie Breaker to Y01:

a. Using key 48, UNLOCK Tie Breaker to Y01.

b. CLOSE and LOCK Tie Breaker to Y01.

5. At Y01, DIRECT Electrical Maintenance to check synchronism of power sources on each side of Tie Breaker to Y02 and OBTAIN synch status.

6. IF power sources are NOT in synch, THEN:

a. INFORM CRS/SM.

b. EXIT this section.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 145 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 13.5 (Continued)

7. IF power sources are in synch, THEN:

a. At Y01, for Tie Breaker to Y02:

1) Using Key 47, UNLOCK Tie Breaker to Y02.

2) CLOSE and LOCK Tie Breaker to Y02.

b. At Y01, for Normal Feed to Y01:

1) Using key 47, UNLOCK Normal Feed to Y01.

2) OPEN and LOCK Normal Feed to Y01.

13.6 Returning Y01 to Normal After Being Powered from Y02 by Paralleling Power Sources

NOTE

Keys 47 and 48 are needed to perform this evolution.

Check of synchronism at Y01 prior to transfer is performed by Electrical Maintenance.

CAUTION

If a diesel generator is supplying power to bus A3 or A4, the DG is out of sync with buses that the DG is not supplying.

Even with bus B5 and B6 in synchronism, electrical connections at Y01, Y02, the Y01 transformer or the Y02 transformer can be such that Y01 and Y02 are not in synch.

WARNING Paralleling power sources out of synch, can result in personnel injury and equipment damage.

1. CHECK reactor is shutdown.

2. CHECK neither bus A3 nor bus A4 is being powered from a DG.

3. At Y01, CHECK Normal Feed to Y01 open.

4. ENSURE Normal Supply to Y01 Instrument AC Transformer X-51 (B5143B) closed.

5. At Y01, DIRECT Electrical Maintenance to check synchronism of power sources on each side of Normal Feed to Y01 and OBTAIN synch status.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 146 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 13.6 (Continued)

6. IF power sources are NOT in synch, THEN:

a. INFORM CRS/SM.

b. EXIT this section.

7. IF power sources are in synch, THEN:

a. At Y01, for Normal Feed to Y01:

1) Using key 47, UNLOCK Normal Feed to Y01.

2) CLOSE and LOCK Normal Feed to Y01.

b. IF Y01 and Y02 are to be separated, THEN:

1) At Y01, for Tie Breaker to Y02:

a) Using key 47, UNLOCK Tie Breaker to Y02.

b) OPEN and LOCK Tie Breaker to Y02.

2) At Y02, for Tie Breaker to Y01:

a) Using key 48, UNLOCK Tie Breaker to Y01

b) OPEN and LOCK Tie Breaker to Y01.

c. IF Y01 and Y02 are to remain tied with Y01 feeding Y02, THEN at Y02:

1) Using key 48, UNLOCK Normal Feed to Y02.

2) OPEN and LOCK Normal Feed to Y02.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 147 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

13.7 Powering Y02 from Y01 by Paralleling Power Sources

NOTE

Keys 47 and 48 are needed to perform this evolution.

Check of synchronism at Y02 prior to transfer is performed by Electrical Maintenance.

CAUTION

If a diesel generator is supplying power to bus A3 or A4, the DG is out of sync with buses that the DG is not supplying.

Even with bus B5 and B6 in synchronism, electrical connections at Y01, Y02, the Y01 transformer or the Y02 transformer can be such that Y01 and Y02 are not in synch.

WARNING Paralleling power sources out of synch, can result in personnel injury and equipment damage.

1. CHECK reactor is shutdown.

2. CHECK neither bus A3 nor bus A4 is being powered from a DG.

3. At Y02, CHECK Tie Breaker to Y01 open.

4. At Y01, for Tie Breaker to Y02:

a. Using key 47, UNLOCK Tie Breaker to Y02.

b. CLOSE and LOCK Tie Breaker to Y02.

5. At Y02, DIRECT Electrical Maintenance to check synchronism of power sources on each side of Tie Breaker to Y01 and OBTAIN synch status.

6. IF power sources are NOT in synch, THEN:

a. INFORM CRS/SM.

b. EXIT this section.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 148 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 13.7 (Continued)

7. IF power sources are in synch, THEN:

a. At Y02, for Tie Breaker to Y01:

1) Using key 48, UNLOCK Tie Breaker to Y01.

2) CLOSE and LOCK Tie Breaker to Y01.

b. At Y02, for Normal Feed to Y02:

1) Using key 48, UNLOCK Normal Feed to Y02.

2) OPEN and LOCK Normal Feed to Y02.

13.8 Returning Y02 to Normal After Being Powered from Y01 by Paralleling Power Sources

NOTE

Keys 47 and 48 are needed to perform this evolution.

Check of synchronism at Y02 prior to transfer is performed by Electrical Maintenance.

CAUTION

If a diesel generator is supplying power to bus A3 or A4, the DG is out of sync with buses that the DG is not supplying.

Even with bus B5 and B6 in synchronism, electrical connections at Y01, Y02, the Y01 transformer or the Y02 transformer can be such that Y01 and Y02 are not in synch.

WARNING Paralleling power sources out of synch, can result in personnel injury and equipment damage.

1. CHECK reactor is shutdown.

2. CHECK neither bus A3 nor bus A4 is being powered from a DG.

3. At Y02, CHECK Normal Feed to Y02 is open.

4. ENSURE Normal Supply to Y02 Instrument AC Transformer X-61 (B6143B) closed.

5. At Y02, DIRECT Electrical Maintenance to check synchronism of power sources on each side of Normal Feed to Y02 and OBTAIN synch status.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 149 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

Section 13.8 (Continued)

6. IF power sources are NOT in synch, THEN:

a. INFORM CRS/SM.

b. EXIT this section.

7. IF power sources are in synch, THEN:

a. At Y02, for Normal Feed to Y02:

1) Using key 48, UNLOCK Normal Feed to Y02.

2) CLOSE and LOCK Normal Feed to Y02.

b. IF Y01 and Y02 are to be separated, THEN:

1) At Y02, for Tie Breaker to Y01:

a) Using key 48, UNLOCK Tie Breaker to Y01.

b) OPEN and LOCK Tie Breaker to Y01.

2) At Y01, for Tie Breaker to Y02:

a) Using key 47, UNLOCK Tie Breaker to Y02.

b) OPEN and LOCK Tie Breaker to Y02.

c. IF Y01 and Y02 will remained tied with Y02 feeding Y01, THEN at Y01:

1) Using key 47, UNLOCK Normal Feed to Y01.

2) OPEN and LOCK Normal Feed to Y01.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 150 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION

14.0 C27 AND C28 POWER SUPPLY OPERATIONS

NOTE

Instrument Cabinet C27 is located west of Balance of Plant cabinets and Unit 1 Control Room Unit Cooler (VUC-9).

Instrument Cabinet C28 is located next to A RPS Cabinet.

1. IF maintenance is required on C27 or C28 standby DC power supply, THEN:

a. PLACE Power Supply Selector switch in NORM position.

b. TURN OFF the standby power supply.

2. IF maintenance is required on C27 or C28 normal DC power supply, THEN:

a. PLACE POWER SUPPLY SELECTOR switch in STBY position.

b. TURN OFF the normal power supply.

3. WHEN desired to return C27 or C28 DC power supply to service, THEN:

a. TURN ON applicable power supply.

b. PLACE Power Supply Selector Switch in AUTO (normal position).

15.0 RECORDS

1. None

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 151 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION Attachment A Page 1 of 1 120V Vital AC Distribution Panel Breaker Alignment

WARNING Operating a breaker without the consequences being known can lead to control power failure, equipment damage or personnel injury.

1. IF a breaker (other than a spare) is open, THEN CONSULT Shift Manager before closing.

2. CHECK ALL load breakers closed on the following panels.

3. RECORD ANY breaker that is protective tagged or not in the desired position on Form 3305.001E, Lineup Exception Sheet.

PANEL EXHIBIT INITIALS

RS1 A _____

RS2 B _____

RS3 C _____

RS4 D _____

Y03 G _____

Y04 H _____

RC1 I _____

Y01 E _____

Y02 F _____

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 152 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION Attachment B Page 1 of 2 Consequences for Loss of Power to C540

NOTE

C540 is powered by Inverter supplying RS-2.

With the exception of the Decay Heat ACI circuit, all instrumentation listed in this attachment is associated with Alternate Shutdown.

Tech Specs are referenced and appropriate LCOs are applicable for all instrumentation and equipment functions that are lost.

Component Function Assessment Operational Effect/Contingencies Alternate Instrumentation used Shutdown capabilities Establish hourly fire watch in Shutdown during a Cable Spread reduced during a Cable Cable Spread Room (Zone 97R).

Instruments Room or Control Room Spread Room or Control Notify Fire Protection fire. Room fire.

PT-1041 WR RCS input to ICC. Redundant train available. Loss of 1 Channel SCM Monitors WR RCS pressure Redundant train available. WR RCS pressure input to Alt SD input to SPDS. display on SPDS A & B inoperable.

WR RCS pressure Redundant train available. Bypass DROPS Channels 1 input to DROPS. and 2.

WR RCS pressure PR-1042 available on C04. Flag PI-1401 OOS.

indication on C04.

EFIC Ch B Provide inputs for EFIC Loss of the inputs would Channel B EFIC Will Trip, SG A/B level channel B initiate create a half trip for EFW resulting in Half Trip of EFW and and pressure functions and train and MSLI. Train B SG MSLI.

trans. input for SG level and level and pressure control pressure control. functions would be During EFW actuation, SG LI-2622 inoperable. Pressure inputs to B EFIC will LI-2624 result in open signal to both CV-LI-2671 If actuated, train B would 2645 and CV-2647 (P-7A supply LI-2673 call for full EFW (seeing 0 to both SGs) due to Vector. SG level) and would not be Level inputs to B EFIC will require PI-2618B able to control SGB manual operation of CV-2645 and PI-2667B pressure (seeing 0 CV-2647.

pressure). Ops can take manual control. P-7A flow paths are inoperable due to CV-2645 and CV-2647 level controls inoperable. (TS 3.3.11 Condition C)

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 153 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION Attachment B Page 2 of 2 Consequences for Loss of Power to C540

Component Function Assessment Operational Effect/Contingencies CV-1410 DH ACI circuit. Valve is de-energized and TS 3.4.14 Condition B locked closed.

Gamma Loss of one source Only one SR channel Bypass DROPS Channels 1 & 2.

Metrics range channel NI-502 required unless moving SPDS screens affected. PMS Source on C03 and SPDS fuel. Alarm K08 A4 affected.

Range LT-4205 T-41B Q CST level. Loss of CST indication to Periodically check levels locally.

SPDS and alarms.

SY-6601B EFW turbine K3 speed PPAS input not critical. Loss of K-3 speed indication on indication to PPAS/C09. Resistor on transducer C-09. Local indication available.

input prevents loss of circuit function.

Note 1 Pressurizer control Non-Q Maintain TE-1001A Selected TE-1002A Note 1 Pressurizer control Non-Q Maintain LT-1001A Selected on LIS-1002 C04. (TS 3.3.15 Condition A)

LT-1002 Note 2 RCS temperature. Indication only None T 11XX

Note 1 If TE-1002A and LT-1002 Pressurizer Level/Temperature inputs are selected, the following will happen:

Loss of pressurizer level

Loss of automatic pressurizer level control (CV-1235)

Pressurizer heaters will cutoff due to low level interlock being made up

Pressurizer HI/HI and Lo Lo alarms will annunciate

Loss of Pressurizer Level indication at Daisy panel

1203.015, Pressurizer System Malfunction contains direction

Note 2 Loss of the following RCS Temperature Indications:

Loop B WR TC at C03 and SPDS (T1147)

Loop B WR TH at C03 and SPDS (T1139)

Loop A WR TC at C03 and SPDS (T1115)

Loop A WR TH at C03 and SPDS (T1112)

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 154 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION Exhibit A Page 1 of 1 Panel RS1

1107.003 EXHIBIT A Revised 2/26/18 PANEL RS1

Power Source: Inverter Y11 or Y15 Location: Control Room Ref drawing: E-17-1

1 A RPS Cabinet C41 2 ESAS Analog-1 Panel C88 (E-544-1) (E-537-3)

3 Spare 4 ESAS Digital-1 Panel C86 and C87 (E-537-1)

CRD #1 Cabinet C49 Reactor Building Pressure Transmitter 5 (E-550-1) 6 PT-2400 to A RPS (E-268-1, E-573-1, E-548-1)

CV-7910 position indication C19 Rad. Monitor Panel C24 7 LPI/Decay Heat Pump Brg CLR E-50A 8 Rad. Monitor Panel C25 Bay 1 Inlet CV-3840 and C18 Indication (E-533-1)

(E-186-1, E-567-8) 9 NNI X Cabinet C47 Normal Supply 10 Auxiliary Equipment Panel C486-1 (E-546-3) (E-258-2)

H2 Analyzer Cabinet C178 EFIC Channel A Panel C37-1 11 SV-1840 - Hot Leg Sample Isol 12 (E-597-2)

(E-578-6) 13 Control Board Panel C09 14 Instrument Cabinet C544 (E-559-1) (ICS Room) (E-722-5)

EFIC Trip Interface Instrumentation Cabinet C539 15 Panels C511 and C513 16 Normal Power (E-596-1,5) (E-258-9)

Control Board Panels C03 & C04 Indicator Penetration Room Ventilation 17 Power 18 Flow Switch C28 (E-557-1, E-558-1) (E-254-2A, E-579-2)

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 155 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION Exhibit B Page 1 of 1 Panel RS2

1107.003 EXHIBIT B Revised 7/17/17 PANEL RS2

Power Source: Inverter Y22 or Y25 Location: Control Room Ref drawing: E-17-1A

1 B RPS Cabinet C42 2 ESAS Analog -2 Panel C89 (E-544-2) (E-537-3)

3 Spare 4 ESAS Digital-2 Panel C91 and C92 (E-537-4)

CRD #2 Cabinet C49 Reactor Building Pressure 5 (E-550-1) 6 Transmitter PT-2401 to B RPS (E-268-1, E-573-1, E-548-3)

LPI/Decay Heat Pump Brg CLR E-50B Rad. Monitor Panel C24 7 Inlet CV-3841 & C16 Indications 8 Rad. Monitor Panel C25 Bay 2 (E-186-1, E-566-6) (E-533-2)

SV-1818 - PZR & Hot Leg Sample (outside RB) Isolation 9 SV-1841 - Letdown Sample Isol 10 Auxiliary Equipment Panel C486-2 SV-1843 - PASS Sample RTN to MUT (E-258-2)

H2 Analyzer C179 (E-453-3, E-578-2)

EFIC Trip Interface EFIC Channel B Panel C37-2 11 Panels C512 and C514 12 (E-597-4)

(E-596-3,7) 13 Control Board Panel C09 14 Spare (E-559-2) 15 EFIC Alarm Controller C545 16 Instrument Cabinet C543 (ICS Room)

(E-599-2, E-597-5) (E-721-5)

Control Board Panels C03 & C04 Indicator Turbine Generator 17 Power 18 Trip Indicator Panel C20 (E-557-1, E-558-1) (E-560-2)

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 156 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION Exhibit C Page 1 of 1 Panel RS3

1107.003 EXHIBIT C Revised 7/17/17 PANEL RS3

Power Source: Inverter Y13 or Y15 Location: Control Room Ref drawing: E-17-1

1 C RPS Cabinet C43 2 ESAS Analog -3 Panel C90 (E-544-3) (E-537-3) 3 Spare 4 ICS Cabinet C46 (E-545-3)

CRD Pos System Logic Cabinet C51 Reactor Building Pressure 5 (E-553-2) 6 Transmitter PT-2402 to C RPS (E-268-1, E-573-1, E-548-5)

ICC (Train A) Cabinet C553 (E-528-1) Plant performance Analysis 7 SFP level instrument LIT-2020-3 8 System (C47, C46, C585)

(E-259-10) (E-546-3)

Cont. Rad Monitor RE-8060 and EFW 9 Spare 10 PIT-2888 in cabinet C486-3 (E-410, E-331-35) 11 Spare 12 EFIC Channel C Panel C37-3 (E-597-6)

13 Spare 14 Spare

Primary Power to B MFP Cntrls Secondary 15 Power to A MFP C579 16 Spare (E-331-47, E-556-5) 17 Spare 18 Spare

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 157 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION Exhibit D Page 1 of 1 Panel RS4

1107.003 EXHIBIT D Revised 7/17/17 PANEL RS4

Power Source: Inverter Y24 or Y25 Location: Control Room Ref drawing: E-17-1A

1 D RPS Cabinet C44 2 Spare (E-544-4) 3 Spare 4 Spare CRD Pos System Logic Cabinet C51 Reactor Building Pressure 5 (E-553-2) 6 Transmitter PT-2403 to D RPS (E-268-1, E-573-1, E-548-7)

ICC (Train B) Cabinet C554 (E-528-3) Rad Monitor Panel C25 Bay 3 (E-533-3) 7 SFP level instrument LIT-2020-4 8 (Note1)

(E-259-11)

Cont Rad Mon RE-8061, 9 NNI Y Cabinet C48 Normal Supply 10 EFW Test Flow FI-2888, (E-547-3) T-41 Level LIT-4203 in C486-4 (E-410, E-331-33, E-331-34) 11 Spare 12 EFIC Channel D Panel C37-4 (E-597-8) 13 Vital Power to Radio UPS Outlet 14 Spare Primary Power to A MFP Cntrls Secondary 15 Power to B MFP C579 16 Spare (E-556-5) 17 Spare 18 Spare

Note 1:De-energizing this circuit causes actuation of Control Room Isolation [2.2.1]

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 158 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION Exhibit E Page 1 of 2 Panel Y01

1107.003 EXHIBIT E Revised 04/24/24 PANEL Y01 PAGE 1 OF 2 Power Source: B5143B through Transformer X -51 Location: South Electrical Equipment Room Ref drawing: E-23-1

1 Annunciator Strobe Light for X01A & X01B 2 Control Power in Protective Relay and (E-111-2) Gen Recorder Cabinet C20 (E -560-2) 3 Bleeder Trip Control Valves and Turbine 4 Regen. Waste 2C138 Unit 1 & 2 Interface Drain Valves cabinet C02 (E-556-1) (E-2968-2) 5 Hydrogen Control Panel G06 6 Control Power in cabinet C26 (E-145-1) (E-578-6) 7 Computer & Firing Circuit Power Supply 8 Control Power in cabinet C28 E01 (Note 1) (E-254) 9 Turb. Misc. Instrumentation cabinet C01 10 Entergy Radio Transceiver M118 (E-555-1)

TCS Uninterruptible Power Supply 3 11 Spare 12 C31-2-UPS3, C31-3 (E-23-1, E-779-7)

Auto Stop and 13 Spare 14 Vacuum reset T01 & TS-8520 (E-502-2) 15 Gen. Isophase Bus H2 Gas Analyzer G10 16 CV-2856 & CV-2857, FWP & Htr (E-502-6) Sprays (E-307)

17 RB Wide Range Press Recorder PR-2408 18 Instr. Air Crossover Valve SV-5400 C18 (E-331-11, E-567-12) (E-380-2)

19 Condensate Demin Panel C111 20 Screen Wash Sys Control Panel C160 (E-331-61) (E-527-1)

21 Diesel Fire Pump P-6B Control 22 Boiler Room Coil Freeze Alarm Panel C146 (E-347-1) Panel C402 (E-311-2)

Note 1: Computer Support Group (CSG) is required to shut down E01 Computers before de-energizing Computer & Firing Circuit Power Supply E01 circuit (Y01-07).

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 159 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION Exhibit E Page 2 of 2 Panel Y01

1107.003 EXHIBIT E Revised 04/24/24 PANEL Y01 PAGE 2 OF 2 Power Source: B5143B through Transformer X-51 Location: South Electrical Equipment Room Ref drawing: E-23-1

RCP P-32A and B speed CKT Control Room Annunciators 23 amplifier panels C156 & C157 24 (E-457-1)

(E-536-5)

VSF-1E Iso Damper Motor (CV-7400) 25 Fire Protection Panel C19 26 Instrumentation Cabinet C539 Backup Video Monitor QI1150 Power (E-258-9)

(E-209-6, E-568-1, E-259-7) 27 Secondary Sample Panel C301-2 28 Isophase Bus Cooler Fan (E-249-2) Aux TB010 (E-114-2)

29 Secondary Sample Panel C301-2 30 Fire Protection Sys Panel C463-3 (E-249-2) (E-471-12A)

Control Room Isol C141A 31 Spare 32 RBS Clr SW Inlet CV-3804 (E-359-2B, E-281)

Turb. Gen. Recorders C11 Reheat Moist Sep and Reheat Sys Drains Local 33 Warming Valve Control 34 Annunciators K26, K27 (E-171-1) (E-418-4)

Serv Air Hdr Press Lo Annunciator K21A RC Pri MU Pump, Incore Monitor 35 TB422 36 Recorders, RCP Seal Recorders (E-531-15) (E-564-1)

Fire Protection Sys Panel C463-4 Instrument power supply C27 37 (E-471-12E) 38 normal DC power supply (E-330-1)

NNI Y Cabinet C48 Backup Supply DG Damper Position Ind C19 39 (E-547-3) 40 SU Blr FO pump lo level trip (E-356-2D, 2E, E-115,313) 41 NNI Y Cabinet C48 Cooling Fan and 42 Control Power in cabinet C14 Receptacles (E-547-3) (E-565-1)

N/A Normal Feed to Y01 N/A Tie Breaker to Y02

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 160 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION Exhibit F Page 1 of 2 Panel Y02

1107.003 EXHIBIT F Revised 7/17/17 PANEL Y02 PAGE 1 OF 2 Power Source: B6143B through Transformer X-61 Location: Upper North Electrical Penetration Room Ref drawing: E-23-1

1 PA & Plant Intercom System GAI 2 Paging & Pax Telephone System (E-639-1) (E-639-1) 3 Annunciator Strobe Light for X01C & X01S 4 Signal Converter Power C23 (E-111-2) (E-331-3)

Pressurizer Heaters Control C04 Instrument Power Supply C27 5 (E-201-1) 6 Standby DC power supply (E-330-1)

Batch CNTRL Outlet CV -1250, ICW Pump Suct/Disch X -Overs C30, FIT-MU & P CV's on C04, 3601/3602, Cond Offgas Xmitrs 7 TI1150A/B Subcooled Margin Ind C04 8 FW HTR HLD Ind and HL switches, Cond (E-558-1, E-259-7) Ixmitrs PSX-2850/2851 (E-231, E-169-2, E-331-5) 9 ICW Pump Auxiliary Control C09 10 Secondary Sample Panel C301-1 (E-230-1) Comp Cabinet C301-4 (E-249-2) 11 Main FWP Trip Control C02 12 Secondary Sample Panel C301-1 (E-286-1) (E-249-2)

Main FWP Trip Control C02, 13 Hotwell Level Recorder LR-2871 14 Control Power in cabinet C26 GS Cond Diff Press Contrl CV-2905 (E-578-1)

(E-286, E-331-4, E-331-1)

Cond Steam Dump Spray Valves C02 Fire Protection Panel C463 15 (E-307) 16 Pent Rm Vent Heat Det Panel C578 (E-421-6)

Main FWP Recirc Control and RB Leak Detector RX-7460 17 Valve Pos Indicators C03 18 (E-409-9)

(E-331-6, E-331-45) 19 Signal Converter Power C23 20 Evacuation Warning System C25 (E-331-3) (E-427-1)

Aux FW Pump Flow FS-2819 in C12 Evacuation Warning System C25 21 Mn Stm to E-2A/2B CV-3021/CV-3028 22 (E-427-1)

(E-331-5, E-193-1)

RCP P-32C and D Speed CKT RCP Vibration Monitor C15 and 23 Amplifier Panels C158 & C159 24 MSSV Pos Monitor C550 & RDACS (E-325-1) (E-446-1, E-414-3)

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 161 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION Exhibit F Page 2 of 2 Panel Y02

1107.003 EXHIBIT F Revised 7/17/17 PANEL Y02 PAGE 2 OF 2 Power Source: B6143B through Transformer X-61 Location: Upper North Electrical Penetration Room Ref drawing: E-23-1

ICW Makeup SVs in C30 25 Radwaste Annunciator C112 26 T-40A Aux Relays, (E-463-1) ICW CRD Pre-FLTR CV's (E-236, E-170-1, E-237-2))

Radwaste Annunciator C113 Main & FW 27 (E-464-1) 28 Turbine Aux. Devices C21 (E-569-1)

Radwaste Annunciator C115 and Gas Instrument AC to 29 Sampling Panel C119 (Note 1) 30 Chem Add Panels C101/C102 (E-465-1, E-532-8) (E-532-44)

ICS Fan Bus cabinet C46 Control Room Isolation C141B 31 (E-545-3) 32 RBS Clr SW Inlet CV-3805 (E-359-2C, E-281-1)

NNI X Cabinet C47 Backup Supply Sola Trans. Bypass Switch S-16 33 (E-264-4) 34 XY-234 (To ICS Y Bus)

(E-545-3)

RB Humidity Monitors TB 989 C499 RB SW Flow, 35 PWR-6278 and PWR-6279 36 C502 DH Check Valve Press Indic.

(E-331-52) (E-331-23, E-331-25) 37 NNI X Fan Supply C47 38 Computer Cab. Fire Det Sys C410 (E-546-3) (E-471-3)

Control Room Isolation C141 DG Damper Position Ind. C19 39 Pent Rm Vent Heat Det Panel C431 40 Computer Color Printer PRY-9501 (E-359-2A, E-421-6) (E-356-2F, 2G, E-485-1) 41 Met Tower Equipment C29 42 Fire Protection Sys panels C414 and (E-331-16J) C456 (E-423-2)

N/A Normal Feed to Y02 N/A Tie Breaker to Y01

Note 1: When breaker 29 is opened, autostart feature for Waste Gas Comp is disabled and Waste Gas Disch valve (CV-4830) closes. When breaker 29 is closed, CV-4830 requires re-alignment.

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 162 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION Exhibit G Page 1 of 1 Panel Y03

1107.003 Revised 04/24/24

Power Source: B5712 through Transformer X-52 Location: A3 Switchgear Room Ref drawing: E-23-3

Main Breaker

Instrument Pwr Supply Cab. C45 Primary DROPS Computer Cabinet C498 1 Source 2 (E-130)

(E-590-1)

C4A2 Aftercooler Blower/Dryer/ MSR Distiller Level Controllers 3 Motorized Drain Valve, EDG Cooling Fan 4 and Dump controllers C412A/B at EDG Excitation Cabinet E-11 (VSF-11) (E-174-2)

(E-108-9)

C4B2 Aftercooler Blower/Dryer/ HPI Line Temperature Recorder TR -1060 5 Motorized Drain Valve 6 (E-200-1)

(E-108-9)

MSR Separator to T40 Check Vlvs MSR Distiller to FW Htr Check 7 SV-6866 through SV-6869 8 Valves SV-6870 through SV-6873 (E-174-1) (E-174-1)

MSR Drain to T40 Check Vlvs HPI Pump Aux Lube Oil Pump P-64B 9 SV-6874 through SV-6877 10 Transfer Switch B801 Control Power (E-174-1) (E-214-1B)

TCS Uninterruptible Power Supply 2 11 Spare 12 C32-1-UPS2 Via TB1129 (E-23-3, E-779-3) 13 Spare 14 See Circuit 12 (Two Pole) 15 Spare 16 Spare 17 Spare 18 Spare 19 Spare 20 Spare 21 Spare 22 Spare 23 Spare 24 Spare 25 Spare 26 Spare 27 Spare 28 Spare 29 Spare 30 Spare 31 Spare 32 Spare 33 Spare 34 Spare 35 Spare 36 Spare

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 163 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION Exhibit H Page 1 of 1 Panel Y04

1107.003 Revised 04/24/24

Power Source: B6512 through Transformer X-62 Location: A4 Switchgear Room Ref drawing: E-23-3

Main Breaker

Instrument Pwr Supply Cab C45 Alternate PWR-1096 (FI-1238/HS-1038 & SASS 1 Source 2 Indicating Lights)

(E-590-1) (M-201-198, E-331-38)

C4A1 Aftercooler Blower/Dryer/

3 Motorized Drain Valve 4 Spare (E-108-9)

C4B1 Aftercooler Blower/Dryer/

5 Motorized Drain Valve, EDG Cooling Fan 6 Spare at EDG Excitation Cabinet E-21 (VSF-21)

(E-108-9)

TCS Uninterruptible Power Supply 1 7 C32-1-UPS1 Via TB1130 8 Spare (E-23-3, E-779-3) 9 See Circuit 7 (Two Pole) 10 Spare 11 Spare 12 Spare 13 Spare 14 Spare 15 Spare 16 Spare 17 Spare 18 Spare 19 Spare 20 Spare 21 Spare 22 Spare 23 Spare 24 Spare 25 Spare 26 Spare 27 Spare 28 Spare 29 Spare 30 Spare 31 Spare 32 Spare 33 Spare 34 Spare 35 Spare 36 Spare

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 164 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION Exhibit I Page 1 of 1 Panel RC1

1107.003 EXHIBIT I Revised 04/24/24 PANEL RC1

Power Source: Inverter Y41 Location: Computer Room Ref drawing: E-22-1

1 Plant Computer I/O cabinet C99-0 2 Plant Computer CPU cabinet C99 -5 (E-484-1, E-485-1) (E-484-1, E-485-1) 3 Plant Computer I/O cabinet C99-1 4 Plant Computer CPU cabinet C99 -6 (E-484-1, E-485-1) (E-484-1, E-485-1) 5 Plant Computer I/O cabinet C99-2 6 Operators Console C100 (E-484-1, E-485-1) (E-484-1, E-485-1) 7 Plant Computer I/O cabinet C99-3 8 C100 Refueling Communications (E-484-1, E-485-1) (E-639-2)

Plant Computer I/O cabinet C99-4 Plant Computer Printer PRY-9500 Recept 9 (E-484-1, E-485-1) 10 below floor in comp room (E-484-1, E-485-1)

Analog RTD Bridges and Signal Receptacle below floor in computer room 11 Conditioning cabinet C96-0 12 (E-484-1, E-485-1)

(E-484-1, E-485-1)

Analog Thermocouple Inputs Uniform Receptacle below floor in computer room 13 Temperature Ref cabinet C97-1 14 for FIDMS Cabinet (C99A)

(E-484-1, E-485-1) (E-484-1)

C85 Plant Computer Printer Receptacle TCS Secondary Power Feed C31 15 NE Corner CR 16 (E-22-1, E-779-4)

(E-484-1, E-485-1)

C002 Dynamic Disturbance Recording Receptacle below floor in computer room 17 Panel 18 for FIDMS Cabinet (C99A)

(E-105-1) (E-484-1)

Main Turbine Supervisory Instruments Refuel Comm receptacle in Control Room 19 C250 20 Console C93 (E-22-1, M-4-316-16) (E-639-2) 21 Blank 22 Blank 23 ICCMDS Mimic PC Cabinet C486-3 24 Computerized Notification System (E-259-7) receptacle P45 back of Control Rm 25 Blank 26 Blank Transient Response Data Input Panel 27 (Dasey panel) C166 28 Blank (E-484-1, E-485-1) 29 Blank 30 Blank 31 Blank 32 Blank 33 Blank 34 ICCMDS Mimic PC C486-4 (E-259-7)

Main Breaker

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 165 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION Exhibit K Page 1 of 1 Red Train Inverter One Line Diagram

1107.003 EXHIBIT K REVISED 7/7/17 RED TRAIN INVERTER ONE LINE DIAGRAM

1107.003 Rev. 035 Page 166 of 166 INVERTER AND 120V VITAL AC DISTRIBUTION Exhibit L Page 1 of 1 Green Train Inverter One Line Diagram

1107.003 EXHIBIT L REVISED 7/7/17 GREEN TRAIN INVERTER ONE LINE DIAGRAM

Enclosure, Attachment 5

1CAN072401

Single line description of the ANO-1 Electrical Distribution System

For Information Only

Enclosure, Attachment 6

1CAN072401

List of Regulatory Commitments

1CAN072401 Enclosure, Attachment 6 Page 1 of 1

List of Regulatory Commitments

This table identifies actions discussed in this letter for which Entergy commits to perform. Any other actions discussed in this submittal are described for the NRCs information and are not commitments.

COMMITMENT TYPE SCHEDULED (Check one) COMPLETION DATE (If Required)

ONE-TIME CONTINUING ACTION COMPLIANCE

Entergy will revise ANO-1 SAR as X Within 90 days after described in Attachment 1 of the NRC approval.

submittal.

Entergy will revise ANO-1 AOP, X Within 90 days after OP-1203.015, "Pressurizer System the NRC approval.

Failure," (Reference 8) to include the TCA in accordance with ANO-1 Procedure OP-1015.029, "Unit 1 Emergency and Abnormal Operating Procedure Writer's Guide".

v t e Letter Sequence Request
EPID:L-2024-LLA-0092, Request for Review and Approval of Changes to the Safety Analysis Report and to a Confirmatory Order Clarifying an Alternate Means of Compliance for Pressurizer Heaters Emergency Power Supply (Open)
Initiation Request Acceptance Administration Questions 28 January 2025 19 March 2025 Answers 26 February 2025 8 April 2025 Results Approval Other: ML25192A201
MONTHYEAR2025-02-26 [Table View]

1CAN072401, Request for Review and Approval of Changes to the Safety Analysis Report and to a Confirmatory Order Clarifying an Alternate Means of Compliance for Pressurizer Heaters Emergency Power Supply

Text

Subject:

Enclosure:

References:

=

2.0 REFERENCES

2.0 REFERENCES

Navigation menu

1CAN072401, Request for Review and Approval of Changes to the Safety Analysis Report and to a Confirmatory Order Clarifying an Alternate Means of Compliance for Pressurizer Heaters Emergency Power Supply

Text

Subject:

Enclosure:

References:

=

2.0 REFERENCES

2.0 REFERENCES

Navigation menu

Search